EPA-R4-72-006                     Environmental Monitoring Series
June 1972
Reviews of Current Literature
on  Analytical  Methodology
and Quality  Control
           No. 9
                            Office of Research and Monitoring
                            U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                            Washington, D.C. 20460

-------
                                   NOTICE
          This bulletin is prepared monthly by the staff of the Analytical
Methodology Information Center (AMIC), Information Systems Section, Battelle,
Columbus Laboratories, Columbus, Ohio, under EPA Contract No. 68-01-0166,
to inform personnel of the Analytical Quality Control Laboratory and other
segments of the National Analytical Methods Development Research Program of
recent publications on methodology.  Personnel associated with the center are
Mr. Ralph Darby, Project Director, Mr. Robert Little, Project Leader,
Mr. John Mortland, Miss Verna Holoman, Mr. Ronald Snyder, Mr. Michael
Mackan, Mr. Ronald Byrd, and Mr. George Long, Abstractors.

          The 3" x 5" format of the citations and use of card stock is intended
to facilitate removal and filing of items of interest.  Because of space limi-
tations, the index terms accompanying the citations are selected from a complete
list as representative of the important concepts presented in each article.

          Comments and suggestions regarding the content of the "Reviews" or
requests from EPA personnel to be placed on the mailing list should -be directed
to the Project Officer:

                    Dr. Cornelius I. Weber
                    Analytical Quality Control Laboratory
                    National Environmental Research Center
                    Environmental Protection Agency
                    Cincinnati, Ohio  45268

-------
         REVIEWS OF CURRENT LITERATURE ON

    ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL

                     NO.  9
                       By
Analytical Methodology Information Center (AMIC)
           Information Systems Section
           Battelle Memorial Institute
      505 King Avenue, Columbus, Ohio  43201

             Contract No. 68-01-0166
               Project 16020 HJE
                  Prepared for
        OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND MONITORING
      U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
              WASHINGTON, D.C.  20460

-------
                                             ul
                                             o
             NATIONAL ANALYTICAL METHODS DEVELOPMENT RESEARCH PROGRAM
                       ANALYTICAL QUALITY CONTROL LABORATORY
                         REVIEWS OF CURRENT LITERATURE ON
                   ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL

No. 9                                                                June,  1972


Arrangement of the citations followings the major research areas of the Analytical
Quality Control Laboratory and other segments of the National Analytical Methods
Development Research Program.  Items which apply to more than one area are  cross-
referenced .
                                    CONTENTS
1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS                                    Page  1-20

    Scope;  Wet chemical methods; Nutrients; NTA; Trace metals; Helium glow;
    Chromatography (thin layer, gas, liquid); Spectroscopy (atomic absorption;
    flame emission, arc-spark, visible, UV, IR, fluorescent); Radiochemistry;
    Automation of methods; Ion-specific and other probes;  Mass spectrometry;
    Mass spectra; NMR; Instrument-computer interface; Chlorinated hydrocarbons
    (pesticides, PCB's, other); Trace organics; Petroleum processes (reforming,
    hydroforming, platforming, catalysts); Petroleum additives; Reduced crudes;
    Sulfur isotopes;  Boiling range determination; Asphatenes and carboids;
    Weathering; Organometallies; Elemental analysis; Paraffinic distribution;
    Petroleum wastes; Water quality standards; Effluent monitoring.


2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS                                               Page 21-42

    Scope;  Plankton; Periphyton; Macrophyton; Macroinvertebrates; Fish;
    Sample collection (grab samplers, artificial substrates*); Sample
    processing (preservation, staining, automatic and manual sorting and
    counting); Organisms identification (taxonomic keys, optical and electron
    microscopy, gas chromatography, electrophoresis, karyosystematics); Biomass
    measurements (drying, freeze-drying, ashing, ATP, DNA, chlorophyll measure-
    ment, calorimetry); Metabolic rates (primary productivity, respiration,
    electron transport, nitrogen fixation); Culturing; Biomonitoring; Bioassay;
    Bioaccumulation of hazardous materials; Community structure (indicator
    organisms, species diversity, community stability); Mathematical models;
    Statistical analysis.

-------
3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS                                      Page 43-54

     Scope:  Pollution indicators; Waterborne pathogens; Sampling; Detection;
     Identification; Enumeration; Monitoring; Survival; Automation; Instrumenta-
     tion; Cell counting; Selective and differential media; Growth factors;
     Metabolic products; Membrane filter procedures; Microbiological standards;
     Specific bacteriophage; Fluorescent antibody techniques; Radioactive
     tracers; Antigen identification; Photomicroscopy; Optical measurements;
     Data handling, presentation, and interpretation.


4.  METHODS AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION                           Page 55-56

     Scope;  Collaborative testing; Laboratory and analyst performance evaluation;
     Inter- and intralaboratory quality control; Evaluation of laboratory equip-
     ment; Statistical treatment of analytical data; Experimental design.


5.  INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMENT                                       Page 57-60

     Scope;  Intake systems (methods of sampling, connecting lines, wells, motors,
     pumps, mode of operation); Sensors (electro-chemical, electro-biological,
     thermodynamic, mechanical, optical, nuclear); Analyzers (analog and digital
     amplifiers, output displays); Recording systems (telemetry, data logging,
     digital data processors).
                                         ii

-------
                  Analytical Methodology Information Center

                                  BATTELLE
                            Columbus Laboratories
                               505 King Avenue
                            Columbus, Ohio  43201


                          Quick Response Inquiries


          During the first  (July, 1970 - March, 1971) and the present (December,
1971 - November, 1972) contract periods, AMIC has set aside funds for providing
Quick Response Inquiry services to EPA personnel^  This service may be used to
provide limited technical assistance, analysis of the literature, comprehensive
reviews of current and past literature, and surveys of the literature outside the
immediate scope of AMIC.  Cost per request is limited to approximately 2 man-days
of effort.  As of July, 1972, 37 QRI's have been or are being prepared by AMIC.
Those which may be of interest to personnel in various EPA laboratories are as
follows:

     QRI-1    "Effect of Copper on Algae and Periphyton (Literature Survey)",
                August 5, 1970.
     QRI-8    "Extraction of Organophosphorus Pesticides in Water (Literature
                Survey)", October 21, 1970.
     QRI-10   "Environmental Impact of Detergent Ingredients", October 15, 1970.
     QRI-12   "Cadmium Toxicity (Literature Survey)11, January 6, 1971.
     QRI-12A  "Analytical Methods for Cadmium (Literature Survey)", January 14, 1971.
     QRI-13   "Analytical Methods for Diethylstilbestrol", January 26, 1972.
     QRI-14   "Use of Semi-Conductor Materials for Monitoring Air Pollution",
                January 7, 1972„
     QRI-15   "Toxicity of Chromium to Aquatic Life (Literature Survey)",
                February 15, 1972.
     QRI-16   "Analytical Methods for Bacteria in Chlorinated Wastewater and
                Sediments (Literature Survey)", February 24, 1972.
     QRI-17   "Sanitary Significance of Klebsiella", March 16, 1972.
     QRI-18   "Methods for Determining Biochemical Oxygen Demand (Literature
                Survey)", March 21, 1972.
     QRI-19   "Gas Chromatographic Determination of Petroleum in Water Using
                FID, FPD, Electron Capture and Thermionic Detectors (Literature
                Survey)", March 16, 1972.
     QRI-20   "Analysis of Recent Literature on Biotransformation of Arsenic,
                Cadmium, Copper, Lead, Selenium, and Thallium", May 16, 1972.
     QRI-21   "Heavy Metal Characterization of Sewage Plant Influents and
                Effluents (Literature Survey)", May 12, 1972.
     QRI-22   "Resonance Fluorescence of Active Gas-Phase Atomic Hydrogen,
                Oxygen, and Halogens, and Molecular OH, CO, and NO (Literature
                Survey)", June 26, 1972.
     QRI-23   "Escherichia Coli as a Microbiological Indicator of Pollution",
                In Process.
     QRI-24   "Characterization of Effluents from Pharmaceutical Industries",
                August 1, 1972.
              "Unattended Samplers of Dissolved Organics", In Process.
              "Bioassay and Biomonitoring of Water Pollutants", In Process.

-------
      QRI-27   "Toxicity of Furfural, Heptachlor, and Heptachlor Epoxide",
                 June 22, 1972.
      QRI-28   "Infrared Analysis of Petroleum Products (Literature Survey)",
                 June 20, 1972,
      QRI'29   "Methods for Extraction, Characterization, Isolation, and
                 Identification of Naturally Occurring Organic Materials in
                 Water (Literature Survey)", July 3, 1972.
      QRI-30   "Methods for Preconcentration for Analysis of Trace Metals in
                 Marine Samples (Literature Survey)", July 19, 1972.
      QRI-31   "Analysis of Heavy Metals in Seawater by Atomic Absorption
                 (Literature Survey)", July 21, 1972.
      QRI-32   "Effects of Chromium on Sewage Treatment", In Process„
      QRI-33   "Rainwater Analysis (Literature Survey)", August 11, 1972«
      QRI-34   "Slaughterhouse and Granary Wastes (Literature Survey)", August 9, 1972,
      QRI-35   "Biodegradation of Cyanide Wastes (Literature Survey)", July 24, 1972,
      QRI^v36   "Biological Transformation of Lead in Oil", In Process.
               "Methods of Characterization and Analysis of Bottom Sediments
                 and Deposits", In Process0

           EPA staff members interested in further information or copies of these
 QRI*s may write or call Robert Little at AMIC (address above), telephone:  Area
 Code 614, 299-3151, Extension 3264;   ETS:  Area Code_614J_^95::8045, Extension
^1264.  A limited number of additional QRI's are available to meet urgent informa-
 tion demands within the EPA.  Those interested should contact the Project Officer,
 Dr. Cornelius I. Weber, Analytical Quality Control Laboratory, National Environ-
 mental Research Center, EPA, Cincinnati, Ohio  45268, telephone:   Area Code 513,
 684-2913, for information and guidance on handling such requests.


                             Copy and Loan Service


           EPA personnel who are unable to obtain copies of documents (except books)
 announced in the "Reviews of Current Literature" from an EPA library may request
 them directly from AMIC.

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AMD CHEMICAL METHODS
AM1C-1985
"ADVANCES IK ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY AND INSTRUMENTATION. Volume 9 - SPECTROCHEMICAL METHOD6
OF ANALYSIS", WJnefordr.er, J. D., Editor, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., Wlley-Interscience,
Kev York, Kew York, 1971, 530 pp.
MdC-2360
"INTERACTION BETWEEN FATTY ACIDS AND CALCITE IN SEAWATER",  Meyers,  P.  A.,  Quinn,  J. G.,
Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 16,  No. 6,  November 1971,  PP 992-997.
          This volume reviews the basic principles, instrumentation, and methods of
application for analytical chemists and scientists using spectrochemical methods of
analysis.  The information is directed primarily toward quantitative analysis rather
than qualitative characterization of atoms and molecules, and covers two main areas of
interest:  (l)  flame spectrometric methods, and (2) molecular spectrometric methods.
There are 8 separate articles included in this review, each of which is written by an
authority In the field:  (l) 'Excitation and De-excitation Processes in Flames', (2)
'Flame Emission Spectrometry1,  (3) Flame Absorption Spectrometry',  CO 'Flame
Fluorescence Spectrometry', (5)  'Excitation and Emission In Solution', (6) 'Absorptimetrylof
(7) 'Fluorescence Spectrometry', and (8) 'Phosphorescence Spectrometry1.  An appendix on
the sigrial-to-noise ratio In spectrochemical. methods Is included.

INDEX TERMS:  Methodology, Instrumentation, Chemical analysis, Pollutant identification,
      Heavy metals, Halogens, Antibiotics (pesticides), Aromatic compounds,  Organic
      compounds, Organic acids, Organophosphorus pesticides, Phosphothloate pesticides,
      Alkaline earth metals,  Alkali metals, Soil analysis,  Water analysis, Chlorinated
      hydrocarbon pesticides, Spectrochemical analysis, Detection limits, Infrared
      Spectrometry, Flame emission spectrotnetry, Chemllumlnescent flame Spectrometry,
      Chemical interference,  Absorptlometry, Rare earth metals, Phosphorescence
      Spectrometry, Flame absorption Spectrometry, Flame fluorescence Spectrometry,
      Phosphorimetry.
          A gas-liquid chromatographic (GLC) technique was used to examine the
Interaction between fatty acids and calcite in seawater.   Fatty acid solutions were
prepared using heptadecanoic acid in an organic free sodium chloride solution.  Fifty
mg of calcite (particle size less than or equal to Mt microns) were added to 1-liter
samples of the fatty acid solution and dispersed by shaking.  After settling overnight,
the calcite was recovered, washed with water,  and dried to a constant weight.  The
acids were recovered from the calcite by saponifying with KOH and the methyl esters
produced were analyzed by GLC.  Recovery of the associated fatty acid by this method
was found to be 98.7 plus or minus l.U percent.  In order to ascertain the presence
   fatty acids in seawater, samples from Narragansett Bay were analyzed by the
prescribed method.  The analysis showed a total concentration of major fatty acids of
50.5 mlcrograms/llter.  Fatty acid analysis of the calcite revealed 170.8 micrograms
of total natural acids had been adsorbed on the 929.2 rag of calcite recovered.  Since
not all of the calcite was recovered,  this represents a minimum removal of l8 percent
of the total fatty acids.  It appears that natural fatty acids are in a form more
readily adsorbed by calcite than are free fatty acids dissolved in saline solution
or natural seawater.  The amount removed was directly related to the initial acid
concentration.  These compounds may contribute to the natural organic coating of
carbonate minerals In the oceans and may interfere with carbonate solution equilibria
in seawater.
AMIC-2285
 'DETERMINATION' OF DIETHYLETILBESTROL IN CATTLE TISSUES",  Donoho, A. L.,  Johnson,
 i. S., Sullivan, W. L., Eli Lilly and Company, Greenfield Laboratories,  Greenfield,
Indiana, Paper, Procedure 5801611, February 1972, 9 pp.

          An assay technique is described for diethylstllbestrol (DBS) In cattle
tissues (muscle, liver, kidney, and fat).  DEE and Its glucuronlde are extracted from
 the tissue with methanol and the samples are subjected to beta-glucuronidase enzymatic
 lydrolysls to yield free DES.  Free DEE is extracted from fat with chloroform.  The
samples are purified by liquid-liquid extraction.  The DES Is reacted in base with
dichloroacetyl chloride to form the ester which is measured by gas chromatography
using electron capture detection.  When carefully applied, the procedure will detect
DES levels of 0.5 ppb or lower in liver samples.  Quantltatlon Is reasonably good In
the 0.002 to 0.01 ppm range.  Below 0.002 ppm, the procedure is only semlquantitative.

INDEX TERMS:  Pollutant identification, Gas chromatography, Bloassay,  Cattle, Separation
      techniques, Hydrolysis, Solvent extractions, Methodology, Chemical analysis,
      Diethylstllbestrol,  Tissue, Glucuronlde, Electron capture detector, Muscle,
      Liver, Kidneys, Biological samples, Hormones, Adipose tissue, Sample preparation.
&MIC-2360 (Continued)
2/2
INDEX TERMS:   Calcite,  Sea water,  Adsorption,  Chemical precipitation,  Gas chromatography,
      Chemical analysis,  LIpids,  Calcium compounds,  Saline water,  Calcium carbonate,
      Chemical reactions,  Chelation,  Organic acids,  Organic compounds, Fatty acids,
      Gas-liquid chromatography,  Chemical Interference.

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL ABD CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC -21*^5
"CHARACTERIZATION OF GAS CHROMATOGRAPHIC EFFLUENTS VIA SCANNING FLUORESCENCE
SPECTROMETRY", Freed, D. J., Faulkner, L. R., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. Mt, No, 7,
June  1972, pp                                 -
          A  simple  technique  for the detection and Identification of gas chrorcatographic
effluents involves  the direct coupling of a gas chromatograph to a fast-scanning
fluorescence spectrometer.  Samples of the aromatic hydrocarbons naphthalene, phenan-
threne, anthracene, and pyrene were analyzed by this technique.  A SOO-800 nm spectral
range vas continuously scanned at 5-fiec intervals at 150 nm/sec In order to prevent
distortions  as a result of changing effluent concentrations.  Typical detection limits
were 0.1 picogram/sec for anthracene, 5 plcograms/sec for pyrene, and 0.2 picogram/sec
for phenanthrene.   Fluorescence emission and excitation spectra which are sufficiently
structured for use  in Identification have been obtained with a* little as 10 ng of
sample.  Qualitative and quantitative aspects are compared to other detectors and the
vast simplification that wavelength discrimination affords to complex chromatographs
Is Illustrated.

INDEX TERMS:  Gas chromatography, Effluents, Fluorescence, Instrumentation, Laboratory
      equipment, Fluorometry, Sampling, Aromatic compounds, Pollutant identification,
      Characterization, Scanning fluorescence spectrometry, Anthracene, Pyrene,
      naphthalene,  Chemical interference, Phenanthrene, Aromatic hydrocarbons.
AMIC-2623
"AH AUTOMATED LIQUID CHRCMATCGRAPHIC METHOD FOR THE DETERMINATION OF TETRACYCLINE
ANTIBIOTICS", Ascione, P. P., Zagar, J. B., Chrekian, 0. P., Journal of Chromatography,
Vol. 65, No. 2, February 23, 1972, pp 377-386.

          A liquid chromatographic method for the determination of tetracycline anti-
biotics has been automated.  A valve arrangement is used through which 20-30 samples
are applied sequentially at a flow rate of 5 ml/rain on a single column for chromatograph-
ic analysis.  The components eluted from the column are automatically analyzed (12
samples/hr) by monitoring the column eluate with calcium lactate-morpholine (CLM) through
a spectrophotometrlc flow cell of a spectrophotometer.  For the tetracycllnes studied,
the wavelengths where maximum absorption occurred when the CLM reagent was introduced
into the tetracycllne-chromaphorlc system vere as follows:  demethylchlortetracycline,
390 nm; tetracycline, 385 nm; chlortetracycllne, 393 nm.  A statistical study for pre-
cision and accuracy was made using 2U replicates and quadruplicate assays, respectively.
The overall precision had a coefficient of variation of 1.01 with a standard error
estimated to be O.lW*.  This method is applicable to crystalline tetracycline antibotics
and their various pharmaceutical dosage forms.

INDEX TERMS:  Automation, Separation techniques, Pollutant Identification, Antibiotics
      (pesticides),  Organic pesticides, Instrumentation, Laboratory equipment, Flow rates
      Spectrophotometry, Methodology, Solvent extractions, Statistical methods, Chemical
      analysis, Liquid chromatography, Tetracycline antibiotics, Column chromatography,
      Chlortetracycllne HC1, Tetracycline HC1, Demethylchlortetracycline HC1, Precision,
      Accuracy, Sample preparation, Absorbance.
AMIC-2615
"A MODIFIED PLASTIC BAG COMBUSTION TECHNIQUE FOR THE RADIOASSAY OF C-lk AND H-3 IN
BIOLOGICAL TISSUES", Lewis, J. D., International Journal of Applied Radiation and
Isotopes, Vol. 23, No. 1, January 1972, pp 39-W.                              ~

          The modified plastic bag combustion technique for the radioaasay of Carbon-lU
and tritium in biological tissues is applicable to large and small freeze-dried samples.
The advantages for using a plastic bag combustion chamber instead of a flask Include:
(1) disposability of the plastic bags; (2) ease in decontamination of the apparatus;
and (3) elimination of the explosion hazard.  Samples are placed in a polythene-nylon
bag and ignition Is accomplished with a projector lamp bulb.  When combustion is complete
10.0 ml of liquid scintillation fluid Is Injected Into the bag and allowed to
equilibrate for 30 minutes.  A flve-ml aliquot Is then removed for counting.  The
combustion of labelled n-hexadecane added to tissue or blood yielded overall recoveries
of 90-92 percent tritium and 98-99 percent for C-lU.  Similar results have been obtained
for a wider range of labelled drugs, pesticides, and Industrial chemicals.

INDEX TERMS:  Hadiochemical analysis, Tritium, Carbon radioisotopes,  Laboratory equip-
      ment, Oxygen, Methodology, Freeze drying, Chemicals, Pesticides, Bioassay,  Chemical
      analysis, Chemical reactions,  Radioactivity techniques,  Biological samples,
      Combustion techniques, C-lU, Hexadecane, Scintillation counting, Sample preparation,
      Tissue, Blood, Precision.
AMIC-2723
"SEASONAL VARIATION OF THE SUSPENDED SOLID MATTER,  OFF THE COAST OF NORTH YORKSHIRE",
Newton, A. J., Gray, J. S., Journal of the Marine Biological Association of the
United Kingdom, Vo. 52, No. 1, February 1972,  pp
          Water samples were taken weekly over a 2-year period from three sampling sites
on the North Sea to determine seasonal variation in suspended solids.  Samples were
collected In a 2-llter automatic sampler and taken to the laboratory In polypropylene
bottles.  They were vigorously agitated to resuspend any settled solid material and
analyzed by a filtration process.  A number of parameters were measured at the sampling
sites for possible correlation with distribution of suspended solids:  temperature,
salinity, tidal range, wind,  rainfall, flow rate of the River Esk, and sea state.  Sea
state, sea temperature, tidal range, and river flow correlated significantly with .
suspended solid values.  It was suggested that most of the variation in the load of
suspended matter in this area is controlled by wave action,  tidal currents,  and river
flow.  The correlation with temperature was not felt to be a causal relationship.  Using
multiple regression equations as mathematical models, it was possible to derive accurate
predictions of the natural suspended solid load.  These models could then be used to
detect changes in suspended load under discharge conditions.

INDEX TERM3:  Suspended solids, Organic matter, Sea water,  Coasts, Statistical methods,
      Water temperature, Tidal effects, Waves, River flow.  Flow rates,  Mathematical
      models. Regression analysis,  Salinity, Wind,  Rainfall, Filtration, Suspended load.
      Water analysis, Tides,  Statistical models, Currents (water), Sampling, Seasonal
      variation, North Sea, Sea state, Tidal range, River Esk.

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AMP
                                                                                                 . METHODS
 AMIC-308?
 "EFFECT OF pH ON THE FILTRATION  OF AQUATIC  HUMUS  USING GELS AND MEMBRANES", GJessing,
 E- T.,  Schveizerische Zettsehrlft fur Hydrologie, Vol. 33, No.  3, December 31, 1971,
 pp 592-000.	

           Gel filtration and membrane dialysis  experiments were conducted on concen-
 trated freshwater samples to determine the  effects  of pH levels and  Ionic strength on
 the composition of aquatic humus.  Both Indicated that the molecular size of humus
 Increased with pH,  and apparently Ionic strength  had little to  do with the observed
 change In size.  An increase In  color was also  noted with a rise in  pH and was
 attributed to the change in molecular size  of the humus.  Membrane dialysis of acidic,
 alkaline,  and 'natural1  samples  confirmed this  change of molecular size by pH.  However,
 other investigators attributed these  changes to other parameters such as a decrease in
 the extent of adsorption on gel  due to rising pH.   Finally, aggregation and condensation
 of humus were proposed as mechanisms  for the changes observed.

 INDEX TERMS:   Hydrogen ion concentration, Humus,  Freshwater, Organic matter, Adsorption,
       Organic compounds,  Water pollution sources, Color, Laboratory  equipment, Indicator
       Indicators,  Separation techniques, Anlon  exchange, Adsorption, Distillation,
       Sieves,  Sampling, Water pollution effects, Membrane dialysis, Gel filtration,
      Membrane filtration,  UV  absorptiometer.
 AMTC-33C*
 "2-AMINO-U-METHYLTHIAZOLE AS  A  REAGENT FOR  THE  GRAVIMETRIC  DETEPMINATION AND
 EXTRACTION OF MERCURY(ll),  Tandon,  S.  N., Srivastava,  P. K., Joshl, S. R.,
 Analytlea Chlmlea Acta, Vol.  59,  Ko. 2,  April 1972, pp 311-315-

           High aqueous solubility and  selectivity make 2-amlno-U-methylthIazole a
 good reagent for the gravimetric  determination  and extraction of mercury(IT).  To
 samples containing 20-150 mg  of Hg (II),  such as Hg-203 in  Hg (N03)2, an aqueous 0.025 M
 solution of the reagent was added in slight stoichlometric  excess,  followed by a pH
 9.8 buffer.  The resulting precipitate was  filtered, washed, dried  at QO-100 C for 1 h,
 and weighed as HgC14-H'*N2S.   The  error was within plus or minus one percer.t at a relative
 standard deviation of 0.67 percent.  Ko  interference was caused by  fluoride, oxalate,
 citrate,  and tartrate,  but iodide,  cyanide,  sulphide,  thiosulphate, and EOTA interfered.
 Ag (I)  and Au (III) were  found  to interfere with complexation but,  after testing the
 best solvents for extraction, it  was found  that above  pH B.U the mercury complex can
 be extracted quantitatively into  smyl  acetate or di-isopropyl ether whereas silver and
 gold complexes show poor  or negligible extraction.  The use of radioisotopes of the
 metals  allowed precision  In determinations  of degrees  of complexation and extraction.
 Radioraetric and thermal analyses  were  done  to determine the pH of maximum precipitation
 and heat stability of the  complex.

 INDEX TERMS:   Mercury,  Aqueous  solutions, Solvent extractions, Chemical analysis, Gold,
      Trace elements,  Solubility, Anions, Cations, Separation techniques, Gravimetric
      analysis,  Chelation,  Heavy  metals, Pollutant identification,  Gold radioisotopes,
      2-Amino-lt-methylthiazole, Hg-203,  Ag-llOm, Au-195, Precision, Oliver radioisotopes.
      Mercury radioisotopes,  Silver, Chemical interference, Complexation, Organic
      solvents.
AMIC-3181
"DETECTION AND MEASUREMENT OF TRITIUM BY BREMESTRAHLUNG COUNTING", Curtis, M. L.,
International Journal of Applied Radiation and Isotopes, Vol. 23, No. 1, January 1972.

          A method of analysis is described for the detection and measurement of
tritium by Bremsstrahlung counting where beta radiation from tritium cannot be
readily detected.  The procedure Involved placing liquid or solid samples Into
shallow polyethylene bags and measuring the radiation using sodium iodide crystals
with thin aluminum or beryllium windows and a multichannel analyzer.  Tritium
disintegration rates were determined by comparison with the Bremsstrahlung counting rate
of a tritiated standard and by adjusting disintegration values to sample composition.
The method has been used in studies of tritium adsorbed on charcoal, tritium in
contaminated and discolored pump oil, and in aqueous waste materials.  It is applicable
to analysis for tritium In any material In the concentration range of one mlerocurle/cc
or higher, which can be contained in polyethylene provided a comparable standard can
be prepared.

INDEX TERMS:  Tritium, Radiochemlcal analysis. Radioactivity techniques, Pollutant
      Identification, Aqueous solutions, Testing procedures, Measurement,  Sampling,
      Water pollution, Water pollution sources,  Brerasstrahlung counting, Scintillation
      counting,  H-3,  Detection limits,  Liquid scintillation.
AMIC-3306
"A COMPUTERIZED SYSTEM FOR STORING, RETRIEVING, AKD CORRELATE MMR DATA", Skolnik, M.,
Applied Speetroecopy, Vol. 26, No. 2, March/April 1972, pp 173-182.
         v The importance and value of nuclear magnetic resonance arises from the
unique and characteristic chemical shifts of protons in organic compounds.  Although the
resultant shift spectrum is primarily due to the protons in each proton group, it is also
modified by other nuclei in the molecule.  Because a meaningful correlative index of
chemical shift values is essential for effective use of KMR daUi, a new method based
on a linear notation system has been developed.  This method uses symbols to express
various C-H combinations and other H-R combinations.  The notation of each compound and
the shifts of each proton group constitute input for a computer which processes the
data by a permutation or wrap around program yielding as many index entries as there
and proton groups (with shift data) In each molecule.  An additional program yields an
output, by increasing value, of the chemical shifts of any proton group relative to its
neighboring groups.  This method not only provides for more effective data handling hut
eliminates manual indexing and includes more than just a few of the atoms of the full
structure, both of which are cited as disadvantages of the Eadtler Chemical Index and
Varlan Functional Group Index.                             ~~~^~——————^—
IMDEX TERMS:  Indexing, 1,'uclear magnetic resonance,  Molecular structure, Epectroscopy,
      Computers, Computer programs, Organic compounds. Data processing,  Automation, Data
      storage and retrieval, Documentation, Information retrieval, Chemical shifts,
      Protons.

-------
                                                                         1.   PHYSTpAT,
                                                                                          r.nnirTnAT. METHODS
AMIC-3326
"SOLVENT EXTRACTION AND EEPARAT10K CF ZIRCONIUM, NIOBIUM ABD TANTALUM BY
2-CARBETHCXY-5-HYDPGXY-l-(l*-TGYL)-li-PYRIDONE", Janko, M., Herak, M. J.,
Mlkrochimica Acta, Ko. S, March 1972, pp 198-207.
          The metals zirconium, niobium, and tantalum were extracted from oxalic and
hydrofluoric acid solutions by 2-carbethoxy-5-hydroxy-l-(U-toyl)-l*-pyrldone (HA)
dissolved in chloroform, in the presence or absence of mineral acids.  Extraction
mechanisms for the separation of niobium from fluoride solutions and zirconium from
oxalate solutions were proposed from distribution ratios determined by using radlo-
nuclides.  it was not possible to show a mechanism for the extraction of tantalum
from fluoride by this method.  The separation of zirconium and niobium from oxalate
and fluoride solutions and the separation of tantalum and niobium from fluoride
solutions as well as back-extractions by hydrofluoric and oxalic acids were described.
The results indicated that HA is an efficient extractant for the metals In both
oxalate and fluoride systems and that the efficiency of extraction decreased In the
sequence:  tantalum, niobium, zirconium.

INDEX TERMS:  Solvent extractions, Separation techniques, Organic compounds, Radio-
      Isotopes, Organic acids, Aqueous solutions, P-Carbethoxy-5-hydroxy-l-(U-tolyl)-
      U-pyridone, Zirconium, Niobium, Tantalum, Oxalic acid, Organic solvents,  Ta-l82,
      Scintillation counting, Efficiency, Zr-95, Nb-95, Zirconium radloisotopes,
      Niobium radio!eotopea, Tantalum radloisotopes.
AMIC-3330
"MICRODETERMINATION OF CARBON, HYDROGEN, NITROGEN AND OXYGEN IN PETROLEUM COMPOUNDS
WITH AN AUTOMATIC ELEMENTAL ANALYZER", Smith, A. J., Myers, 0. Jr., Shaner, W. C., Jr.,
Mikrochlmlca Acta, No. 2, March 1972, pp 217-222.
          The applicability of the Perkln-Elmer Elemental Analyzer has been evaluated
for the analysis of carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen and oxygen in typical petroleum
compounds.  Comparison of the Elemental Analyzer results were made with carbon and
hydrogen analyses by the Pregl method, oxygen by the Unterzaucher method, and nitrogen
results from the automated micro Dumas Analyzer.  The results obtained by the automated
method were found comparable to those obtained by conventional methods.  The automated
method was found useful for the analysis of nitrogen In petroleum samples ranging from
0.05 to 0.1 percent N.  Samples of transformer oil containing known amounts of added
phenol were analyzed for oxygen at the 0.2-1-0 percent oxygen level.

INDEX TERMS:  Oil, Chemical analysis, Oxygen, Nitrogen, Carbon, Hydrogen, Evaluation,
      Methodology, Organic compounds, Automation, Instrumentation, Laboratory equipment,
      Analytical techniques, Elemental analyzer, Petroleum products. Chemical elements,
      Hydrocarbons, Anthracene, Asphaltenes, Crude oil.
AMIC-33S9
 'TITRIMETRIC DETERMINATION OF TRACE SULFUR IN PETROLEUM USING A LEAD ION SELECTIVE
ELECTRODE", Helstand, R. N., Blake, C. T., Mikrochlmlca Acta, No. 2, March 1972,
pp 212-216.                                	

          A rapid, simple method is described for the determination of trace total sulfur
in petroleum distillates.  The petroleum sample is combusted using an oxyhydrogen burner.
The combustion products are collected in JO ml of absorber solution containing 10 mg of
sodium nitrite and O.hkk mg of sodium sulfate.  The excess nitrite Is destroyed by boil-
ing.  After cooling, sufficient, l,Ii-dloxane is added to make a 50 volume percent
solution for the tltretion.  The titratlon Is carried out using an anodic 0.5 microamp
 solarizing current through a lead ion-selective electrode with standardized (0.0025 M)
Lead perchlorate as the titrant.  The potential break at the endpoint Is determined
graphically from the titration curve and related to the total sulfur in the petroleum
sample.  The precision and accuracy of this method are not significantly different than
the turbidlmetric method and It is not limited by the amount of sulfur produced.

ENDEX TERMS:  Sulfur, Volumetric analysis,  Trace elements. Chemical analysis,  Pollutant
      identification, Methodology,  Ion selective electrodes,  Petroleum products, Lead
      electrodes, Precision,  Accuracy.
AMIC-3331
"NEUTRON-ACTIVATION DETERMINATION OF VANADIUM IN OILS AND CATALYSTS", Arroyo, A.,
Brune, D., Mikrochimica Acta, No. 2, March 1972, pp 239-2IU.

          Vanadium In crude and residual  oils and  in catalysts at  concentration
levels of 0.2-200 and 1*00-2000  ppm, respectively,  has been determined by means of
neutron-activation analysis.  The samples were  irradiated for four minutes  in a
thermal  flux of 2 glga n/sq mm/sec in a Lockheed reactor followed  by a  decay period
of  three minutes.  The l.UU MeV gamma-ray of V-52  was measured with a Nal(Tl) crystal
connected to a pulse-height analyzer.  Samples were measured for a period of one
minute each.  Interference by the nuclides Al-28 and S-37 was stripped  off; however,
the activities of those nuclides limited  the degree of sensitivity of V.  A precision
study on the heavy gas oil containing 0.20 ppm  vanadium gave a precision of about
5 percent.  The limits of detection of vanadium in oils and in catalysts by the
instrumenal technique are estimated to be 0.01  and 10 ppm, respectively.  Using
this technique, five samples, including the standard can be analyzed in less than
15  minutes.

INDEX TERMS:  Vanadium, Oil, Neutron activation analysis, Catalysts, Trace  elements,
      Chemical analysis, Crude  oil, Petroleum residues, Vanadium radioisotopes, Oil
      residues, Chemical interference, V-52, Al-28, Sensitivity, Detection  limits,
      S-37, Sample preparation.

-------
                                                                         1.   PHYSICAL MiD CHEMICAL
AMIC-3339
"NICKEL POLLUTION", Ashton, W. M., Nature, Vol. 237, ICo. 53<>9, May 5, 1972, pp U6.U7.

           Herbage  and soil  samples were obtained from a farm in South Wales near a
large  nickel works to determine  the possibility of airborne nickel contamination.
Ashed  herbage  and  air-dried soil samples obtained in 193U contained sufficient nickel
for the analysis of HC1  extracts by the dimethylglyoxime procedure.  Leaf samples
analyzed contained large amounts of nickel; however, washing the leaves removed most
of  the nickel  from the surface of the leaves.  Only minute traces of nickel and copper
were found In washed  peeled potatoes.  Six samples of vegetation and soil obtained In
1971 were  analyzed by atomic absorption spectrophotometry.  The vegetation contained
1.3-2.0 ppm of nickel, the  first inch of topsoll 625-1150 ppn, 'and the second Inch of
topsoil 200-350 ppm.   This  represents a marked decrease in nickel contamination since
the 1930's.

INDEX  TERMS:  Nickel,  Soil  contamination, Vegetation, Pollutants, Trace elements,
       Chemical analysis, Copper, Gravimetric analysis, Air pollution effects, Pollutant
       Identification,  Soil  analysis. Heavy metals, Atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
                                AMIC-33t»9
                                "GAS CHKOMATOGRAPHY VERSUS INFRA-RED SPECTRCMETRY FOR DETERMINATION  01  MINERAL OIL
                                DISSOLVED IN WATER", Jeltes,  R.,  den Tonkelaar,  W. A. M., Water Research,  Vol. 6,  No.  3,
                                March 1972,  PP 271-278.

                                          In determining the concentration of mineral oil  in water,  emphasis has been
                                placed on the low boiling aromatic hydrocarbons  since they  are the most acutely toxic
                                components and their solubility In water is better than that of the  saturates.  Aqueous
                                solutions of crude oil and six refinery products were analyzed by gas chromatography
                                and Infrared spectrometry (IR) in order to determine the best procedure for determining
                                the hydrocarbon content.  In all  cases the samples were extracted with  carbon
                                tetraehloride, centrifuged,  and filtered through microglass fiber.  Polar  compounds were
                                removed from the extracts by shaking the solutions with Florisll.  More dissolved  lower
                                and higher boiling point oils were detected by GC than IR analysis after Florisil
                                treatment; GC also yielded more data about Individual compounds.  The IR results showed
                                very low hydrocarbon concentrations.   This was because mainly aliphatics were determined,
                                vhereas the  compositions of  the dissolved oils differ markedly from  those  of the original
                                oils.   However,  infrared analysis does reveal the occurrei.ce of dissolved  polar compounds
                                originating  from mineral oil.  For the measurement of dissolved hydrocarbons GC gives  the
                                most complete picture,  because the dissolved aliphatics ac  well as the  different lower
                                (and toxic)  aromatlcs,  both  of which  are the best soluble fractions,  may be measured
                                separately.

                                INDEX  TERMS:  Gas chromatography,  Aqueous solutions,  Pollutar.t identification,  Separation
                                      techniques,  Solvent extractions,  Organic compounds, Oil pollution, Oily water,
                                      Infrared spectrometry,  Mineral  oil,  Crufle  oil,  Kerosene,  Fuel  oil, Gas oil,  Diesel
                                	oil. Sample preparation,  Aliphatic hydrocarbons,  Aromatic hydrot
AMIC-33lt3
"VARIATION OF PRECISION WITH TIME FOR AUTOANALYZER DATA"
Practice, Vol. 31, Ko. k, April 1972, pp ?l»5-2li7.
Faithfull, N. T., Laboratory
          The time allowed for the peristaltic pump of an AutoAnalyzer to pump
reagents before sampling commences is shown to affect the precision of results.
For the colorimetrlc determination of nitrogen, about UO minutes warmup is needed,
and for flame-photometric determination of potassium, about 23 minutes.  The
adequacy of assessing the precision of AutoAnalyzer data in terms of standard
deviations was examined and its validity shown to depend on a normal distribution
of results.  It Is important that a valid standard deviation figure is used.
Histograms from repeatedly analyzed nitrogen and potassium standards are presented.

INDEX TERMS:  Automation, Nitrogen, Potassium, Colorimetry, Flame photometry, Evaluation,
      Laboratory equipment,  Pump testing, Performance, Methodology, Testing procedures,
      Quality control,  AutoAnelyzers, Peristaltic pumps, Precision.
AMC-3350
"ANALYSIS OF ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLES BY SPARK SOURCE MASS SPECTROMETRY - I.  TRACE
ELEMENTS IN WATER", Crocker, I. H., Merritt, W. F., Water Research,  Vol. 6, Ko. 3,
March 1972, pp 285-295.

          Water samples taken from Perch Lake on the property of Atomic Energy of
Canada Limited at Chalk River vere used in a study to assess the suitability of
determining trace elements In natural waters by spark source raass spectrometry.  The
main features of the procedure include freeze-drylng for sample preconcentration;
lew temperature, oxygen plasma ashing to eliminate organic ion interferences; sample
presentation to the mass spectrometer In counter-electrodes tipped with a homogeneous
conducting ash-carbon mixture; and electrical detection and measurement of mass-resolved
ion beams.  With this method trace metals were determined at concentrations of at leaet
one-tenth ppt and higher, and 30 or more elements were identified per water sample.
Precisions achieved for individual elements with a rapid 10-min electromagnetic scan
from mass number 238 down to 7 averaged about plus or minus 30 percent at concentrations
down to 0.0001 mg/1.  The detection limit was less than O.CC001 irg/1.  However, it was
possible to improve the precision to better than plus or minus 5 percent by using an
electrostatic peak switching mode, and by the expenditure of more time.

INDEX TERMS:  Pollutant identification, Trace elements,  Water arialysls, Alkali metals,
      Alkaline earth metals, Heavy metals, Mass spectrometry, Spark  source mass
      spectrometry, Sample preparation, Precision,  Detection limits,  Accuracy, Ashing,
      Chemical Interference.

-------
                                                                         1.   PHYSICAL AMU CHEMICAL METHUUB
AMIC-3351
"COMPLEXATION OP METAL IONS WITH  NATURAL POLYELECTROLYTES (REMOVAL AMD RECOVERY OF
METAL IONS FROM POLLUTED WATERS)", Jellinek, H. H. G., Sangal, S. P., Water Research.
Vol.  6,  NO.  3,  March  1972, pp  305-311*.                                	

          A  number of complexation experiments were performed with natural polyelectro-
lytes In order to  ascertain their suitability for metal (Cu, Cd, Zn, Nl, Cr) removal and
recovery from water.   Bovine albumin-polymethacryllc acid (PMMA), gelatine-PMMA,
gelatlne-alglnlc acid,  pectin, gelatine-oxidized starch, and polygalacturonic acid (PGA)
were  complexing agents employed In the testing with special emphasis on PGA.  Solutions
containing known amounts of metal Ions were complexed with PGA and maximum weight per-
centages of  the metal Ions calculated (percent w/w):  Cu 98.5, Cd 88.5, Zn 80, Nl 70,
and Cr 77.   Thus,  PGA proved to be an efficient complexation agent for these metals and
Increased the  ratio of the volumes of the original metal solutions to those of the metal
solutions extracted from the solid polymer complex several hundred fold.  Only small
amounts  of polymer were lost during extraction of the metal ions from the complexes by
hydrochloric acid,  so that multiple complexation cycles can be carried out by replenish-
ing only the small amounts of polymer lost.

INDEX  TERMS:   Heavy metals, Ions, Solvent extractions, Chemical precipitation, Water
       quality  control, Water pollution, Chelatlon, Cations,  Copper,  Zinc, Cadmium,
       Nickel, Chromium,  Separation techniques, Water analysis, Polyelectrolytes,
       Recovery, Complexation, Complexing agents, Albumin, Gelatine,  Polygalacturonic
       acid.
AMIC-3351*
"AH ARTIFACT HI THE GAS CHROMATOGRAPHIC DETERMINATION OF IMPURITIES IN PENTACHLORO-
PHENOL", Rappe, C., Nilsson, C. A., Journal of Chromatography, Vol. 67, No. Z, May
1972, pp 2U7-253.

          Impurities were found during gas chromatographic and mass spectrometrlc
analyses of commercial samples of the herbicide pentachlorophenol.  The main impurity
was found to be 3,415,6-tetrachlorc-2-(2,3,1*,5,6-pentachlorophenoxy) phenol.  In gas
chromatographic analyses using a heated injection block, the impurity underwent a
ring closure yielding a dloxln impurity which suggests the possibility of its
occurrence in commercial samples.  Isomers of pentachlorophenol also were Identified as
impurities during direct inlet mass spectrometry.  In another set of experiments
pentachlorophenol was treated with diazomethane to facilitate separation of impurities,
since methoxy ethers are easier to separate than phenols.  A methoxy ether of the
phenol compound was found.  Chlorinated phenoxyphenols have not been previously observed
as contaminants in chlorinated phenols.

INDEX TERMS:  Gas Chromatography, Mass spectrometry,  Herbicides, Halogenated pesticides,
      Chemical analysis, Organic compounds, Analytical techniques, Pesticides,
      Pollutant identification, Pentachlorophenol, Chemical impurities, Isomers,
      Chemical Interference, Flame ionlzatlon gas Chromatography.
AMIC-3353
"GAS LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF HYDROCARBON MIXTURES.  A REPORT ON THE WORK OF
THE INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE OF BENZOLE PRODUCERS", French, K. H. V., Journal of
Chromatography, Vol. 67, No. 2, May 3, 1972, pp 237-2UJ.              	
1a>,o~t     ! *nternational Conference of Benzole Producers (ICBP), through inter-
laboratory studies, has determined the precision attainable with minimum apparatus and
procedure standardization in the analysis of hydrocarbon mixtures.  The results from
samples of each hydrocarbon mixture analyzed by the participating laboratories were
averaged and the precision obtained was In the range of 0.001-30 percent.  Some of the
conclusions reached were that (1) katharometers and flame lonlzation detectors give
equally precise results down to the 0.1 percent (w/w) level.  Flame ionlzatlon detectors
give satisfactory precision down to 0.001 percent (w/w);  (2) a major source of error
could be associated with synthetic mixtures; and (3) the  repeatability and repro-
ducibility of experiments could be 3 and 8 percent,  respectively,  if the Instructions
lor the determination of response factors are strictly followed.  Some of the ICBP
recommendations Include the following:  (l) A peak of a standard should have an area in
the same order as the components being determined,  preferably a peak at least 5.0 cm
llgh and 0.5 cm wide at half-peak height.   (2)  If an internal standard Is used it must
je resolved from components being determined and Impurities.  (3)   Response factors
should be the mean of values  calculated from chromatograms on two  synthetic mixtures and
should differ by less than k  percent.
INDEX TERMS:  Instrumentation, Methodology, Aromatic compounds, Chemical analysis, Gas
      liquid Chromatography,  Hydrocarbons, Precision, Mixtures, Interlaboratory studies,
      Errors, Reproduclbllity, Katharometers, Flame lonlzation detector, Laboratory
      equipment, Organic compounds, Aromatic hydrocarbons, Aliphatic hydrocarbons.
AMIC-3356
"THIN-LAYER CHROMATOGRAPHIC-EBZYMATIC IDENTIFICATION OF SOME LINDANE- AND POSSIBLE
DDT-METABOLITES AS WELL AS PENTACHLOROPHENOL", Geike, F., Journal of Chroaatography.
Vol. 67, No. 2, May 3, 1972, pp 3U3-3"*9.

          The possible Identification of p-chlorobenzaldehyde, p-chlorobenzoic acid,
benzophenone, chlorobenzene, benzole acid, pentachlorophenol, l,2,l»,5-tetrachlorobenzene
1,2,3-trichlorobenzene, and l,2,U-trichlorobenzene by their inhibition of the enzymes
bovine liver esterase, trypsln, acid and alkaline phosphatase, alpha-and beta-amylase
on thin-layer plates was investigated.  Pentachlorophenol was a strong Inhibitor of all
enzymes studied and was detected in the range of 10 ng with bovine liver esterase to 3
mlcrograms with alpha-emylase.  Benzophenone showed strong Inhibition against the
phosphatases, while a moderate effect was observed for the other enzymes.  Chlorobenzene
could not be Identified by inhibition of any of the enzymes by this technique.  The
other substances showed a very different behavior and were often only inhibitory after
UV Irradiation.

INDEX TERMS:  Pollutant identification, DDT, Separation techniques, Organic compounds,
      Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Ultraviolet radiation, Thin layer
      Chromatography, Metabolites,  Enzymatic inhibitors,  Lindane, Amylase,  Benzophenone,
      p-chlorobenzaldehyde, p-chlorobenzoic acid, Chlorobenzene, Benzole acid, 12^5
      tetrachlorobenzene, Pentachlorophenol, 123 trichlorobenzene, 1 2 U trlchloro-
      benzene.

-------
                                                                        1,  PHYSICAL tOD CHEMICAL MTTHQDS
AMIC-3357
"A  NEW  REAGENT FOR  DETECTIMG TRYPTOPKAK, INDOLE, AND INDOLE-3-ACETIC ACID IN THIN-LAYER
CHROMATCGRAPHY", Doctor, F. N., Journal of Chromatosraphy, Vol. 67, Ho. 2, May 3, 1972,
PP  371-372.                     	

           Tryptophan  and 18 other  amino acids,  indole, and lndole-3-acetic acid were
analyzed by  thin-layer chromatography to determine the suitability of phosphoric acid
as  a chromagenic reagent.  The amino acids were dissolved in 0.1 N HC1 and indole and
indole-3-acetic acid  in 2 ml ethanol, with a. resulting concentration of 100 mg/100 ml.
0.5,  1,  2, 5, 10 mlcroliters of each component  were spotted on a 250 mlllicron silica
gel thin-layer plate.  After the butanol-acetic acid-water (65:13:22) solvent had
travelled  10 cm, the  plate was left to dry, sprayed with  phosphoric acid reagent, and
heated  for Uo rain at  110 degrees.  The eighteen standard  amino acids, except tryptophan,
gave no colour with the reagent.   Tryptophan, indole, and indole-3-acetic acid gave
different  colours.  The sensitivity of the reagent was of the same order as that of
DMAB.   After chromatographic separation, 0.5 micrograms could be detected but before
separation 0.005 micrograms gave the colours.   This method depends on a reaction between
phosphoric acid and tryptophan, indole, and lndole-3-acetic acid.  The nature and
mechanism  of the reaction is unknown.

INDEX TERMS:  Amino acids, Separation techniques, Methodology, Pollutant identification,
      Color  reactions, Chemical reactions, Indole, Tryptophan, Indole-3-acetic acid,
      Thin layer chromatography, Chromagenic reagents, Phosphoric acid, Detection limits.
      Sensitivity, p-Dlmethylaminobenzaldehyde.
AMIC-3371
 "A REVIEW OF THE METHODS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF PERSISTENT HYDROCARBON POLLUTANTS
OB SEAS AHD BEACHES", Adlard, E. R., Journal of the Institute of Petroleum, Vol. 58,
Mo. 560,  March  1972, pp 63-7U.

          The literature regarding sampling and analysis of oil wastes is reviewed
and evaluated.  A wide variety of analytical techniques are discussed and the
 feasibility of  labelling crude oil is considered.  It is concluded that there is
no shortage of  methods for identifying oily pollutants.  Among the techniques reviewed,
those most likely to be generally available are Infrared spectroscopy, emission
spectroscopy, gas chromatography, and thin-layer chromatography.  A standard gas
chromatographic method for pollutant Identification has been established by the
British Institute of Petroleum and other techniques will perhaps be standardized in
the future.  The author concludes that labelling all oil-carrying ships is not feasible.
All the methods suggested for labelling crude oil cargos have severe technical limita-
tions and there would be serious problems with international recognition and
admlnlstration.

INDEX TERMS:  Oil wastes, Persistence, Analytical techniques, Pollutant Identification,
      Oil spills, X-ray fluorescence, Mass spectrometry, Separation techniques, Gas
      chromatography, Flame photometry, Trace elements, Oil pollution, Colorimetry,
      Neutron activation analysis, Tracers, Hydrocarbons, Sample preservation, Infrared
      spectroscopy, Ultraviolet spectroscopy. Paper chromatography, Thin layer
      chromatography, Column adsorption chromatography, Emission spectroscopy, Atomic
      absorption spectroscopy, Fuel oil, Microwave spectroscopy, Crude oil, Oil
      characterization, Flame ionizatlon gas chromatography, Flame photometric gas
	chromatography.	
AMIC-335Q
"A SIMPLIFIED TECHNIQUE FOR THIN-LAYER MICROCHROMATOGRAPHY OF LIPIDS", Svetashev, V. I.,
Vaskovsky, V. E., Journal of Chromatography, Vol. 67, Ho. 2, May 3, 1972, pp 376-378.

          Lipids extracted and isolated from hen egg, rat brain, and rat heart were
analyzed by column chromatography on alumina and silica gel or by two-dimensional
chromatography on plates 20 by 20 cm., the layer thickness of which was 0.5 ran.
Plates (G by 6 cm) for thin-layer microchromatography of lipids were prepared by
washing with detergent, treating for 10 minutes in a heated alkaline solution
(50 g/1 MaOH), and drying.  A silica gel slurry containing 210 mg/ml of absorbent
was mixed with 10-15 percent gypsum (relative to gel) and a 1-ml amount was spread
on a plate.  From 5 to 10 microliters of llpid solution were placed at the starting
line which was 7 mm from the lower edge of the plate.  Two-dimensional chromatography
involved placing a lipld solution 10 mm from both edges of a plate.  The solvent run
was 50 mm for both chromatographic procedures.  Individual lipids were detected to
0.1 microgram and complex lipld mixtures to 25-50 micrograros.  This technique makeo
it possible to obtain 2-dimensional chromatograms quickly and contributes to the
effective separation of the principal phospholipids and glycolipids by means of
one-dimensional chromatography.

INDEX TERMS:  Lipids,  Separation techniques, Analytical techniques, Organic compounds,
      Methodology, Gels, Bird eggs, Solvent extractions, Chemical analysis, Thin layer
      chromatography,  Column chroniatography, Biological samples, Tissue, Brain, Heart,
      Microchromatography.
AMIC-3372
"NEW METHODS FOR DETECTION AND QUANTIFICATION IN THIK-LAYER CHROMATOGRAPHY:  A STUDY
OF PYROLYSIS ADD COMBUSTION SYSTEMS", Mukher.lee, K. D., Spaans, H., Haahti, E.,
journal of Chromatographic Science, Vol. 10, Ko. 4, April 1972, pp 193-200.
          A scanning system has been developed for detecting organic solute zones on
thin-layer chromatograms.  Chromatography is carried out in quartz or Pyrex tubes
whose internal walls are coated with a thin layer of adsorbent.  The thin-layer
tubes are passed gradually through a furnace while the tubes are being purged with
nitrogen.  The solutes are consecutively vaporized, either by pyrolysis or by
combustion depending upon whether a pure adsorbent or an adsorbent containing an
oxidizing agent is used.  The products of pyrolysis are monitored by an FID, either
directly, or after their oxidation to carbon dioxide and subsequent reduction to
methane.  Similarly, carbon dioxide formed by iri situ combustion of solute zones
on layers containing cupric oxide is reduced to methane and detected by the FID.
The performance of these detection systems has been tested with model mixtures of
lipids and lipid extracts of biological origin.  Further applications of these
methods are outlined.

INDEX TERMS:  Chemical analysis, Organic compounds, Lipids, Pollutant Identification,
      Organic acids, Hexadecanol, Alcohols, Methodology,  Thin layer chromatography,
      Pyrolysis,  Detection, Combustion, Cholesterol, Trlglycerides, Flame Ionizatlon
      detector, Thermal conductivity detector, Palmitic acid, Fatty acids, Waxes.

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AMD CHBgCAL MOTMUtM
 AfflC-3373
 "A TECHNIQUE FOR CURIE POINT PYROLYSIS OAS CHROMATCORAFHY OF COMPLEX BIOLOGICAL
 SAMPLES', Meuzelaar, H. L. C., in't Veld, R. A., Journal of Chromatographlc Science.
 Vol. 10, No. k, April 1972, pp 213-S16.          —•	£	

           Curie-point pyrolysis gas chromatography Is considered to be a very promising
 technique to be used In the classification and identification of complex biological
 samples.  A technique is described vhlch utilizes a special sample preparation procedure
 in which 5-15 mlcroliters of a uniform, opalescent suspension of the Insoluble
 biological sample Is applied in small drops to a filament by means of a microsyrlnge
 with glass tips.  The ferronagnetic filament is held in a horizontal position and
 rotates slowly to insure uniform distribution of the sample,  while the liquid evaporates.
 The coated filament is then inserted into a Pyrex reaction tube which is designed to
 fit into the special pyrolysis unit.  The pyrolysis unit is directly coupled to a
 capillary column and allowed exchange of reaction chambers after each analysis.
 strains of Keisseria meningitises and K. sieca were used to evaluate the performance
 or the system^A comparison of^the pyrograms shows that the level of qualitative aa
 well as quantitative reproduclbility Is such that pyrograms from the same sample
 are almost superimposable.

 INDEX TERMS:   Methodology,  Gas chromatography,  Pollutant identification,  Systematics,
       Classification,  Water pollution sources,  Curie point pyrolysis gas chromatography,
       Biological samples,  Reproduclbility,  Nelsserla menlngitides,  Beisseria slcca,
       Sample  preparation,  Performance evaluation,  Pyrograms,  Pyrolysls gas
       chromatography.
 AMIC-3379
 "WATER POLLUTION HI LAKE MICHIGAN BY TRACE ELEMENTS FROM POLLUTION AEROSOL FALLOUT1,
 Winchester,  J. W.,  Nlfong,  0.  D., Water, Air, and Soil Pollution, Vol.  1, No.  1,
 November 0971, PP 50-&1*-         ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~"~^~~~~~

           Trace  element emissions resulting  from major air pollution sources In
 the Chicago  area are inventoried and their significance  in Lake  Michigan water
 pollution is discussed. Thirty  trace elements were considered,  based on available
 published information.   Actual stream inputs were measured for zinc, copper, and
 nickel and the pre-industrial  unpolluted stream  inputs for the other elements  were
 estimated.   Comparisons were then made to  the air pollution inventory.  Results
 from the study indicated that  air pollution  may be a major source of zinc in
 Lake Michigan and that  there may also be considerable Inputs of  copper and nickel
 from the air.  The  evidence also suggests  that the input of many other elements
 from the air probably exceeds  that from unpolluted streams.  A need for more
 comprehensive chemical  data V quantify the  evaluation Is suggested.

 INDEX TERMS:  Trace elements,  Lake Michigan, Water pollution sources, Fallout, Aerosols,
       Air pollution effects, Industrial wastes, Path of pollutants, Coals, Fuels,
       Streams, Concrete plants, Water pollution, Heavy metals, Coke, Combustion wastes.
AMIC-3371*
"STUDIES ON THE DETERMINATION OF PHYSIOLOGICAL LEVELS OF CHROMIUM IN SERUM BY GAS
CHROMATOGRAPHY", Savory, J., Glenn, M. T., Ahlstrom, J. A., Journal of Chromatographlc
Science, Vol.  10, No. k, April  1972, pp 21*7-252.            	

          A gas chromatographic procedure developed for measuring chromium in serum
involves the extraction of chromium as chromium trifluoroacetylacetonate and the
utilization of an electron capture detector.  The chromium is co-precipitated with
serum proteins thus eliminating ionic interference.  Using this procedure, recoveries of
chromium (III) added to serum averaged 75 percent; the precision of replicate
determinations was 1U..U percent; and normal values obtained were 2.7-2U mlcrograms
per liter.  Other techniques were also investigated, including direct extraction
with no prior treatment and wet-and dry-ashing, but they yielded poor recoveries of
chromium (III).

INDEX TERMS:  Chromium, Chemical analysis,  Gas chromatography. Proteins,  Chemical
      precipitation. Separation techniques,  Urine, Aqueous solutions,  Trace elements,
      Heavy metals,  Serum,  Electron capture gas chromatography,  Chromium
      trifluoroacetylacetonate,  Electron capture detector,  Scintillation counting,
      Blood,  Ashing, Biological samples,  Chemical Interference,  Precision.
AMIC-3383
"ON CALCULATION OF THE AREAS OF OFF-CHART CHROMATCGRAPHTC PEAKS USIBD DATA OBTAINED
WITH THE AID OF INTEGRATORS", Rudenko, B., Journal of Chromatographic Science, Vol. 10,
No. U, April 1972, pp 230-232.             ~	

          In order to determine the full areas of 'off-chart1 chromatographic peaks,
a new mathematical method has been Introduced based on the Gaussian curve approximation
to the peak height.  This method uses the area of the resulting curvilinear trapezium
and Its height and width on top.  These parameters can be registered by use of an
Integrator and verified by computation.  The method can be applied for quantitation of
chromatograms and gives an accuracy usually obtained in quantitative gas-liquid
chromatographic analysis.

INDEX TERMS:  Mathematical studies, Chromatography,  Automation,  Equations,  Approximation
      method,  Pollutant identification, Chromatographic peaks, Gaussian curves,
      Integrators, Errors,  Gas liquid chromatography,  Chromatograms,  Accuracy.

-------
                                                                        1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-3393
"FLUX  OF RADIONUCLIDES THROUGH A SALT MARSH ECOSYSTEM", University of Georgia,
Department  of Zoology, Athens, Georgia, Progress Report, January 1, 1971 - December
30,  1971, Contract AT38-l-(639), 17 pp.  KTIS Report No. SR-639-11.

          A progress report is presented for a project designed to monitor
radio-labelled phosphorus  flux through a salt marsh ecosystem using a setup
constructed so as to allow free passage of water in and out of diked enclosures.
Each plot or enclosure used contained fairly uniform stands of a single species of
cord grass, Spartlna altern1flora.  Automatic sampling equipment was installed both
to measure  water flew ana  provide samples for assay.  Physical changes were
intermittently monitored by aerial color-photography while chemical variations
were laboratory checked.   A mathematical model is presently being employed to
assess the  expected phosphorus flux but the field research station has yet to
be completed.

INDEX  TERMS:  Salt marshes,  Monitoring, Path of pollutants, Model studies, Phosphorus
       radioisotopes, Flow,  Phosphorus, Radioactivity techniques, Ecosystems, Mathe-
       matical models, Mathematical studies, Aerial photography, Grasses, Automation,
       Dikes, Remote sensing, Spartina alternlflora.
AMIC-3^06
"SAMPLIHG OF GLACIAL SNOW FOR PESTICIDE ANALYSIS", Stengle, T. R., Lichtenberg, J. J.,
Houston,  C. S., University of Massachusetts, Department of Chemistry, Amherst,
Massachusetts, Water Pollution Control Research Series 16020 GAG 02/71, February 1971,
23 PP.

          Snow samples were taken from the plateau glacier of Mt. Logan, Y. T.,
Canada  during an Investigation intent on demonstrating the feasibility of taking
such  samples from high altitude snowfields for pesticide analysis and developing
sampling  techniques devoid of contamination.  Samples were also taken at a depth
of 15 m to determine whether DDT concentration varied with the age of the snow.
Pesticide analyses were performed using vapor phase chromatographic techniques.
DDT was not detected within the limit of detectability (5 ng/X).  Over half the
samples were contaminated with PCB's which raised the detectability limit to 10-50
ng/1.   The PCS contamination is believed to have come from the sampling auger, as an
analysis  of rinsings from It. seemed to confirm.  A sample taken from a depth of
1.5-2.5 m was acidified with distilled nitric acid, when thawed, and analyzed for 19
elements  simultaneously using a direct reading emission spectrometer.  Four elements
were detected:  boron at k ng/ml, cadmium at 9 ng/ml, chromium at 2 ng/ml, and Iron
at 1*7 ng/ml.  The high levels of cadmium and especially Iron suggest contamination
from the  alloy steels of the auger.

INDEX TERMS:  Chemical analysis, Snow, Trace elements, Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesti-
      cides, Pollutant identification, Glaciers, Sampling, Polychlorlnated biphenyls,
AMIC-3391*
"ON-LINE COMPUTER-CONTROLLED ELECTRICAL DETECTION IK SPARK SOURCE MASS SPECTROMETRY",
Morrison, G. H., Colby, B. N., Roth, J. R., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. W, Ho. 7,
June 1972, pp 1203-3206.                    	

          The design and operation of a versatile on-line computer controlled electrical
detection system are described for use in spark source mass spectrometry.  The system
utilizes a PDP-11/20 dedicated, on-line computer capable of controlling the magnet
and electrostatic analyzer of a mass spectrometer in either a scanning or peak
switching mode.  Since the peak switching mode provides a more precise and accurate
method for the determination of trace elements, it has been emphasized in this study.
In order to determine how precisely measurements are made with the described system, a
sample of 99.9 percent pure iron was analyzed for its mass 58 isotope.  For 10 sets of
ten measurements, the mean precision (instrumental error) for the Fe-?8 isotope was 2.3
percent relative standard deviation.  Advantages of the system include the following:  (1
It is convenient to check for possible mass Interferences with the on-line computer
system which might be missed during analysis using a manual switcher; (2) The computer
can be programmed to calculate and set a given electrostatic analyzer voltage so that a
given mass can be analyzed by the computer even though the peak Is not large enough to be
observed on the oscilloscope display during the computer scan of the electrostatic
analyzer voltage; and (3) The speed of acquisition and reduction of data permits almost
immediate evaluation of results.
INDEX TERMS:  Computers, Instrumentation, Methodology, Automation, Data collections,
      Trace elements, Spark source mass spectrometry. Precision, Detection, Accuracy,
      Data processing.
AMIC-3^06 (Continued)
2/2
      Heavy metals, DDT, Cores, Canada, Atmospheric transport, Methodology, Equipment,
      Water pollution sources, Zinc, Cadmium, Boron, Phosphorus, Iron, Molybdenum,
      Manganese, Aluminum, Beryllium, Copper, Nickel, Cobalt, Lead, Chromium,
      Strontium, Vapor phase gas chromatography, Emission spectrometry, Sample
      preparation, Sample preservation, Detection limits, Chemical interference,
      Aroclor 1260, Aroclor 1262, Arsenic, Silver, Vanadium, Barium.

-------
                                                                        1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-3^09
"RAD1GECOLOGICAL GTtJDY OF THE HUMBOLDT BAY MARINE ENVIRONMENT", Heft, R. E.,
Harrison, r.  L., Phillips, w. A., University of California, Lawrence Livermore
Laboratory, Livermore, California, Report No. COKF-7108l8l3, August 31, 1971,
1« pp.  NTIS  Report No. UCRL-73168.

          The radioecologlcal system at Humboldt Bay, California was studied In
order to (l)  develop a mathematical model which describes the passage of Individual
radiormclldes through the Humboldt Bay marine ecosystem and (2) test model predictions
against field data.  Model development was considered in terms of a series of indepen-
dent programs including source description, interpool transport, intrapool exchange and
uptake.  First, the radionuclide input (fission products:  Zn-6J, Co-6o, Mn-51*, H-3)
was described quantitatively and in detail.  How conservatively these substances moved
through the marine ecosystem was determined by using the computer program-FWQA Dynamic
Estuary Model.  The transfer of the total amount of a particular component in a given
pool (intrapool exchange and uptake) was determined by making a computer model of data
such as (1) stable element concentration in each compartment, (2) total amount of
adsorbing or  reacting material in each compartment, and (3) intercompartment forward
and reverse reaction rates as a function of pH, salinity, and temperature.  At the
present time  transfer coefficients are being investigated so that the rate limiting
process of transfer can be described mathematically.  It is within the scope of this
study to determine (l) changes In concentration in the organism with time after a
radioactive release, and (2) the dose to man from their ingestion,  by using a
mathematical model.
               AMIC-3U25
               "LAKE AND RIVER POLLUTION, AN ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY",  Sinha, E.,  Report, Ocean
               Engineering Information Series Vol. U,  1971,  85 pp.

                         Six hundred and one abstracts have been compiled into a bibliography (1968-
               1970) which provides scientific and technical information obtained from laboratory and
               field Investigations of lake and river pollution.  These abstracts represent worldwide
               sources found in lW* Journals, some 25  national and international  conferences and more
               than 80 additional sources consisting of governmental research reports,  Institutional
               and Industrial contract reports.  The information Included deals with the parameters of
               pollution and pollutants; the agricultural,  atmospheric, domestic, and Industrial
               sources of pollution and with effects of engineering activities; hydrologlcal,  geological
               and meteorological processes Involved in understanding the paths of pollutants; the
               effects of pollution on fishes, Invertebrates,  Insects, macrophytes, plankton,  zooplank-
               ton, bacteria,  fungi, viruses and yeasts,  birds,  and on human health. Trends In water
               quality management are also considered.  A bibliography of bibliographies,  a detailed
               subject outline,  a key-term Index and an Index citing all authors and coauthors are
               Included.

               INDEX TERMS:  Abstracts,  Bibliographies,  Documentation, Water pollution  sources,  Path
                     of pollutants,  Water pollution effects, Water pollution,  On-site Investigations,
                     Analytical  techniques,  Methodology,  Aquatic life, Public health, Water quality,
                     Pollutants,  Wastes.
AMIC-3U09 (Continued)
S/2
IKDEX TERMS:  Aquatic environment,  Sea water,  Path of pollutants,  Radloecology,
      Mathematical models, Radio!sotopes,  Tritium,  Absorption,  Aquatic life,  Marine
      animals, Wat.ei- pollution sources, Pollutant identification,  Model studies,
      Adsorption,  Zinc, Cobalt, Manganese,  Hydrogen,  Ecosystems, Computer programs,
      Computers,  Salinity, Water temperature,  Radioactivity,  Neutron activation
      analysis, Zinc radio!sotopes,  Cobalt radioisotopes,  Humboldt Bay,  FWQA  Dynamic
      Estuary model, Fission,  Zn-65,  Co-60,  Mn-5U,  H-3,  Manganese  radioisotopes.
AMIC-3^27
"METALS AS POLLUTANTS IN AIR AND WATER, AN ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY"
Ocean Engineering Information Series Vol. 6, 1972, 85 pp.
                                                                                                                                                             Sinha, E., Report,
                         This bibliography contains  583  Informative abstracts  of  the worldwide
               literature providing  substantial  scientific and  technological information on:   detection,
               analysis  and measurement  of metals as pollutants in air and water;  domestic, Industrial,
               urban  and other  sources;  the biogeochemical and  meteorological  processes Involved in the
               distribution of  the pollutants; effects on:  human health,  experimental and test  animals,
               and various other life  forms; and standards and  controls.   In addition to a bibliography
               of bibliographies,  a  keytenn index supplements a detailed  subject  outline.  It  is  intended
               as an  Interdisciplinary guide to  studies  of metals as pollutants.

               IMDEX  TERMS:   Metals, Air pollution, Water pollution, Bibliographies, Abstracts,
                     Documentation,  Pollutants, Air  pollution effects, Water pollution effects, Water
                     pollution  sources.  Pollutant identification. Water pollution control. Public health
                     Methodology,  Instrumentation, Analytical techniques,  Path of pollutants.  Pollution
                     abatement, Bioassay,  Detection.
                                                                                      10

-------
                                                                         1-  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3^5
 "IMPACT OF PETROLEUM SPILLS ON THE CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF THE AIR/SEA
 INTERFACE", Garrett, W. D., Naval Research Laboratory, Chemical Oceanography Branch,
 Washington, D. C., Report No. NRL-7372, February l6, 1972, 20 pp.  NTIS Report Bo.
 AD 738 U23.

           In addition to the basic problems of oil spreading and distribution, layers
 of oil and their monomolecular films Influence various properties of the air/sea Inter-
 face and modify or inhibit exchange processes.  Oil films resist and attenuate capillary
 waves and uncouple wind-wave interaction by eliminating form drag.  Gas exchange may be
 inhibited by oil films, but this effect does not occur to any serious extent in the open
 ocean.  Liquid and solid exchange are altered, organic fallout Is concentrated at the
j surface by the oil, and oil is transported Into the marine atmosphere.  Contaminant
| oils replace a high-surface-tension, active water surface with a more phlegmatic, less
 mobile organic/air Interface.  Although an oil slick can damp its environment by slowing
 processes at the air/sea interface and resisting Interactions between the ocean and
 atmosphere, a worldwide ocean surface film, capable of global environmental Impacts,
 is unlikely.

 INDEX TERMS:  Water pollution effects, oil spills, Air-water Interfaces, Water proper-
       ties, Surface waters, Water pollution, Oil, Oil pollution,  Oily water, Oil-water
       Interfaces, Evaporation, Waves (water), Physical properties, Chemical properties,
       Monomolecular films, Liquids, Gases, Surface tension, Sea water, Retardants,
       Wave damping, Exchange processes.
 AMIC-3'*77 (Continued)
2/2
 the elements is a major  priority  especially  since  it appears that when the relative
 biological effectiveness of alpha vs gamma or beta radiations is considered, fallout
 Pu-239 contributes more  than  fallout Sr-90 or Cs-137 to the artificial radiation
 exposure of many marine  species.

 INDEX  TERMS: Radio!sotopes,  Aquatic environment,  Radloecology, Ecological distribution,
       Marine plants, Fallout, Path of pollutants,  Aquatic animals. Aquatic plants,
       Biolndlcators, Marine animals, Transuranlcs, Plutonium radioisotopes, Fate of
       pollutants, Pu-239, Sr-90,  Cs-137.
 AMIC-3^77
 "ECOLOGICAL ASPECTS OF PLUTOHHJM DISSEMINATION HI AQUATIC ENVIRONMENTS",  Noshkln,  V. E.,
 Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, Woods Hole, Massachusetts, Report Nos. CONF-710919-
 2; KYO U2751, Contract Nos. AT(30-l)-217U; AT(30-l)-U275, 1971, 31 pp.  NTIS Report No.
 NTO 2171* 132,

           The available data concerning the dissemination of plutonlum and other
 transuranics In the aquatic environment are drawn together for appraisal.  The most
 studied isotope has been Pu-239 derived from worldwide fallout.  Essentially all the
 published work has been concerned with levels In the marine environment where plutonlum
 is found widespread among planktonic, pelagic and benthlc organisms.  The concentrations
 are higher in organisms feeding on sediment or on surfaces than in those drawing largely
 on the water itself.  Among the species where data are available are a variety of
 convenient 'indicator organisms' for plutonlum.  There is some evidence that plutonium
 concentrations are Increased in organisms of higher trophic levels.  Bone and liver are
 major repositories for plutonium in marine vertebrates while muscle tissue of both marine
 vertebrates and Invertebrates contain relatively lower concentrations.  Plutonium is geo-
 chemlcally separated from both Sr-90 and Cs-137 in the water column and the sedimentation
 of Pu-239 may be more Involved with biological processes than has been found for
 fallout rare earth isotopes.  In marine sediments, as in soils, plutonlum is more
 mobile than was originally expected.  What little Is known of the behavior of plutonium
 in the marine environment should be used conservatively to assess the behavior and
 distribution of new plutonium additions derived from sources other than fallout, and
 even more conservatively In predicting the impact of other transurancis In the aquatic
 environment.  Considerably more understanding of the aquatic radloecology of several of


                                                                                        11
"VOLTAMMETRY IN METHANOL, ETHANOL, AND SULFOLAKE AS SOLVENTS", Coetzee, J. F.,
Simon, J. M., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. kh, No. 7, June 1972, pp 1129-1133.

          Polarographic half-wave potentials were measured for alkali metals and
barium Ions in the solvents methanol, ethanol, sulfolane, and acetonitrile.  Measure-
ments in sulfolane were made with a 3-electrode polarograph, cell, salt bridge, silver
reference electrode (AgRE).  and rotated platinum mlcroelectrode; those in methanol and
ethanol were made with a. Coleman 3-512 fiber tip ECE instead of the AgRE.  The results
were expressed as reduction potentials.  For methanol, reliable standard potentials are
available, and the sets of halfwave and standard potentials are reasonably consistent.
The half-wave potential of barium ie solvent-dependent; barium vas the only higher
charge type cation giving reversible waves in several solvents for which solvation
was most likely to be predominantly electrostatic.  In water,  methanol, ethanol,
sulfolane, and acetonitrile as solvents, the half-wave potential of barium was more
positive that that of potassium by 0.22, O.l8, 0.13, O.Zk,  and 0.33 volt, respectively.
It would appear that the 'electrostatic' solvation of the barium ton, relative to that
of the potassium ion, Is weaker in water than in the alcohols.

INDEX TERMS:  Alkali metals, Cations, Ions,  Alcohols,  Polarographic analysis,  Measure-
      ment,  Zinc,  Manganese, CobaJ.t,  Copper,  Electrodes,  Sodium, Potassium, Cesium,
      Electrical properties, Barium,  Voltammetry,  Organic solvents,  Methanol,  Ethanol,
      Sulfolane,  Acetonitrile,  Perchlorates,  Samarium,  Lanthanum,  Lithium,  Rubidium.

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL ABD CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-350U
 "SPECTROPHOTOKETRIC DETERMINATION OF TRACE QUANTITIES OF IRON(III) BY AM EXCHANGE
I REACTION  WITH METAL ACETCLACETOKATES", Aly, M. M., Analytical Chlmlca Acta. Vol. 58,
i No. 2, February  1972, pp U67-U69.                  	

]            In the spectrophotometric determination of trace quantities of iron(lll) by
j an exchange reaction with metal acetylacetonates, aliquots of iron solution are added
I to 3.0 ml of zinc or magresium acetylacetonate in 7.0 ml of dloxane or chloroform.
 The resulting color change  is measured with a Gpectrophotometer set at UkO ran.  The
 colorlmetric reaction resulted from an instantaneous Ion exchange between iron and the
 metal in  magnesium or zinc  acetylacetonate.  Presumably the occurrence of the
 reaction  is due  to the greater stability of the iron acetylacetonate complex as compared
j with that of magnesium or zinc.  Chemical Interference was not observed when ammonium
 ions, Na,  K, Mg,  Ca, Sr, Ba, Zn, Pb, Mn, HI, Al or Hg(ll) were present in the iron
 solution  up to 0.05 M.  Copper did not Interfere when the Cu-Fe ratio was lesa than
 30.  Chromlian did not interfere In the chloroform technique due to the Insolubility
 of chromium salts in chloroform; it did Interfere in the dioxane method, particularly
 when this method was applied to a highly acidic aqueous solution and the prepared
 sample was left  more than 1 h before the absorbance was measured.  Chloride, nitrate,
 and sulphate had no effect  on the measurements but fluoride Interfered.  The chloroform
 technique was found to be more useful since inorganic ions do not interfere In the
 solutions containing chloroform.

 INDEX TERMS:  Spectrophotometry, Iron, Chemical reactions, Alkali metals, Colorlmetry,
       Heavy metals. Cations, Color reactions, Trace elements, Methodology, Analytical
       techniques, Anions, Exchange reactions, Acetylacetonates, ChemlcaTInterference,
       Dioxane, Chloroform,  Absorbance.
AMK-3509
"STUDIES OF THE BIOGEOCHEMIS7SY OF BORON.  I.  CONCENTRATIONS IN SURFACE WATERS,
HAHJFALL, AND AQUATIC PLANTS", Boyd, C. E., Walley, W. W., Didgeon, B., Wray, B.,
University of Georgia, Institute of Ecology, Athens, Georgia, 1971 Annual Report,
Contract Mo. AT (38-D-310, August 1971, pp 195-223.  NTIS Report No. SRO-310-1 (PT-2).

          Boron concentrations were studied in surface waters, rainfall, and aquatic
plants from the southeastern United States.  The surface water samples were collected
from small streams, swamps, ponds, and reservoirs In various states and frozen In
polyethylene bottles until analysis.  Rainfall was collected over a 12-month period
In polyethylene bottles.  Aquatic plants were taken in three series:  (l) Lush, green
shoots were collected from a reservoir near the AEC Savannah River plant; (2) Typha
latlfolla and Juncus effusua were taken at various sites during June 1969; and (?)
f. latlfdlla was collected during the 1970 growing season.  All samples were analyzed
6y the curcumin method.  Rainfall samples were concentrated and filtered prior to
analysis whereas most surface, water samples were analyzed directly.  Plant samples
were ashed at 550 C in a muffle furnace, dissolved in 0.1 N HC1, and filtered prior
to analysis.  Ibis analytical technique proved satisfactory for most samples although
boron was not detectable In a few.  Most surface water samples contained less than 100
ppb boron; rainfall concentrations varied from 1 to 95 PP*>.  In plants, concentrations
varied from 1.2 to 11.3 ppm.

INDEX TERMS:  Boron, Aquatic plants, Surface waters, Rainfall, Nutrients, Streams,
      Swamps, Ponds, Reservoirs, Separation techniques, Analytical techniques, Method-
      ology, Bloassay, Chemical analysis, Water pollution, Water analysis, Biogeochemls-
	try. Sample preservation. Currumln mgthod. Sample preparation. Maerophvtes.	
 AMIC-3507
 "CHARACTERIZATION OF TASTE AND ODORS IN WATER SUPPLIES", Collins, R. P., University
 of Connecticut, Regulatory Biology Section, Storrs, Connecticut, Water Pollution
 Control Research Series l6oUo EGH 08/71, August 1971, 21 pp.

           The taste and odor constituents produced by the actlnomycete Streptomyces
 odorlfer, the alga Synura peter sen II, and the mold Trlehoderma vlrlde were examined.
 The odorous constituents were obtained by steam distillation of the culture medium
 and were identified by means of gas-chromatography, infrared, mass, and nuclear
 magnetic spectroscopy.  The major odorous constituents produced by Streptomyces
 odorlfer have been identified as trans-1, 10-dimethyl-trans-9-decalol (geosminJ,
 2-exo-hydroxy-2-methylbornane and cadln-4-ene-l-ol.  A large number of odorous
 ma£eFials were also identified from the culture filtrates Synura petersenll and
 heptanal was the one compound having an odor similar to that of the organism.
 The ma.ior odorous compound produced by Trichoderma viride was 6-pentyl-alpha-pyrone.

 INDEX TERMS:  Odor, Taste, Aquatic bacteria, Aquatic fungi. Aquatic algae, Actlnonycetes
       Molds, Pollutants, Gas chromatography, Biological properties, Odor-producing algae,
       Water quality, Water properties, Chemical analysis, Distillation, Pollutant
       Identification, Methodology, Mass spectrometry, Nuclear magnetic resonance, Water
       pollution sources, Characterization, Streptomyces odorlfer, Synura petersenli,
       Trichoderma vlrlde,  Steam distillation, trans-1 10-dImethyl-trans-9-decalol,
       Geosmin, Flame ionization gas chromatography, 2-exo-hydroxy-2-methylbornane,
       Cadin-U-ene-1-ol, Infrared spectroscopy,  Sample preparation, Mass spectra, HeptanaJ,
       6-pentyl-alpha-pyrone, Metabolites.
AMIC-35i2
"ANALYTICAL USES OF CHARGE-TRANSFER COMPLEXATION:  SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC METHOD FOR IODIDE
IN WATER", Pozlomek, E. J., Reger, D. W., Analytlca Chimica Acta, Vol. 58, No. 2,
February 1972, pp 1*59-^62.

          Iodide content can be determined In water samples containing chloride,
bromide and/or perchlorate anions by a spectrophotometric examination of the charge-
transfer transition of pyridinlum iodides.  The ultraviolet absorption of the U-cyano-
1-methylpyrldlnlum iodide charge-transfer complex In the region 3^0-350 nm Is used as a
measure of the Iodide.  Analyses of distilled water, USP saline, and aqueous sodium
chloride solutions Indicated that iodide could be determined within a range of 0.01-1.00
percent in the presence of the aforementioned anions.  This spectrometric procedure
provides a simple method for the determination of Iodide over a wide concentration range
In aqueous solutions containing other halides and/or perchlorate.  Adaptation of this
method to other applications requires that the particular system be checked with the
pyridinlum perchlorate to insure that no reactant Is present which gives products with
absorption In the 3^0-350 nm region.  The analysis may also be extended for use in
non-aqueous solvents.  In that case the charge-transfer absorption is found at longer
wavelengths and is usually more intense.  Depending on particular needs, a mixed water-
organic solvent system could also be employed.

INDEX TERMS:  Spectrophotometry, Iodides, Aqueous solutions, Water analysis, Chemical
      analysis, Iodine, Pollutant identification,  Chlorides, Bromides, Anions, Sodium
      chloride. Methodology, Saline water, Analytical techniques, Charge-transfer
      complexation, U-cyano-1-methylpyridlnium Iodide, Perchlorates, Ultraviolet absorp-
      tlon, Chemical Interference, Sodium bromide, Sodium perehlbrate, Absorbance.	
                                                                                        12

-------
                                                                              PHYSICAL AM) CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3530
 "METHOD FOR DETERMINATION  OF MERCURY  IK BIOLOGICAL MATERIALS BY NEUTRON ACTIVATIOH
 ANALYSIS",  Rook,  H.  L., Gills,  T.  E.,  LaFleur, P.  D., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. Wt,
 No.  7,  June 1972,  pp lllU-1117.                       	-

           A method Is described for the determination of mercury in a variety of
j matrices.   For analysis 0.5-gram samples vere encapsulated in cleaned, heat treated
I quartz  tubes, llrradiated, washed  In  nitric acid and ignited.  After combustion, the
 ash  was heated to about 800  C for  5 mln removing all volatile components from the
 sample  into a condenser which was  washed in nitric acid.  The.resulting solution
 was  counted using a  high efficiency,  high resolution Ge(li) gamma ray spectrometer.
 Additions analysis was used  to  determine if mercury were lost during analysis.  The
 method  was  first  tested for  complete  recovery of mercury by burning non-irradiated
 samples of  orchard leaves with  Hg-203  tracer added.  A total of eight separations was
 carried out with  a mean recovery of 99.52 percent and a relative standard deviation
 of plus or  minus  1.68 percent.   To test the recovery of mercury incorporated into an
 organism, Hg-203  nitrate was added to  the water  in a tank containing goldfish.  Dead
 fish were removed from the tank, frozen, lyophllized, and counted whole, followed by
 analysis for Hg-203  using the combustion technique.  Experimental results showed a
 mean recovery of 98.9  percent with a relative standard deviation of plus or minus 1,0
 percent.  The method was checked by analyzing samples of flour and coal having mercury
 concentrations ranging from  0.01 to 5  ppm.  Where mercury levels were high enough
 (greater than 1 ppm),  samples were analyzed nondestructively by irradiation followed by
 direct  counting of the Hg-197.   These  samples were then analyzed by the described
               AMIC-3532
               "PRECISION OF ELECTRICAL DETECTION MEASUREMENTS OF POWDERED SAMPLES IK SPARK SOURCE
               MASS SPECTROMETRY", Morrison, C. H.,  Colby,  B. N., Analytical Chemistry,  Vol. Mt,
               No. 7, June 1972, PP 1206-1210.

                         The feasibility of using electrical detection as a means of Improving spark
               source mass spectrometrie precision has been studied in the analysis of graphite blended
               powdered samples.  All data were obtained from real and synthetic graphite samples
               using a Nuclide GRAF-2 spark source mass spectrometer with a computer on-line
               electrical detection system.  After analyzing a variety of sample powders with this
               system, it was found that an analytical precision on the order of 3-6 percent can
               be expected.  Electrostatic peak switching and computer or.-line data acquisition and
               evaluation helped keep measurement time to a minimum.  Several methods of sample
               pretreatment were used and the resulting electrode homogeneity was evaluated.

               INDEX TERMS:  Trace elements,. Data processing.  Pollutant identification,  Automation,
                     Heavy metals, Data collections,  Manganese,  Iron,  Copper,  Magnesium,  Chromium,
                     Titanium,  Strontium,  Alkaline earth metals,  Water pollution,  Powdered samples,
                     Spark source mass spectrometry,  Precision,  Biological samples,  Graphite
                     electrode,  Sample preparation,  Chemical Interference,  Zirconium,  Vanadium,
                     Rubidium,  Yttrium,  Mass spectra.
 AMIC-3530 (Continued)
2/2
 combustion technique and the results compared.  The procedure has subsequently been used
 to determine the Hg.concentration of two new Standard Reference Materials, Orchard Leaves
 and Beef Liver, being offered by the National Bureau of Standards.

 INDEX TERMS:  Neutron activation analysis, Mercury, Pollutant identification, Methodology
       Fish, Separation techniques, Leaves, Coals, Sediments, Freeze drying, Radiochemical
       analysis. Mass spectrometry, Trace elements, Heavy metals, Gamma rays, Aquatic
       svils, Soil analysis, Radioactivity techniques, Tracers, Evaluation, Biological
       materials, Orchard leaves. Wheat flour, Precision, Recovery, Sample preparation,
       Biological samples,  Gamma spectrometry, Fuel oil,  Tissue, Liver, Hg-203,  Method
       validation.
AMIC-3536~
"IDENTIFICATION OF ORGANCCHLORINE PESTICIDE RESIDUES BY ULTRAVIOLET SOLID-PHASE PHOTC-1
LYSIS", Glotfelty, D. E., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. UU, KO. 7, June 1972, pp 1250-125U.

          A simple, rapid method is given for the identification of nanogram quantities
of organochlorine insecticide residues in soil, water, and plant extracts.  The pesti-
cides tested included aldrin, dleldrin, heptachlor, heptachlor epoxide, 1-hydroxychlor-
dene, trans-chlordane, chlordene, nonachlor, and p,p' isomers of DDD.  The hexane-
extracted pesticides were irradiated In silica reaction cells with UV light for 30 Bin
and analyzed by electron capture gas liquid chromatography.  Liquid-phase photolysis was
also performed for comparison of products formed.  Water, soil and plant material samples
were analyzed preliminarily by accepted EC-GLC procedures to locate and quantltate
possible pesticide peaks.  The concentration of the extract was then adjusted to
approximate that of a pesticide standard solution.  Only two compounds, r.orachlor and
p,p'-DDD, failed to undergo significant degradation in the allotted exposure time.
Dleldrin and p,p'-DDE degraded completely, and the remaining parent peaks were small for
1-hydroxychlordene, chlordene, and aldrin.  Heptachlor epoxide, trans-chlordane,
chlordene, and p,p'-DDT, each gave one major product, whose GLC peak height was
approximately 80 percent of the original nonlrradlated parent peak.  Thirty-minute
exposure of p,p'-DDE was much too severe,  resulting in complete destruction of all photo-
lysis peaks.  The optimum exposure time was 30 seconds,  in which about 90 percent of the
parent p,p'-DDE was degraded and the maximum concentration of products was attained.
Aldrin could not be Identified in the presence of dieldrln because the three most
abundant degradation peaks were Identical to those obtained by the exposure of dleldrin.
IRCIX TERMS:  Ultraviolet radiation, Pollutant identification, Chlorinated hydrocarbon
      pesticides, Pesticide residues, Chemical analysis, Photolysis, Electron capture
      gas chromatography,  Sample preparation,  Metabolites.
                                                                                        13

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AKIC-3539
 "DETERMINATIOK OF SUBMICBOGRAM AMOUNTS OF BORON USING THE B-10 (n.alpha) Li-7 REACTION",
 Lelental, M., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. Uk, No. 7, June 1972, pp 1270-1272.

           A technique which utilizes electron microscopy for the measurement of sub-
 microgram quantities of boron in aqueous solutions and biological samples is based
 on the utilization of the B-10 (n,alpha) Li-7 reaction and the measurement of gamma
 or alpha radioactivity after the completion of activation.  The detection of
 radioactivity involves a microscopic examination of tracts produced on plastics of
 cellulose esters, namely, cellulose butyrate, cellulose triacetate, and cellulose
 nitrate.  In order to reduce statistical error to below 't percent, radioactivity
 counting for boron determination covers areas of the micrograph containing approximately
 1000 tracts.  The limit of the quantitative determination of boron by this method was
 estimated to be 38 nanograms B/sq cm.  The very low level of background made this limit
 of sensitivity possible.  Hence, this method Is the most sensitive known for boron
 determinations.  Since it Is based upon a nuclear reaction,  and thus does not suffer
 from the limitations imposed by spectrophotometric methods,  it can be applied to all
boron compounds.  This method Is singularly free from Interference by other elements.
LIthlum-ofpresent to the extent of 7.6 percent in natural lithium) is the only element
that vill produce the tracks obtained with B-10.  The sampling limitation requires
that the boron-containljig material be in a layer of a thickness lesa than the alpha
particles' range to preclude detection loss caused by self-absorption.  The procedure
offers significant possibilities in the study of processes dealing with the adsorption
of boron compounds or the spatial distribution of microgram amounts of boron.
               AKTC-35^6
               "SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC METHOD FOR DETERMINING KM LEVELS OF WATER-SOLUBLE BORON IN
               FERTILIZERS",  Peterson,  H.  P.,  Zoromskl,  D.  V.,  Analytical Chemistry,  Vol.  W
               No. 7,  June 1972,  p 1291.                        ~	-

                          A spectrophotometric method for determining low levels  of water-soluble
               boron in fertilizers utilizes  the  carmine color development after  the  boron has been
               extracted and  interfering  impurities removed with 2-ethyl-l,3-hexanediol In chloroform.
               After extraction,  aliquots  are  acidified with  HC1 and HSSOk and a  known volume  of
               carmine solution added.  Absorbance of the colored solution is measured at  600  ran
               against a reagent blank.  Recovery of boron  increased with  a diol  concentration up to
               ten percent; the described  procedure gave  a 90 percent recovery using  a 10  percent
               diol solution.  A 5-minute  extraction with an  aqueous  NaOH  solution resulted In
               maximum recovery of boron.  Six commercially available inorganic fertilizers were
               analyzed for boron by this  method.  Samples of each of these fertilizers were spiked
              with known amounts  of boric acid and again analyzed.   Average recovery for  these
               samples was 102A percent.

               INDEX TERMS:  Boron, Fertilizers, Spectrophotometry,  Chemica analysis,  Nitrites,
                    Nitrates, Aqueous solutions, Methodology, Separation techniques,  Color reactions,
                    Chemical reactions, Solvent extractions,  Recovery, Absorbance, Chemical Inter-
                    ference,  Sample preparation, Sensitivity.
AMIC-3539 (Continued)
2/2
INDEX TERMS:  Boron, Radiochemical analysis,  Chemical reactions,  Pollutant Identification,
      Aqueous solutions. Gamma rays. Measurement,  Adsorption,  Electron microscopy.
      Radioactivity techniques, Scanning electron microscopy,  Lithium,  Plastics,
      Detectors, Chemical interference,  Alpha emission,  Boron  radlolsotopes,  Lithium
      radlolsotopes, Detection limits,  lieutron irradiation,  Li-6,  Li-7,  B-10,  Biological
      samples.
AMIC-3551
"RAPID METHOD FOR DETECTION AMD CHARACTERIZATION OF STEROIDS", Steel, 0., Henderson, W
Analytical Chemistry, Vol. kk, No. 7,  June 1972, pp 1302-130U.
                         Samples of macro - and microorganisms, lake water, bottom muds, and
              consolidated sediments taken from Mono Lake, California were analyzed for ctcroids using
              mass spectrometry.  Crude sterol fractions were isolated by liquid-solid chromatography
              followed by treatment with a trlmethylsllylatlon reagent for thin-layer chromatographic
              separation.  The resulting silyl ethers were then analyzed by a temperature programmed
              direct inlet probe mass spectrometer and compared to standard sterol sllyl ethers.
              Cholesterol, brassicasterol,  campesterol,  and stigmasterol were Identified from these
              samples.
                                                                                          D/DEC  TERMS:  Mass  spectrometry, Lake  sediments, Aquatic soils, California, Ethers,
                                                                                                Separation techniques, Organic compounds, Alcohols, Water analysis, Chemical
                                                                                                analysis,  Aquatic life, Steroids, Liquid solid chromatography, Biological samples,
                                                                                                Thin layer chromatography, Sample preparation, Stigmasterol, Fucosterol, Mono Lake
                                                                                                Cholesterol, Brassicasterol, Campesterol, Stigmasterol, Cholestanol, Ergosta-7
                                                                                                22-dlene-3 beta-ol, beta-Sitosterol, Stlgmasta-5 25-diene-3 beta-ol, 2l»-methylene-
                                                                                                cholesterol, Sterols, Characterization, Trlmethylsilylatlon, Maes spectra.

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL
 AKTC-3551*
 "EMISSION EFECTROMETRIC DETERMINATION OF TRACE AMOUHIS OF MERCURY,  Lichte,  F. E.,
 Skogerboe, R. Y.., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. kk,  No. 7, June 1972,  pp 13S1-1323.

            Microwave plasma exlctatlori (emission spectrometry) which utilizes the
| reduction-vaporization approach vas used to determine ultratrace concentrations of
| mercury In a variety of sample types.  For most analyses,  a sample  solution volume
j of 0.1-0.5 ml was adequate,  but was Increased to an appropriate aize for samples having
 an unusually low concentration.  For emission spectrometric determinations  using
 standard solutions,  the detection limit was estimated to be 0.6 picogram.   Quantitative
 measurements on 10-ml samples containing 0.01 ppb mercury  were made with a  precision of
 plus or minus 10-12  percent.  To test the accuracy of the  method samples of blood,
 leaves, concentrated H2SOU and triply distilled water were analyzed by emission and
 the cold cell atomic absorption techniques.  Duplicate results generally agreed within
 10 percent for both  techniques indicating that the comparative results are  consistent
 within experimental  error.  It should be noted that the emission analyses were carried
 out on amounts of mercury ranging from 0.31* to 12 ng (distilled water and leaf B samples,
 respectively),  while the absorption measurements  covered the absolute range of 17  to 60
 ng.  This Is indicative of the relative analysis  capabilities  of the two techniques.

 INDEX TERMS:  Mercury,  Trace elements,  Leaves,  Heavy metals, Reduction (chemical),
       Pollutant Identification,  Chemical analysis,  Water analysis,  Spectroscopy,
       Emission spectrometry,  Microwave plasma excitation,  Atomic absorption spectro-
       photometry,  Cold vapor atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Sample preparation,
       Biological samples,  Blood,  Precision,  Detection limits, Accuracy.
AMtC-3557
 "VERSATILE COLORIMETRIC COULOMETER", Ellis, W. D., Baker, D. T., Analytical Chemistry,
Vol. W*, No. 7, June 1972, pp 1330-1331.

           The colorimetric coulometer based on the oxidation of the iodide ion to
 Iodine 1« simpler, more sensitive and versatile than those previously described.  The
 procedure for using this equipment involves adding 2.5 ml of a known concentration of
 CI into a cuvette containing a platinum working electrode and a nickel wire auxiliary
electrode.  The electrodes are placed out of the optical path with a constant current
being passed through the cell for a specified time.  The solution is stirred and the
absorbance measured with a spectrophotometer at 287 nm.  The electrochemical parameters
are controlled with a NIL electrolab unit.  For experiments on the timer version of the
coulometer, a controlled, constant current was passed through a solution containing
 potassium iodide, sodium bicarbonate, and arsenite, and the signal monitored.  The
 precision of the timer was 0.5 percent; the overall precision of the method was about
1.0 percent.  The advantage of. the cell described is that it requires no separate
auxiliary electrode compartment and it can be used as a one-shot cell with stirring
and readout at the end of an experiment or as a stirred cell in a spectrophotometer to
continuously monitor the number of coulombs passed through the cell.  The detectablllty
of the coulometer was found to be 13.$ mi111coulombs.

 [NDEX TERMS:  Colorimetry, Laboratory equipment. Aqueous solutions, Separation techniques
      Iodine, Chemical analysis,  Ions, Iodides, Halogens, Oxidation, Chemical reactions,
      Instrumentation,  Optical properties, Measurement, Coulometer, Arsenite,
      Sensitivity, Absorbance, Detection limits.
 AMIC-3555
 "DETERMINATION OF FLUORIDE  IN VEGETATION USING THE SPECIFIC IOK ELECTRODE", Baker, B. L.,
 Analytical Chemistry, Vol.  UU, No. 7, June 1972, pp 1326-1327.
            The determination of fluoride in vegetation with a fluoride specific  ion
 electrode is less time-consuming than the Willard and Winter distillation technique or
 modifications thereof.   It does not require constant monitoring by  the analyst,  and a
 minimum amount of reaction apparatus is required.  A 25-  to 30-gram vegetation sample
 was collected and the dry weight calculated from a uniform 10-gram  sample.  Ten
 millimeters of sodium hydroxide was added to a 5-10 gram  sample which  was dried  for 2
 hr at 150 C, fused for  2 hr at 550 C,  cooled,  and then dissolved  in 25 ml of water.  The
 sample was then diluted to 50 ml,  filtered,  and aliquots  were analyzed.  Generally, not
 more than 0.10 ml of 1000 micrograms/ml fluoride solution was necessary to obtain a
 reading with the electrode.  The accuracy and precision of the method  was plus or minus
 10 percent.  The effects of fusion temperature and interfering ions were not studied
 since there was excellent agreement between the distillation and  fusion methods.  The
 distillation method removed all interferences while the fusion standard addition method
 effectively canceled them out.

 INDEX TERMS:  Fluorides,  Vegetation, Separation techniques,  Chemical analysis, Bioassay,
       Ions, Evaluation,  Measurement, Pollutant Identification,  Ion  selective electrodes,
       Sample preparation,  Chemical interference.
 AMIC-3559
 "SIMPLE DEVICE FOR COMPENSATION OF BROAD-BAND ABSORPTION  INTERFERENCE  IN FLAMELESS
 ATOMIC  ABSORPTION  DETERMINATION OF MERCURY", Windham, R.  L., Analytical Chemistry,
 Vol.  IA, No.  7,  June  1972, pp  133^-1336.                     	

            Palladium  chloride  on a glass wool mercury absorber attached to a  cycling
 flameless vaporization  system was sed  to compensate for absorption  interference  in
 the flameless atomic  absorption technique for the determination of  mercury.   The
 palladium chloride absorber was prepared by dipping a smell plug -->f glass wool into
 a  11  percent  solution of palladium chloride.  Mercury was vaporized, allowed  to
 equilibrate for  1  minute using a peristalter pump, and the absorbance  measured at
 the peak maximum.  Mercury was determined in samples containing deioiilzed water,
 nitric  acid,  mercury  standard of 0.10 microgram, and one or r.or.e of the following
 background-producing  compounds:  acetone, methyl isobutyl ketone, HC1.  Erroneously
 high  absorbance  peaks were obtained for all of the above solutions.  When
 mercury was absorbed  from the vapor streams by palladium chloride on glass wool, the
 absorbance  decreased  by 0.06 absorbance unit, which corresponds to  the 0.01 microgram
 Hg present  and to  the absorbance of the test sample which had no organic contaminants,
 The lifetime  of  the PdC12 absorber is dependent on sample load, but, as many as ten
 samples have  been  observed to cause no decrease in absorbing ability.  This method for
 background  compensation is convenient for mercury determinations whenever a broad-bank
 background  interference is present or suspected.  It appers to be reliable and specific
 for mercury.
                                                                                        15

-------
                                                                            PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHOD6
 AMIC-3559  (Continued)
2/2
 IKDEX  TERMS:  Mercury,  Instrumentation, Laboratory equipment, Pollutant identification,
       Water pollution sources, Heavy metals, Methodology, Chemical analysis, Chemical
       interference, Flameless atomic absorption spectrophotoaetry, Absorbance,
       Reliability, Palladium chloride, Recovery.
AMIC-3565
"OIL POLLUTION:  PERSISTENCE AND DEGRADATION OF SPILLED FUEL OIL", Blumer, M., Sass, J.,
Science, Vol. 176, No. ltf>39, June 9, 1972, pp 1020-1122.

          A 2-year old oil spill site In Buzzards Bay, Massachusetts, where 600 metric
tons of oil had been spilled, was studied in order to gain information on the per-
sistence and degradation of spilled oil in a coastal environment.  Measurements of oil
degradation In this area Involved determining the n-Csubl7/prlstane ratio in sediments.
Hydrocarbons were Identified by chromatographic and mass spectrometric analyses.  Hie
results Indicated that fluctuations in hydrocarbon degradation products found in
sediments were due to weathering, oxygen availability, and location.  The slow hydro-
carbon degradations, as evidenced by their persistence over a two-year period, was
principally carried out by mlcroblal utilization of alkanes and the partial dissolution
of lower-boiling aromatic hydrocarbons.  Field and laboratory observations confirm that
there Is a decrease in the degradation rate from normal alkanes to Iso-and cycloalkanes
and to aromatic hydrocarbons.  Branched and cyclic hydrocarbons are attacked even more
slowly than the n-alkanes; after 8 years, Isoprenolds (phytane, prlstane, and the C sub
18 homolog) were evident and alicycllc and aromatic hydrocarbons remained prominent in
the polluted sediments.  The boiling range of the spilled oil and the relative
abundances of homologous hydrocarbons (e.g., phytane and pristane) have been well
preserved.  The above findings are In agreement with the known geochemical stability of
hydrocarbons.

INDEX TERMS:  Oil spills,  Environmental effects, Sediments,  Persistence, Degradation
      (decomposition),  Water pollution sources,  Oil pollution,  On-site investigations.
AMIC-35
-------
                                                                        J-.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-3596
"PARTITION COEFFICIENTS FOB FE, MN, PB, HI, ZN, CU BETWEEN RIVER WATER AND SUSPENDED
LOAD, AND MINERALCGICAL COMPOSITION 07 SUSPENDED LOAD OF SELECTED KANSAS RIVER SYSTEMS",
Angino, E. E., Magnuson, L. M., Waugh, T. C., Evans, T., University of Kansas, Kansas
Water Resources Research Institute, Lawrence, Kansas, Project Completion Report,
January, 1972, 120 pp.  PB 207 760.

          Samples were collected from 12 selected sites on Kansas streams to determine
the partition coefficients between selected element concentrations In solution In river
water and that of the suspended load, to define seasonal variations, to measure
relations between mineral composition and heavy metal concentration, and to evaluate
trace metal content.  The mineralogical nature of the suspended load was determined by
x-ray diffraction following membrane filtration and mounting on silicone-treated glass
slides.  Atomic absorption spectrometry was used to analyze filtered samples for Fe, Mn,
Kl, Pb, Zn, and Cu.  Solid samples were separated,  ashed,  and analyzed by semi-quantita-
tive emission spectrography.  Computer programs were developed to convert and correct
the analyses to a standard format.  Concentration levels of the elements studied In the
suspended load when compared to average reported values for shales show Fe and Mn to
be low; the other elements were higher.  Values for these elements in the dissolved
portion were variable, reflecting In some cases possibly lithological differences.
Correlation coefficients Indicated that little relation exists between trace element
content and season in most Kansas streams.  A x-ray diffraction study of the mineralog-
ical content of the suspended load indicated that montmorillonlte was the clay mineral
present in all cases.  Other minerals present in almost all the samples were calclte and
quartz.  Gypsum,  dolomite,  feldspar,  illite, and kaolinte were present in lesser amounts
in some of the samples.	
                AMIC-3600
                "SOLVENT EXTRACTION OF MERCURY FROM BRIBE SOLUTIONS WITH HTGH-MOLECULAR-WEIGHT AMINES",
                Moore, F. L., Environmental Science and Technology, Vol. 6, No. 6, June 1972,
                PP 525-529.

                          Hlgh-molecular-weight amines were used for solvent extraction of mercury
                from brine solutions.  Five milliliters of the Indicated aqueous phase containing a
                Hg-203 tracer and mercury were extracted at room temperature with an equal volume of
                various solvents (Primene JM-T and 8l-R, Amberlite IA-1 and IA-2, Alamlne 336-E,
                Aliquat 336-S, and Adogen k6h) and centrlfuged for two minutes.  Each phase was
                analyzed for Hg-203 using a well-type gamma scintillation counter.  The commercially
                available quaternary amines, Aliquat 336 and Adogen k&t, were found to be promising
                solvents for the removal of mercury due to their ability to extract mercury from
                alkaline as well as acidic brine solutions and because their solubility In water is
                less than 5 ppm-  Regeneration of the amine solvent was readily achieved by stripping
                the mercury with aqueous solutions of nitric acid, ethylenediamlne, or propylenediamlne.
                Alternatively, the mercury was stripped directly from the solvent by aluminum
                reduction-precipitation.  In addition to extraction of mercury at both subnanogram
                and macro levels, the process was found to extract other toxic metal Ions, e.g.,
                cadmium, zinc, lead, arsenic, and copper.  The method is not limited to the extraction
                of mercury from brine solution and other chloride systems.  The mercuric ion forms
                amlne-extractable anionic species In numerous other media - e.g., nitrate, sulfate,
                phosphate, organic.  The described solvent extraction technique can be used to remove
                mercury from a wide variety of these aqueous solutions.
AMIC-3596 (Continued)
2/2
AMIC-3600 (Continued)
2/2
INDEX TERMS:  Rivers, Mineralogy, Statistical methods,  Heavy metals,  Suspended load,
      Kansas, Trace.elements,  Seasonal,  X-ray diffraction,  Spectroscopy,  Dissolved
      solids, Water quality,  Sampling,  Computer programs, Partition coefficients,
      Atomic absorption spectrophotometry,  Sample preparation.
                INDEX TERMS:  Mercury, Pollutant identification, Brines, Solvent extractions, Hydrogen
                      Ion concentration, Separation techniques, Aqueous solutions, Copper, Zlr.c, Lead,
                      Cadmium, Arsenic compounds, Ions, Heavy metals, Trace elements, Water pollution
                      control, Chemical precipitation, Amines, Adogen kdk, Aliquat 336, Hg-203,
                      Scintillation counting, Recovery, Organic solvents, Arsenic, Primene JM-T,
                      Primene 8l-R, Amberllte IA-1, Amberlite LA-2, Alamine 336-S, Aliquat 336-S.
                                                                                      17

-------
                                                                        1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3633
 "PESTICIDES IK WATER.  RESIDUES IN POND6 TREATED WITH WO FORMULATIONS OF DICHLOBEKIL",
 Ogg, A. G., Jr., Pesticides Monitoring Journal,  Vol.  5,  Ho.  U,  March 1972,  pp 356-359.

           Tests were carried out to compare the persistence  of dlchlobenll applied to
 tvo separate ponds both as a vettable powder and a granular  formulation at the recom-
 mended rate of 10.0 Ib/surface area,  0.6 ppraw in water.   Water and hydrosoll samples
 were taken from each area one day after treatment and periodically thereafter for 126
 days, extracted with benzene, and analyzed by electron capture gas chromatography for
 dichlobenil.  Water temperatures,  dissolved oxygen concentrations,  pH values,  and total
 alkalinity levels were periodically measured and recorded during the study period.
 Maximum residual concentrations in the water, reached '*  and  5  days after treatment with
 wettable powder and granules, respectively,  were 1.00 and 0.68 ppmw.  After 15 days, the
 residual concentrations were approximately the same and  both decreased steadily to the
 detection limit of 0.001 ppraw after 126 days (last sampling  date).   The maximum concen-
 tration of dichlobenil in the hydrosoll was l.l»72 pprav,  6 days  after treatment with
 wettable powder and 3.700 ppmv 1 day  after treatment with the granules.   Residues In
 the hydrosoil did not reach similar levels until 31* days after  treatment.   The residual
 concentrations from the wettable powder and granular  treatments had decreased to  0.039
 and 0.025 ppmv,  respectively,  126  days after treatment.   The persistence of dlchlobenll
 in pond water and hydrosoil was similar whether  applied  as a granular or a wettable
 powder formulation.

 INDEX TERMS:   Pesticide residues,  Pollutant  identification,  Hydrosols (soils), Water
       analysis,  Monitoring,  Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,  Dlchlobenll, Electron
       capture gas chromatography,  Perslstenc.
 AMIC-3637 (Continued)
2/2
 derived primarily from pine litter was a common but variable property.  Multlvariate
 cluster analysis grouped the lakes into four classes according to their basic chemical
 properties.  Using seven quantitative trophic indicators, cluster analysis divided the
 low color lakes into three readily interpretable groups (ollgotrophic, mesotrophic, and
 eutrophic) and the colored lakes into five groups.  Highest eutrophic conditions were
 associated with hardwater clear lakes; the softwater clear lakes were mostly ollgotro
 phic.  Favorable growth conditions enabled algae blooms to occur throughout the year in
 eutrophic lakes; the common blue-green bloom-forming algae,  Mlcrocyst.lB,  Anabaena,  and
 Lyngbya vere among the dominant phytoplankton of eutrophic Florida laXes.

 IHDEX TERMS:  Limnology, Lakes, Physical properties, Chemical properties, Biological
       properties,  Trophic level, Mesotrophy,  Eutrophlcation,  Oligotrophy, Phytoplankton,
       Cyanophyta,  Primary productivity,  Water pollution sources, Chrysophyta,  Chlorophyll
       Floating plants, Aquatl£ algae,  Water hyacinth, Aquatic plants,  Statistical method!
       Macrophytes.
AMIC-3637
"LIMNOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF NORTH AND CENTRAL FLORIDA LAKES", Shannon, E. E.,
Brezonik, P. L., Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 17, No. 1, January 1972, pp 97-110.

          A one-year investigation of the average physical, chemical and biological
characteristics of 55 lakes in north and central Florida had five main objectives: (l)
to  determine the basic limnologlcal features of lakes in the region; (2) to assess the
present water quality (trophic state) characteristics of the lakes and provide baseline
date  for future studies; (3) to evaluate the applicability of the common trophic state
indicators to subtropical lakes; (I*) to provide necessary data to develop an index of
trophic state for subtropical lakes; and (5) to study the relationships between lake
trophic state and watershed conditions.  Systematic, composite, and representative
camples were collected from all 55 lakes and 20 chemical, 6 biological, and 2 physical
parameters were evaluated for each lake.  The chemical parameters included all major
cations and anions, nutrient forms, minor constituents (e.g., transition metals,
fluoride), and standard limnologlcal measurement (dissolved oxygen, pH, color, specific
conductance).  Biological parameters included algal identification and counts, primary
production, chlorophyll and total carotenoids; the physical parameters were temperature
and Secchi disk visibility.  Standard limnologies! methods were used wherever practical
and primary production was measured using a light box procedure.  Florida lakes were
found to be typically shallow and derived from solution of limestone formations under-
lying the peninsula.  Stable thermal stratification occurred in 13 lakes and temporary
stratification was a common summer phenomenon in many shallow lakes.  Lakes in this
region were typically low ionic strength waters.  Of the 12 lakes classified as hard-
water, the condition In some was derived from cultural encroachment.  High organic color

                                                                                      18
 AMIC-36U2
 "METHOD FOR STUDYING GEOCHEMISTRY OF SEDIMENT-WATER  INTERFACE",  Hallberg, R. 0.,
 Bagander,  L. E.,  Engrail, A. G.,  Schippel, F. A., Ambio, Vol.  1, Ko. 2, April  1972,
 pp 71-72.

           Accumulation processes  in the bottom water of the Baltic Sea were  simulated in
 order to obtain experimental data for computer simulation and  prediction of  the  increase
 of the phosphate  content of the bottom water and to  obtain similar data for  other
 substances.   The  experiments were performed In situ with a closed system apparatus, a
 plexiglass box.   Sampling and other procedures ^ook~  place through self-sealing rubber
 membranes.  The boxes were  equipped with electrodes  for obtaining measurements of hydro-
 gen ion activity  (pH),  redox potential (Eh) and sulphide ion activity (Es).  The measure-
 ments were recorded  continuously  at a floating laboratory.  Fourteen systems were in
 operation  to study the effect of  different additions of sulfate and organic matter at
 different  temperatures.  Reducing conditions were attained within the first  15 days of
 the experiment with  decreases in  sulfate, nitrate, nitrite, pH, Eh, Es.  After lU days
 when all the oxygen  is consumed,  the aerobic organisms will die, the anaerobic bacteria
 will dominate the conditions in the closed boxes, and hydrogen sulphide, ammonia, methane
 and carbon dioxide will be produced during the decomposition of organic matter and the
 reduction  of sulphate.  Experiments where light was not admitted Into the box gave the
  me results as those where light was admitted.  Since the anaerobic bacteria are hetero-
 trophlc, the flux of mineral nutrients will principally depend on the amount of decompo-
 sable organic matter available.  The effect of organic matter on the deep oxygen-free
bottoms  of the Baltic, which consist of nearly the same type of sediment as those studied
can therefore be simulated in the type of experiments that were conducted.  Moreover,
oxygenated conditions can be studied in a similar way.

-------
                                                                        1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METOPES
AMIC-3SU2  (Continued)
2/2
INDEX 'PERMS:  Or.-site data collections, Geochemistry, Sediment-water  Interfaces,
      Phosphates, Stypolimnior., On-slte  investigations, Anaerobic conditions,
      Degradation (decomposition), Aerobic conditions, Organic matter, Water
      pollution sources, Sampling, Model studies, Nutrients, Physicochemlcal
      properties, Baltic Sea, Accumulation.
AMIC-3907
"ION-EXCHANGE, COORDINATION, AND ADSORPTION CHROMATOCRAPHIC SEPARATION OF HEAVY-END
PETROLEUM DISTILLATES", Jewell, D. M., Ueber, J. H., Burner, J. W., Plancher, H.,
Latham, D. H., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. Mt, No. 3, July 1972, pp 1391-1395.

          A separation scheme is described that divides heavy end petroleum distillates
into acid,  base,  neutral-nitrogen, saturated and aromatic fractions and allows the
removal of 'polar* nonhydrocarbon compounds.  The acid and base fractions are removed by
anion-and cation-exchange chrooatographic techniques while the r.eutral-N fraction
is obtained by coordination-complex formation with FeC13 on Attapulgus clay (ferric
chloride coordination chromatography).  Kon-polar hydrocarbons are separated into
saturate and aromatic fractions by adsorption chromatography using silica gel.  The
chromatographic methods have been applied to Wilmington,  Wasson, Gato Ridge,  Red Wash,
and Recluse crude oils with good reproduciblllty (plus or minus 1* percent) and recovery
(96 percent weight or better).  Data are also presented from mass spectral analysis of
saturate and aromatic fractions.

INDEX TERMS:  Separation techniques,  Acids,  Chemical analysis,  Organic compounds.
      Pollutant Identification,  Cation exchange,  Anlon exchange, Mass spectrometry,
      Alkalis (bases), Methodology,  Aromatic compounds,  Inorganic compounds,  Oil,
      Crude oil,  Petroleum distillates,  Characterization,  Saturated hydrocarbons,
      Mass  spectra, Ion exchange chromatography,  Coordination chromatography. Sample
      preparation, Column chromatography.
AMIC-3661
"MONITORING MERCURY VAPOR KEAR POLLUTION SITES", Water Pollution Control Research
Series 16020 GLY 05/71, May 1971, 66 pp.

          Field and laboratory measurements were made to demonstrate that mercury
vapor in the air near mercury-polluted water or sediment can be detected using an
extremely sensitive detector, the Barringer Airborne Mercury Spectrometer.  Areas
were visited where the presence of mercury was known fron fish, water, or sediment
analyses; anomalous mercury levels ranging from 50 to more than 20,000 nanograms per
cubic meter (r.g) were detected.  Ambient air contained from 0 to 50 ng/cu m.  Laboratory
studies demonstrated that the mercury spectrometer is sensitive only to atonic mercury.
By means of pyrolysis or combustion, organic compounds could be converted to a metallic
form and detected.  To detect mercury pollution In water, pyrolysis appears necessary
to convert combined mercury 'to the atomic state for measurement by rapid spectrophoto-
metric techniques.

IKDEX TERMS:  Mercury, Pollutant  Identification, Gases, Air pollution, Sediments,
      Industrial wastes, Geysers,. Spectrophotometry, Sewage effluents, Water pollution
      sources, Water pollution, Instrumentation, Heavy metals, California, Volatility,
      Laboratory equipment, Barringer Airborne Mercury Spectrometer, Pyrolysis,
      Detection, Detectors, Absorbance.
                                                                                      19
              AMIC-3908
               NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE SPECTROMETRY OF PETROLEUM FRACTIONS.  CARBON-13 AND PROTON
              NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE CHARACTERIZATIONS IK TERMS OF AVERAGE MOLECULE PARAMETERS",
              Clutter, D. R., Petrakis, L., Stenger,  R. L.,  Jr.,  Jensen,  R.  K.,  Analytical Chemistry,
              Vol. U4, No. 8, July 1972, pp 1395-1^05.                          	

                        Compositional characterization of petroleum distillates has been achieved by
              use of a modified Varian HA-60IL spectrometer, which provides  CW carbon-13 nuclear
              magnetic resonance analysis with proton noise decoupling in the Internal lock mode.
              Characterization was made in terms of up to 15 "average molecule" parameters for
              petroleum fractions such as:  n - the average number of C atoms/alkyl substltuent;
              R sub A - average number of aromatic rings/average molecule; and R sub £ - the average
              number of alkyl groups/average molecule.  The technique has been applied to several
              FCC charge stocks but their applicability Is much wider.  The  advantages are:
              they provide direct and accurate values of 'aromaticity' of a  fraction, and (2) they
              afford excellent characterization of complex,  multicomponent fractions as based on
              •average molecule' parameters.

              INDEX TERMS:  Nuclear magnetic resonance, Oil, Spectrometers,  Chemical analysis,
                    Pollutant identification, Carbon radloisotopes, Organic  compounds, Aromatic
                    compounds, Petroleum fractions, C-13, Aromatic hydrocarbons, Alkanes, Alkenes,
                    Petroleum distillates, Oil characterization, Paraffins.

-------
                                                                          •t •

  AMIC-l»ll*9
  "ADSORPTION OF INORGANIC COMPOUNDS BY ACTIVATED CARBON, SIgworth, E. A., Smith,  S. B.,
  Journal American Water Works Association,  Vol. 6h,  No. 6,  June 1972, pp 386-391.

j            Data on the use of activated carbon for removing trace metals from water
I  under appropriate conditions of pH have been accumulated from published literature,
|  research and technical service laboratory  studies (Westvaco Corporation, Covlngton,
j  Virginia),  and a 2-yr research study conducted by the  Colorado School of Mines
I  Research Foundation.   In  only a few instances have  studies been  made under conditions
  likely to exist In a  rav-water supply.   The metallurgical  studies were predominantly
  carried out on mill solutions,  where the metal content was appreciably higher than would
  be  found In water supplies.   The metals were rated  on  adsorption potential,  toxlcity,
  and amounts removed from water. Some of the elements  and  Ions Included Sb, As, Bi,
  Cr, Sn,  Ag,  Hg, Co, Zr, Pb,  SI,  Tl,  V,  Fe,  Cu,  Cd,  Zn, Be,  Ba, Se, Mo,  Mn, W, P, and
  various halldes and halogens.   That activated carbon seems to have a very broad
  applicability In  removing  trace quantities of widely different chemical species
  indicates that several mechanisms  are involved:   (l) physical adsorption on  internal
  surfaces of the activated  carbon;  (2) Ion  exchange; (3)  precipitation of a super-
  saturated solution by nucleatlon;  and (U)  metathetical reactions with metallic ions
  lower in the electromotive series  causing  heavy metal  deposition due to the  presence
  of  reduced  iron and other  metals (commercial carbon).

  INDEX 1ERMS:  Adsorption,  Activated carbon, Water purification,  Pollutant identification.
        Heavy metals, Trace  elements,  Toxicity, Inorganic compounds, Halides,  Halogens,
        Metals, Water pollution sources,  Recovery.
 AMC-^150
 "PULSE POLAFCGRAPHY",  Frazler,  R.  E., Journal American tfater Works Association, Vol. 6U,
 No.  6,  June 1972,  pp 391-393.
           Pulse polarography is one of many modifications of the conventional polaro-
 graphlc system and is being used in the examination of heavy netals in water and waste
 water.  It Is about two orders  of magnitude more sensitive than the conventional method.
 Many metals can be determined quite easily in water in the lO-micrograms/l range.  In
 addition to its increased sensitivity, the pulse polarograph has better resolution and
 can separate the vaves of metals reduced at voltages relatively near each other.  The
 instrument used also has two separate electrode systems and can record the difference
 obtained between the sample at one electrode and the blank at the other.  The voltage
 at which a metal may be reduced at the dropping electrode will be affected by the
 valence state the metal is in and also will depend on the complexes the metal may form
with the electrolyte used.  From a practical standpoint,  the solution,  as presented to
 the polarograph,  should have a minimum concentration of about 0.05 microgram/ml.  If the
 original sample is concentrated from 10O ml to 10 ml, the overall sensitivity Is 5 micro.
 grams/liter.  However, a milllllter or less of solution Is adequate for polarography,
 and if the O.O5 microgram required for analysis were extracted from 200 ml of water, the
 ensltlvity would be about 0.25 mlcrogram/liter.  Metals that are readily determined by
 pulse polarography  Include Cr,  Se, Sn, Tl, Cd,  Cu, Zn,  Ml, Mn,  Fe, and Pb.
 HDEX TERMS:  Heavy metals, Pollutant identification, Waste water (pollution), Water
      pollution,  Polarographlc analysis, Water pollution sources, Separation techniques,
      Iron, Manganese, Methodology, Copper, Cadmium, Nickel, Zinc, Manganese, Lead,
      Chromium, Trace elements, Pulse polarography, Sample preparation. Selenium,
      Sensitivity, Tin, Thallium, Detection limits.
   See alao:  Category 2, AMC-2359, 3M9, 3^*1, 352<», 3526, 3566, 3595, 3617, 3632, 3679,    20
                               3962, h030, 5239, 52U2, 5£l»3
              Category 3, AJUC-32B6, 33"«O, &>*, 3711
              Category 5, AMC-3516, 3537.

-------
                                                                              2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
..me-2349
 'DIGESTION,  ASSIMILATION,  SURVIVAL,  AND REPRODUCTION BY DAPHHIA FULEX FED SEVEN SPECIES
 OF BLUE-GREEH ALGAE",  Arnold,  D.  E., Limnology and Oeeanbgraiihy'. Vol. 16, No.  6,
 November 1971, PP 906-920.	

           Daphnla pulex vas fed the blue-green nlgnp Anaeystis nldulana, Syneehoeoeeua
      ata, S. eedrorum, tferlamopedia sp., Anabaena floa-aquae,  SyneeSoeystls sp., and
 	capsaTalplcola.   The  green algae Anklstrodeamua falcatus  and. Chloren" Tuigaris
 vere  used for comparison.   Direct observations vere made of D.  pulex feeding la"""
 depression slides filled vlth  the test food.   Food labeled vTth  vas used  to
 determine ingestlon and assimilation.  Life tables vere constructed for cohorts fed
 blue-greens, greens,  and no food, and survivorship (l sub x),  net reproductive rate
 (R sub o), median age of death, and intrinsic rate of natural  increase (r) vere
 calculated.   In nil cases,  ingestion, assimilation, survivorship,  and reproduction
 of D. pulex fed blue-green algae were lover than of those fed  green algae, although
 there vere differences among the blue-greens  In their effects  on these parameters.
 Anacystla nldularm, Merismopedia sp., and Synechocyatls sp. shoved some toxiclty
 or inhibition towards D. pulex.  Although some blue-green »ie— can be Ingested
 and assimilated by D.  jnilex, fev If any of those tested provide sufficient nutrition
 to support a population that does not have other food available. (Reprinted from
 Limnology and Oceanography, Vol.  16, November 1971, pp  906-920. Copyright 1972
 by the American Society of Limnology and Oceanography,  Inc. Reprinted by permission
 of the copyright owner.

 INDEX TERMS:  Aquatic algae, Animn]  physiology, Cyanophyta, Digestion, Reproduction,
       Aquatic productivity, Growth rates, Environmental effects, Daphnla pulex,
       Assimilation, Survival.
AMC-2351
"TBS AHNUAL CYCLE IB QUANTm AND COMPOSITION OF THE ZOOP1ANKTON OF THE SARGASSO SEA
OFF BERMUDA.  II.  THE SURFACE TO 2,000 m", Deevey, G. B., Brooks, A. L., Llmnol
and Oceanography, Vol. l6, No. 6, November 1971, PP 927-91*3.

           A qualitative and quantitative year-round study has been ™>H<» of the
mlcrozooplankton of the 2000-m vater column in the Sargasso Sea.  Monthly hauls vere
made over four depth ranges.  For hauls of the upper 500 m, an open meter net of No. 2
and No. 8 nylon equipped vlth a flovmeter vas used.  The other three depth ranges vere
sampled vlth a 0.75 square meter Be plankton sampler vlth the individually metered nets
of No. 8 mesh.  Each net was towed for 10-20 "<" at 1-2 knots when it reached the
approximate center of its depth range.  In the upper 500 m highest numbers vere found
IB October and April; between 500 and 1,000 m the highest numbers were present in July,
March, and May; from 1,000 to 5»000 m the numbers were highest In August, January, and
March.  In the deepest waters sampled numbers vere highest In July, October, March,
and May.  Crustacea Increased In importance and in diversity below 500 m.  Copepods
comprised 70 percent of the plankton of the upper 500 m and 85.2 percent in the deepest
waters sampled.  Pelagic ostracods were next In Importance, but vere relatively less
numerous below 1,500 m.  Highest numbers of calanoid genera and ostracod species vere
noted between 500 and 1,500 m.  Euphauslids vere most numerous between 1,500 and 2,000 m
vlth a November ma-rtimnn,  Tunlcates, coelenterates, chaetognaths, Foramlnlfera, ptero-
pods, and various larval forms vere moat abundant in numbers and species In the upper
waters, but occurred in mull numbers below 500 m.
INDEX TERMS:  Zooplankton, Seasonal, Distribution patterns, Crustaceans, Systematlcs,
      Sampling, Gastropods, Hollusks, Protozoa, Worms, Larvae, Plankton nets, Sargasso
      Sea, Tunlcates, Coelenterates, Chaetognaths, Macrolnvertebrates.
AMIC-2350
 THE EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE OH THE DEVELOPMENT OF RESTING EGGS OF DIAPTOHJS ORECOHEHSIS
 LLLLJ (COPEPODA:   CAIAHOLDA)", Cooley,  J.  M., Limnology and OceanographyT'Vol.  lt>,  Ho.
 6,  November 1971,  PP 921-926.
            Resting eggs extracted from Dlaptomus oregonenais (Copepods)  collected at
Teapot Lake vere used to determine the  effect of temperature* on the development of
resting eggs.   Experiments were performed  within four days after egg collection.
Eggs dissected from, anesthetized females vere stored In groups In aged tapvater and
 Incubated In thermostatically controlled constant temperature vater baths  (23 plus
or  iirinim  0.1 C and I1*- plus or minus 0.2 C) and vater baths in a constant temperature
room (3.3 plus or  minus 0.3 C, and U.It  plus or minus 0.3 C).   The only visible
difference between resting and subitaneous eggs  vas  that the former vere reddlsh-brovn
and the latter green.   The change in color of the resting eggs from green  to
reddlsh-brovn  took place In 2 days at 23 C, k days at lU C,  and 7-8 days at k C. Beating
eggs Incubated in  the  laboratory at about  k C In October and November will hatch at
about the same time the following spring as they do  In Teapot Lake,  but  they can be
Induced to hatch sooner at higher temperatures if they have  experienced  about 3-U weeks
at  U C.   Diapauslng eggs that have not  initially experienced the low temperature are
capable of surviving at warmer temperatures (ik  C) for extended periods  and can
subsequently be Induced to hatch by exposure to  cold.

INDEX TERMS:   Water temperature,  Environmental effects. Diapause, Zooplankton,  Aquatic
      animals,  Incubation,  Seasonal, Winter, Copepods,  Winterkilling, Crustaceans,
      Dlaptoms oregonenais. Eggs, Teapot Lake.
                                                                                       21
AKtC-2352
"SAMPLING AND SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF BEKTHONIC FORAMINIFERA", Schafer, C. T.,
Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 16, No. 6, November 1971, PP 9^4-951.
           Foramlnlfera were collected from bottom sediments in the Gulf of St.
Lawrence in order to determine spatial distribution data to provide sampling
guidelines for future ecological studies.  Seventeen sampling stations vere used
vlth up to six replicate cores taken at each by Scuba divers using plastic coring
tubes.  Results Indicate that the size, spacing, and number of replicate sediment
samples collected do not always adequately represent the living population.  In
these samples, there vas a pronounced patchy geographic distribution In waters lesa
than 2U m deep.  Species proportions vere most variable in waters leas than 20 m deep.
A significant number of living specimens vas encountered to a depth of 9 cm in the
bottom sediments.

IKDEX TERMS:  Protozoa, Spatial distribution, Sampling, Sediments, Distribution
      patterns, Cores, Biolndlcators, Scuba diving, Benthic fauna, Foraminifera,
      Gulf of St. Lawrence.

-------
                                                                               2.  BIUUOGICAT- METHOD
 AMIC-2359
  "A QUANTITATIVE; COMPARISON OP PIOCHT EXTRACTION BY MEMBRANE ADD GLASS-FIBER FILTERS",
  Long, E.  B.,  Cooke, 0. D., Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 16, No. 6, November 1971,
I  PP 990-992.

i            Water  samples collected from six eutrophlc northeastern Ohio lakes were
  used in a study concerned vlth  a qualitative comparison of pigment extraction by
i  membrane and glass-fiber filters.   The  phytoplankton-contalnlng water samples vere
j  measured Into 500-ml  subsamples and filtered at 0.25-0.33 atm.  The filter types
;  tested  were  V7-mm-dlajneter type HA Mlllipore membrane filters  (0.1*5 micron pore size;
j  cellulose acetate) and l*2.5-mm-diameter types GF/C and GP/A Whatman glass-fiber filters.
  The  phytoplankton vas extracted into acetone and absorbances measured spectrophotometrl-
  eally at 665  millimicrons.  Data vere analyzed by 'Student's1 t statistic.  Absorbances
  of the  acetone extracts from lake  pbytoplankton collected on glass-fiber filters,
  ground  and extracted  2 hr, were 6-16 percent greater than from phytopOankton collected
  on membrane  filters and processed Identically.  Use of the glass-fiber filters cut
  filtering time by a factor of 10 and material cost by a factor of k or more.

  INDEX TE3WS:   Phytoplankton, Chlorophyll, Evaluation, Separation techniques, Spectro-
       photooetry, Lakes, Plant  pigments, Detritus, Chlorophyta, Chrysophyta, Solvent
       extractions. Diatoms, Aquatic algae,  Filtration, Cyanopbyta, Eutrophication,
       Glass  fiber filters, Membrane filters, Grange Lake, East Twin Lake, Lake
       Rockwell, lake  Hodgson, Clearwater Quarry, Dollar Lake, Chlorophyll a, Absorbance.
AKCC-3221*
"RACROBENTHOS OP THE PAMLICO RIVER ESTUARY, NORTH CAROLINA", Tenore, K. R.,
Ecological Monographs, Vol. 1*2, No. 1, January 1971, pp 51-69.

           The density, distribution, and community organization of a low saline
estuary vere studied over a one-year period in 1968-69.  A preliminary sampling program
had been carried out in July 19&8 and the data analyzed with trellis diagrams to delimit
community areas.  A seasonal sampling program of the transects of the estuaries was
planned from these preliminary data and samples were also collated on a semi-weekly
basis using a Van Veen grab.  Data vere also collected on salinity, temperature, dis-
solved oxygen, and sediment composition, and their relationships to the benthos were
determined by statistical methods.  Sediment samples vere analyzed for particle size
distribution and organic matter content.  Salinity ranged from 0.1-0.20 percent, and
temperature from 5 to 31 C.  Anoxlc conditions in the bottom water overlying the deeper
portions of the estuary occurred in the late simmer.  Two distinct sediment types vere
found:  a sand substrate in the shallow area and a allty clay substrate in the deep area
of the estuary.  There vere vast seasonal changes in species composition, range of
distribution, density, and community delimitation caused by larva set in the estuary.
A total of 36 species vas found.  Although a few species, such as Rangla cuneata and
Nereis succinea, showed relatively little change in densities and range of distribution,
most of the benthos underwent great fluctuations due to recruitment from nev set.
INDEX TERMS:  Benthlc fauna. Estuaries, Biological connunlties. Sediments, Water
      pollution effects, Ecological distribution, Marine animals, Physical properties,
      Chemical properties, North Carolina, Seasonal, Water quality. Organic matter,
      Particle size, Sampling, Statistical methods, Distribution patterns, Systematics,
	Eutrophication. Temporal distribution. Macrolnvertebrates. Species diversity.
 AMIC-3222
  "CHANGES IN PLANKTON SPECIES COMPOSITION AND DIVERSITY HI A CONTROLLED NUTRIENT
  ENRICHMENT STUDY", O'Brien, W. J., Transactions of the American Microscopical Society,
  Vol. 91, No. 1, January 1972, pp  77^5H
            An  Investigation vas made of changes in plankton speeies composition and
  diversity  as biological Indicators by controlling the nutrient content/density of
  their environnent.  Controlled experimentation vas carried out for two years at
  eight ponds which vere organized  Into four treatment levels (control, low, medium, high)
  by adding  specified amounts of high quality inorganic fertilizer.  The control ponds
  vere ollgotrophic, the low and medium ponds mesotrophic, and the high ponds eutrophlc.
  In the first year the phytoplankton density was quite variable In the treated ponds
  with the high  treatment level ponds at times having the lowest phytoplankton density
  and at other times the highest.  By Bid-summer of the second year, however, the
  phytoplankton  density Increased proportionately with Increasing treatment level.  In
  1969, the  primary productivity was measured and its response to treatment level was
  similar to that of the phytoplankton density.  In a laboratory study, water from each
  treatment  level was collected and placed in flasks to which vas added dissolved
  inorganic  nitrogen or phosphorus or nitrogen and phosphorus together.  The test organism,
 Pandorina  morum, vas Incubated in these separate media for 2 weeks, after which the yield
 was measured.  The final yield of P. morum Increased with Increasing treatment level.
 The addition of nitrogen stimulate? final yield at all treatment levels but vas propor-
 tionately  less stimulatory vlth increasing treatment level.  The addition of phosphorus
 did not stimulate final yield at all.

 INDEX TERMS:   Phytoplankton, Nutrient requirements. Water pollution effects, Fertilizers,
       Deficient elements, Trophic level, Enrichment.
AMC-3225
"INTERRELATIONS AJCWG PLANKTON, ATTACHED ALGAE, AND THE PHOSPHORUS CYCLE IN ARTIFICIAL
OPEN SYSTEMS", Confer, J. L., Ecological Monographs, Vol. 1*2, No. 1, Winter 1972,
PP  1-23.
           The Interrelations among plankton, attached algae, and the phosphorus cycle
in  artlfical open systems vere Investigated using mlcroecosystems (artificial ponds con-
tained in green, 200-1 fiber-glass aquaria).  The following Important simplifications
vere compared to natural systems:  (l) the almost complete elimination of allochthonous
solids;  (2) the absence of a hypollmnlon; and (3) the nearly complete absence of
sediment.  Consequently, the microecosystems resembled the trophogenlc zone Of lakes
with their littoral vegetation and without the effect of sediments or sedimentation
loss to  the hypollmnlon.  The circulation of phosphorus in the aquaria, continuously
supplied with tap water, was analyzed by means of analytical and tracer methods.
Previous estimates of the rate of phosphorus circulation based on tracer analyses
vere reanalyzed and appeared to be of the correct magnitude.  The 200-liter system
developed two communities of attached and planktonlc organisms, with the former
rapidly  removing a large percentage of the phosphorus from the latter.  With this removal
any direct relationship between the phosphorus concentration of the open water and the
Influx concentration was obscured.  A major means by which phosphorus was removed from
the open water vas shown to be trapping of particles by the community associated with the
sides of the aquaria.  The rate of such removal varied widely, depending on the extent of
 •littoral* growth and the nature of the particle.  This open-system design developed frcn
a one-conminity, few species system into a two-community, several-species system.  The
rate of  nutrient circulation greatly Increased with time and developed Into a steady
state, not an equilibrium system which depended on a continual phosphorus influx to
maintain the concentrations and circulation rates.	

-------
                                                                              £.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3225 (Continued)
                                                                         2/2
 IHDEX TERMS:  Plankton, Seaaile algae, Microenvlronment,  Cycling nutrients,  Phosphorus,
       Path of pollutants,  Aquatic algae, Ecosystems,  Tracers,  Model studies,
       Biological communities,  Enrichment, Accumulation.
AKEC-3239 (Continued)
                                                                        2/2
was  strongly Inhibitory and phosphate slightly Inhibitory but not directly related
to Its concentration in the range studied.  Mercury at 5 mM was inhibitory to polyp
metabolism vhereas arsenic was probably not inhibitory at 5 mM for at least 20 hours
of Incubation.  Photographic studies comparing color ectachrcme, GAF two-layer color
film, and Infrared false color filn indicated that the best photographic contrast could
be obtained with the latter film type.  The most premising direct means of detecting
Jellyfish vaa by laser beam reflectance.  As an Indirect means, the possibility exists
that algae, by association with Jellyfish, could provide a 'jellyfish index'.   These
studies showed that algae are readily detected by color infrared photography although
the number of cells required for detection is quite high (approximately ten million
cells/ml).

IHDEX TEFKS:  Sea nettles, Water pollution effects, Remote sensing, Life cycles,
      Antibiotics (pesticides), Water temperature, Phosphates,  nitrates. Environmental
      effects,  Cultures, Algae, Aerial photography, Mercury,  Bioassay,  Sewage  effluents,
      Hydrogen ion concentration, Metabolism, Ammonium compounds, Chrysaora
      qulnquecirrha, Chesapeake Bey, Polyps, Lasers, Culture  nedla, Medusae, Substrate
      utilization, Arsenic, Color infrared photography, Bicoonltoring.
AMIC-3239
 "sruDr or THE FOSSIBUB ROLE OF POUUTIOH nt THE PREVAIEHCE OF SEA HETTIES ra THE
CHESAPEAKE BAY AHD THE DEVELOPMENT OP A CEHSUS TAKDW METHOD", I«vln, 0. V., Straat,
P. A., Blospherics Incorporated, Rockvllle, Maryland, Report Ho. NASA-CR-123293,
Contract No. MASW-2115, October 15, 1971,  137 pp.  OTIS Report Ho. H72-10273.

           The sea nettle, Chrysaora qulnqueelrrha, was studied over a 9-month period
 In order to determine the effects of pollutants on the polyp stage, and to examine
ways of detecting the medusa! form by remote sensing.  Pollution studies Involved
examining the effects of phosphate, nitrate, ammonium or combinations of those pollu-
 tants, and synthetic sewage on the maintenance and morphology of sea nettle polyps
 living at 5, 20,  and 26 degrees C.  The effect of pH 6-8 was also studied.  The results
of these studies  indicate no effect of pH  vhereas phosphate and nitrate and combinations
 thereof may contribute to the proliferation of polyps.  Ammonium, ammonium plua nitrate,
 and sewage effluent were detrimental to the polyps.  At high temperatures the polyps
 caused a sharp decrease In the T^*"" concentration of the maintenance m»^<«iii
whereas the phosphate and nitrate concentrations were relatively unaffected by the
 presence of polyps.  Phosphate and nitrate had little effect on either  low temperature
 survival or strobilation frequency whereas ammonium, combinations of pollutants,
 and sewage effluent prevented polyp formation.  An assay based on the labeled release
 technique was developed for measuring  polyp metabolism.  Polyps were placed in 2
percent artificial sea water, antibiotics  (to eliminate the interfering bacterial
 response), and C-llulabeled organic substrates, and monitored for C-lU-labeled C02
evolution.  The most effective antibiotic  and substrate, respectively, was a
combination of penicillin and polynyzln,  and one of C-lk-lsbeled glucose  and alamlne.
It was shown that nitrate had no effect on polyp metabolism whereas ammonium

                                                                                       23
AHXC-3278
"A MICHOBIOTIC BCOASSAY FOR ENVIRQHMarrAI. POUJUTAHTS", Gunner, H. B., Coler, R. A.,
Massachusetts University, Water Resources Research Center, Anherst,  Massachusetts,
Conviction Report 72-5, 1972, 20 pp.  HTIS Report Bo.  PB 206 691.

           A duckweed rhlzosphere of Lemna minor, a naturally occurring mlcroblocoeoosle
capable of supporting a variety of organisms and algae, has recently been used as a
microsystem capable of sensitive response to various levels of environmental stress.
Dominant organisms used for monitoring included the protozoans Vortlce''''" and Euplotes;
bacteria; the rotifers Iepn«1cna and Phllodlna; the gastrotrlch LepldocCermellaT'
ehlorella; and unidentified rematodes'Easily prepared, aerated tissue culture flasks
served to house the rhizosphere during testing.  The Initial stress tested was
generated by the insecticide Dlazlnon.  Two endogenous biological stresses were separate-
ly tested: (l) predatlon by the guppy Leblstes retleulatus, and (2) competition by the
blue-green algal Oscillatorla.  Results show that after a 5-wk exposure to Dlazlnon all
organisms monitored decreased towards extinction with only the bacteria surviving and,
in fact, increasing; population levels in the rhlzosphere exposed for 12 wks to the
guppy decreased except for nematodes and bacteria; and Osclllatorla-exposed organisms
were decreased except for bacteria and protozoans.

INDEX TERMS:  Stress, Environmental effects, Rhlzosphere, Predatlon, Competition,
      Dominant organisms, Water pollution effects, Pesticides, Assay, Invertebrates,
      Ecology, Aquatic populations, Dlazlnon, Microenvironnent, Blocoenosls, Lemna
      minor, Duckweed.

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3295
 "PLAIIT AVAILABLE PHOSPHORUS STATUS OF LAKES", Armstrong, D. E., Harris, R. F.,
 Syera, J. K., Wisconsin University, Water Resources Center, Madison, Wisconsin, Final
 Technical Completion Report Ho. OWRR-B.022JfIS, Contract Ho. DI-lU-01-0001-1961, 1971,
 115 pp.  HTIS Report Ho. PB 206 156.

             In order to Investigate the processes controlling phosphorus availability
 within lake systems, experiments were conducted within simulated lake systems.
 Emphasis was placed on the potential availability of sediment P due to the large
 quantities contained In sediments and the potential for uptake or release of P from
 sediments depending on particular llmnologlcal conditions and sediment characteristics.
 Chemical analyses Involved determining organic and inorganic phosphorus in sediments
 and water.  The rate and extent of P transfer between P compartments of lakes and the
 relationships between P forms and availability for plant uptake were also investigated.
 The predominant form of inorganic P in the large group of Wisconsin sediments
 investigated was non-occluded Inorganic P associated with a gel complex dominated by
 short-range order hydrated iron oxides and hydrous oxides.  A large portion of this
 inorganic P exchanged rapidly with inorganic P In the surrounding water.  That a
 substantial proportion of the inorganic P in sediments "houlj be available to organisms
 in close contact with the sediments was confirmed by investigations of the nutrient
 status of sediment mlcrcor^nisms and the ability of algae inoculated into
 sediment-water systems to utilise sediment P as their sole source of P.  The
 availability of sediment P to organisms not In close contact with sediments
 in lake systems depends on the release of sediment P to the overlying lake water.
 Evidence derived from a number of different experimental approaches indicated that
                AMIC-3297
                "PROVISIONAL ALGAL ASSAY PROCEDURES", Toerien,  D.  P.,  Huang,  C.  H.,  Radimsky,  J.,
                Pearson, E. A., Scherflg, J., University of California,  Sanitary Engineering Research
                Laboratory, Berkeley, California, SERL Report No.  71-6,  October 1971,  211 pp.   NTIS
                Report Ho. PB 206 lltO.

                            Batch and continuous flow (chemostat)  assays were investigated to develop
               | a standardized algal assay procedure for nutrient  level assessment.  Assays were
               | conducted with Selenastrum capricornutum as a standard assay organism.   Batch culture
                assays were found to have a lower level of precision than chemostat assays in the
               J assessment of growth response as a function of nutrient concentration.   The biomasa
               j parameter, "•*1i"m' cell concentration, of the batch assay generally responded to
               I the nutrient concentration of the sample; however,  the chemostat blomass parameter,
               | steady-state cell concentration, always was found  to be proportional to the nutrient
               | concentration of the samples.  The results of spiking tests with batch assays generally
               | were inconclusive with respect to identification of the growth rate limiting nutrient
                whereas the results of spiking tests with chemostats indicated clearly the growth
                rate limiting nutrient.  A kinetic description of  Selenastrum eapricornutum indicated
                a low half saturation constant of about 5 mlcrograms P/l foFphosphate phosphorus
                and a yield coefficient, Y, that varied as a function of growth rate.   A theoretical
                model was proposed, and evaluated which describes the varying yield coefficient (the
                result of 'excess* uptake) as a function of the growth rate (mean cell residence time).
                The function was verified experimentally at a very high statistical confidence level.
                The significance of these findings and their application to the practical problem of
                eutrophication assessment is presented.
 AMIC-3295 (Continued)
2/2
                                                                                           AMIC-3297 (Continued)
                                                                                         2/2
 data obtained by the Murphy and Rlley (1963) colorlmetrlc method provides valid
 information on the levels of dissolved inorganic P In lake water.  Several papers
| published as a result of this Investigation are included as an appendix.

 INDEX TEEMS:  Phosphorus, Water pollution sources,  Lake sediments, Eutrophication,
       Primary productivity, Aquatic algae, Absorption,  Sampling, Separation techniques,
       Organic matter. Cultures, Bloassay, Cycling nutrients. Model studies, Aquatic
       life. Aquatic soils, Water analysis, Sediment yield.
                LHUSX TERMS:   Algae,  Bloassay, Monitoring,  Eutrophication,  Water analysis,  Nutrient
                      removal. Nutrients,  Blomass,  Cytologlcal studies.  Growth rates,  Statistical
                      methods. Water quality, Kinetics,  Methodology,  Model  studies,  Deficient
                      elements, Limiting factors, Selenastrum capricornutum,  Chemostats,  Batch
                      cultures, Collaborative studies.
                                                                                       2U

-------
                                                                               2.   3ILLOGICAL M2THOIE
 AKTC-3336
 "CHROHIC EXPOSURE OF RATS TO METHYL M2RCURY IN FISH PROTEIB",  Hewberne,  P.  M.,
 Glaser, O., Friedman, L., Stilllngs, B.  R., Mature, Vol.  237,  Ho.  53t9,  l*y 5,  1972,
 pp I*0-Ul.

             A two-year Investigation has been completed on the effects of chronic
 exposure of rats to methyl mercury via diets of fish protein.   Fish protein concentrate
 (FPC), extracted from red hake,  was Incorporated into a balanced,  se«dsynthetic diet
 so as to supply 20 percent protein.  This diet was fed to 30 male  and 30 femle rats
 and to their offspring totaling 5 generations.  Measurenents were  recorded  for  an
 physical, reproductive, and feeding aspects for all generations.   Two control diets
 of casein or lab chow were fed to similar groups of rats.  Detailed hlatopathologlcal
 studies were carried out on blood, liver, brain, kidney and urine  samples.   The control
 diets contained from 0.01-0.06 ppm total Kg while the FPC diet contained an average of
 0.22 ppm total Eg, 90 percent of which was nethyl nercury.   In spite of  greater
 concentrations of Hg In the tissues of the rats fed FPC,  no gross,  hlstologlc or other
 noticeable effects were noted in the rate, the growth and reproductive performance of
 which were comparable with the performance of those fed control diets.

 IHDEX TERMS:  Toxlcity, Mercury, Foods,  Animal pathology, Animal physiology,
       Reproduction, Fish, Protein, laboratory tests,  Urine,  Diets,  Heavy metals,
       Bloassay, Food chains.  Methyl mercury, Bloaccumulatlon,  Hlstopathology, Mercury
       compounds, Rats, Tissue, Biological samples, Red bake, Utophycls chuss, Blood,
       Kidneys, Liver, Brain.
AMIC-3J|03
 "A NEW LIGHT TRAP FOR FUMKTON",  Jones,  D. A.,  In:  Fourth European Marine Biology
Symposium (Bangor, Wales,  lU and  20 September 1969), 1971, pp  U87-493.

             A light trap for catching plankton  at night is designed to run automatically
and retains  the catch for  removal at the convenience of the operator.  It consists of
an electric  light source enclosed In a wire frame covered with plankton netting.
Zooplankton  are attracted  by the  light bean and enter a conical entrance at the base.
The organisms cannot escape  as they encounter difficulty In finding the exit when
sinking downward with the  onset of daylight.  The light Is shaded so plankton will
not be  attracted to the side of the trap.  A sleeve aad collecting  bucket on the
lower rln of the trap facilitate  removal of the catch.  In tests of the apparatus,
the differences in zooplankton caught when the  light trap was  switched on and off
Indicate  an  Increased efficiency  of 9k percent  when operational.  Results compared
favorably with those  using a 0.5-m townet, with a mean catch of W»,OOO zooplankton
individuals  per night.  It was found that about k percent of the catch was plankton
organisms other than the photopositlve zooplankton for which the trap was intended.

INDEX TERMS:   Zooplankton,   Sampling,  Equipment, Light, Automation, Nets, Amphlpoda,
      Annelida,  Invertebrates, Larvae, Crustaceans, Light trap, Euphausllds, Phaeocystis,
      Macrolnvertebrates, Arthropods,  Llttorlna llttorea, Callloplus rmthkel,
      Orchomenella eomnensalls, Praunus  flexuosus, Schlstomysls splrltus, Temora
      longlcornls,  Paracalanus, Pseudocalanus,  Acartla clausll, Centropages hamatus,
      Carclnus meanus, Balanus, Sagltta  elegans, Pleurobr&chla plleus, Atylus
      Bwannerdaml,  Orchestla gammerella, Bathyporela gullllamsonlana, Meganlctypbanes
      norveglca,  Pagorus bernhardus,  Ryctiphanes couchll, Corophlum volutator,
                aermtna.	
AMIC-3U12
"SEHSITIVE FLUORESCENCE METHOD FOR THE DETERMINATION OF CHLOROPHYLL A/CHLOROPHYLL B
RATIOS", Boardman, H. K., Thome, S. W., Blochlmica et Blophyalca Acta. Vol. 253, Ho. 1,
November 2, 19n, pp 222-231.

            Sensitive spectrofluorimetric methods have been developed for the accurate
estimation of chlorophyll a/chlorophyll b ratios In extracts of whole leaves or
isolated plastids, where the amount of chlorophyll b (chl b) Is low compared with
that of chlorophyll a (chl a).  Chl a and b were extracted~from spinach leaves
(Splaaela oleracea),~and protochlorophyll Trom dark-grown bean plants (Phaseolus
vulgarlsT.After all extracts were purified by repeated chrcmatography, pheophytin a
and b were obtained by acidifying purified solutions of chl ^ and b.  Pigment purity"
was checked by spectral scans at 350-750 nm and absorbance ratios obtained.  For the
determination of chl a/chl b ratios by the ethanol method, the tissue was ground In
etbanol, the extract clarified by centrifugation and diluted.  With the ether method,
the tissue was ground In acetone and the pigments transferred to an ether solution
which was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and diluted.  After determining the
fluorescence emission and excitation spectra of chl a and b in diethyl ether at room
temperature using a specially equipped fluorescence spectrometer, the chl a/chl b ratios
were determined from the relative fluorescence amplitudes at 666 nm (maximum of chl a)
and 61<6 nm (maiHmim of chl b).  Chl a/chl b ratios were determined on as little as  ~
0.9-1 mlcrogram of chlorophyll, but satisfactory results can be obtained with 0.2
mlcrogram of chlorophyll.  The ethanol method at liquid-nitrogen temperature is
suitable for measuring PM a/chl b ratios of up to 100 with an accuracy of better
than plus or minus 5 percent.  The* ether method at room temperature covers the range
AMIC-3^12 (Continued)
2/2
up to a chl a/chl b ratio of 60, with an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent.  The
accuracy of the methods described Is dependent on the resolution of the emission and
excitation monochrcBators.  The measurements used were an excitation half bandwidth of
plus or minus 1.5 nm and an emission hnlf bandwidth of plus or minus 1.0 nm.

IHDEX TERMS:  Plant tissues, Plant pigments. Separation techniques, Speetrophotometry,
      Fluorescence, Chromatography, Beans, Temperature, Nitrogen, Methodology, Chemical
      analysis. Solvent extractions, Chlorophyll a, Chlorophyll b, Spectrofluorlmetry,
      Absorbance, Spinach, Accuracy, Splnacla oleracea, Phaseolua vulgarls, Pheophytin a,
      Pheophytin b, Protochlorophyll, Sensitivity, Organic solvents, Sample preparation.
                                                                                       25

-------
                                                                               2.
 AMIC-31UIV                  "   "	
 "SALIHITT TOLERANCES OF SOME COMMON PROSOBRANCHS", Arnold, D. C., Journal of the Marina
 Biological Aasoclatlon of the United Kingdom. Vol. 52, Ho. 2, May 1572, pp V75-WJ6.
             Ecological distributions which result from salinity tolerances have been
 Investigated experimentally for some ccroon prosobrancha.  Gastropoda (Patella vulgata,
 Llttorlna littorea, L. llttoralis. Glbbula cineraria. Hueella lapillus) were collected'
                    _    	   	                    lapl
Close to high and~lov-vater neap tides on the Castle Rocks, St. Andrews, Scotland, and
at five sites on the shore of the Gulf of St. Laurence, Atlantic coast of Nova Scotia,
and Bay of Fundy.  Die responses of these species to water of different salinities was
investigated by use of local Inshore water diluted In 10 percent steps with local river
water.  Patella was studied on aa Individual basis, using ««i»»i« of certain shell
lengths.  The response to local sea water was considered HP-rimy 1 and other responses were
scored In proportion to this on a five-point scale.  The noblle species were »-r*riy~it
statistically by distributing each sample at random among nail all-glass aquaria; sea
water of appropriate dilutions was added, and after 1 h the movement of the mrtnn'iii vas
scored.  In earlier experiments two species were maintained for a period of 28 days in
water containing as much as U.5 percent salt and were examined for mortality and dally
activity.  All experiments were carried out at 20-22 C and at low light intensity (13-25
ft-candlea) during daylight hours.  Salinity was measured by tltratlon with silver
nitrate using fluoresceln as the indicator.   Data showed that salinity tolerances
increased with age and size of Individuals while small specimens and Llttorlna spp. and
Itucella showed a broad tolerance to diminished salinity at both tide levels.Llttorlna
spp. was found to have adapted to salinity in particular areas of eastern Canadian
waters.  Gibbula showed a restricted tolerance to dlminshed salinity similar to Patella
at low tide levels.                                                             	

THTKX TERMS!  Ecologies1 d1ntHbutlonr Salt tolerate. Gastropods.  Prosobranehs.	
 AHIC-3«H9                                                    ~            "     ~~~~~
  "CADMIUM IN THE ENVIRONMENT", Friberg, L., Plscator, M., Nordberg, G., The Chemical
 Rubber Company, Cleveland, Ohio, 1971, 166 pp.

             A review on cadmium In the environment performed under a contract between
 U. S. EnviromBental Protection Agency and the Department of Environmental Hygiene of the
 Karollnska Institute, Sweden focuses upon information essential to the understanding
| of the toxic action of cadmium and the relationship between exposure and effects on
{ animals and human beings.  Only Inorganic cadmium compounds are dealt with since there
 are no data available on the toxlclty of organic compounds.  Those reviewed topics
 of Interest include: 'Problems of Analysis' 'Metabolism', "Transport, Distribution,
 and Excretion of Cadmium In Animals', and 'Occurrence'.

 INDEX TERMS*  Cadmium, Environment,  Toxlclty,  Absorption, Animals, Bloassay,
       Distribution patterns, Water pollution sources,  Pollutant identification, Soil
       contamination, Water pollution, Heavy metals,  Environmental effects, Methodology,
       Public .h*»lth, Path of pollutants.  Cadmium compounds, Bloaccumulatlon, Tissue.
 AMIC-3U16
 'HORIZONTAL AHD VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE INTERSTITIAL HAKPACTICOID COPEPODS OF A
 SAHDY BEACH",  Harris,  R. P.,  Journal of the Marine Biological Association of the United
 Kingdom.  Vol.  52,  Ho.  2, May  1972,  pp 375-3H7.
             Horizontal and vertical distributions were described for the interstitial
narpacticoid copepods on a sandy beach of an Intertldal  transect at Whitsand Bay,
Cornwall and compared to copepods  on European beaches.   Five  core samples (50 cm long)
were  taken from each station with  a perspex coring tube  (2.6  cm-diameter) and sectioned
Into  ten vertical segments.  Copepods,  extracted from sand by an elutrlatlon technique
with  a recovery of 90 percent, were stored In 5  percent  neutral formalin and stained
with  Rose  Bengal for microscopic examination.  Most of the copepods showed distinct
horizontal distribution patterns aa evidenced by their restriction to narrow
zones on the transect.   In summer  the  copepods were concentrated at the  sand surface.
Deeper distributions were observed in  winter when some species  were found down to depths
of 50 cm.   When comparing the vertical zonation  of males and  females of  a species
the males  were  generally found at  greater depths In the  sand.   In the spring
there waa  evidence that ovlgerous  females were distributed at shallower  depths relative
to the total female  population.  The vertical  distribution of the copepodltes
of a  given species was  usually somewhat shallower than that of  the total population.
These patterns  were  correlated with the copepods development.   Distribution  patterns
probably resulted from temperature variations, oxygen availability,  the  local bacterial
populations,  and disturbance due to wave  action.

INDEX TERMS:  Ecological distribution,  Copepods,  Marine  animals,  Equipment,  Crustaceans,
      Oxygen requirements. Water temperature.  Environmental effects,  Larval  growth stage,
      Sampling,  Intertldal areas,  Marine  bacteria, Aquatic populations,  Beaches,
                           HarptetleolAa,  Cnpupodltes, WMtMMd q«y,	
                                                                                           AMIC-31422
                                                                                          "AUHATIC INSECTS OF THE PINE-POPPLE RIVER,  WISCONSIN",  Hiisenhoff,  w.  L. ,  tongridge,
                                                                                          J.  L., Narf,  R.  P., Tennessen, K.  J.,  Walton,  C.  P.,  Department of Natural Resources
                                                                                          Madison, Wisconsin, Technical Bulltein Ho.  5!*, 1972,  1*2 pp.

                                                                                                     Collections were made from May  1967 through August 1969 on the Pine River,
                                                                                          Popple River  and Woods Creek in Florence  and Forest Counties  to document the aquatic
                                                                                          Insect fauna  of  these wild rivers.   Distribution  and  abundance were recorded, and notes
                                                                                          summarized on the ecology,  life cycles and  Identification of:   Plecoptera  (3!* species),
                                                                                          Ephemeroptera (approximately 60 species), Odonata (39 species),  Trlchopter* (11*9
                                                                                          species), Megaloptera (3 species),  aquatic  and semi-aquatic Hemiptera  (1*7  species),
                                                                                          aquatic Coleoptera (Jl* species), and aquatic Diptera  (1*3 genera).

                                                                                          HHEX TERMS!   Aquatic Insects, Ecological distribution,  Systemtics, Ecology, Life
                                                                                                cycles,  Life history studies.  Distribution  patterns. Mayflies, Diptera,
                                                                                                Stoneflies,  Dragonflles, Caddisflies,  Sampling, Wisconsin, Water beetles,  Midges,
                                                                                                Dobsonflles,  Growth stages, Larvae, Immature  growth stage, Freshwater,  Streams,
                                                                                                Rivers,  Pine River,  Popple River, Woods  Creek,  Arthropods, Beetles,  Bugs,
                                                                                                Damselflies,  Alderflles, Hellgrammltes,  Fishflies,  Species diversity,
                                                                                                Macrolnvertebrates,  nymphs.
                                                                                      26

-------
                                                                                2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3423
 "PESTICIDES AMD FRESHWATER FAUNA",  Mulrhead-Thomson, F. C., Academic  Press, Hew York,
 1971, 2U6 PP.

              Data which are relevant to a  study of the Impact of pesticides on
 animal life in freshwaters have 'been compiled and summarized with emphasis
 placed on the  methods and  techniques which have teen used or designed to provide
 the facts.   Because there  Is a wide  range of specialists interested in achieving
 a correct and  scientific evaluation of the many-faceted problem, evaluation techniques
 and standards  tend to be equally diverse, and to have developed Independently of each
 other.  An attempt has heen made to assess these evaluation techniques, to compare
 them critically, and to try and Judge the extent to which each phase  of evaluation frcm
 otrlctly  controlled laboratory testa to plot or field trial, assists  in building
 up a true or complete picture regarding the effect of that particular pesticide
 on the aquatic environment.
I
| INDEX TERMS:   Aquatic animals, Analytical techniques, Water pollution effects,
I       Evaluation, Pesticide toxlclty, Pollutant Identification, Water pollution sources,
       Crustaceans, Water quality, Carbamate pesticides, Mollusks, Worms, laboratory
       tests, Pesticide residues, Freshwater fish, Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,
       Organic  pesticides,  Halogenated pesticides, Organophosphorua pesticides. Aquatic
       insects,  Invertebrates, Macroinvertebrates, Vertebrates.
 "TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS OF SALMDHIDS IN RELATION TO THEIR FEEDING, BIOENERGETICS,
GROWTH, AND BEHAVIOR", Oregon State University, Water Resources Research Institute,
Corvallla, Oregon, Sunmary Progress Report, January 1, 1972, 23 pp.  HTIS Report Ho.
PB 207 137.
            Studies were conducted to model temperature conditions to which salnonld
populations may be exposed In nature.  Laboratory studies were designed to define
temperature conditions under which these fish can successfully adapt physiologically
in terns of food consumption, bloenergetlcs, and growth.  Model stream studies were
designed to simulate the elecated temperature conditions to which fish may be exposed
in natural streams.  In these studies, Juvenile echo salmon of 1969, 1970, and 1971
classes were kept at elevated and control temperatures for a 22-month period.  The
average temperature Increment between the control and treatment stream was k.3 C.
The 1969 class was reared for one winter in stream communities established during
late summer and fall.  Growth was not greatly different in the control and treatment
streams.  The 1970 fry were stocked In the streams and reared for 1 year.  Production
In the control stream was about twice as large.  The 1971 salmon were Introduced as
eggs In late fall of 1970 and reared until August 1971.  Production was about five
times greater In the control stream.  In the laboratory, fish were kept in aquaria
at temperature of 3-4 and 7-8 C above control temperatures.  Short term (30 days)
studies were used to established relationships between feeding rates and growth
during different seasons.  Growth rates were generally greater at control temperatures.

INDEX TERMS:  Water temperature. Growth rates, Fish behavior, Fish physiology, Fish
      populations, Salmonlds, Thermal pollution, Lethal limit, Feeding rates, Model
      studies, Bloassay, Analytical techniques, Metabolism, Energy budget, Brackish-
      liataT* -fish. Flah ggg*. Rlo
 AMTC-3WH
 "AN IHVESTIGATION OF PRIMARY PRODUCTIVITY USING THE C-lU METHOD AMD AH ANALYSIS OF
 NUTRIENTS IN ELEPHANT BUTTE RESERVOIR", Kldd, D. E., Johnson, G. V., University of
 New Mexico, Department  of Biology, Albuquerque, New Mexico, Technical Completion
 Report, Project Ho.  A-021-NMEX-31C9-32, January 1972, 106 pp.  HTIS Report Ho.
 PB 207 351.
             In order to obtain Indexes of eutrophication Indicators, a study was con-
 ducted of phytoplankton population structure, primary productivity, and nutrient
 concentration  In Elephant Butte Reservoir.  Water  samples were taken at five stations
 from the surface and at 1- and 2- meter depths using a Kemmerer water sampler.  Lugol's
 solution was used to preserve  water  samples before counting the algae using a  Palmer
 Nannoplankton  chamber.   An existing  computer program was modified to evaluate  data  counts
 and compute phytoplankton diversity  Indexes.  Primary productivity was determined using
 radioactive carbon  and  a llght-and-dark bottle technique,   nitrates and phosphates  were
 determined by  spectrophotometry, and temperature,  pH, and transparency were measured by
 standard techniques. Phaeotua sp.,  Platymonae sp., Cyelotella ep., and Meloslra sp. were
 present In at  least small numbers on 26 or more of the  30 sampling dates.  At  various
 times during the year Phaeotus sp.,  Platymonas sp., Cyelotella sp., and  Chlamydomonas
 sp, II were clearly the most numerous algal species in  the  Reservoir.  Diversity and
 redundancy Indexes  were computed using counts obtained  for  70 phytoplankton species
 Identified In the Reservoir.   Significant correlations  of diversity with temperature,
 productivity and algal  number were  obtained while diversity was negatively correlated
 with Reservoir depth and water storage.

 INDEX TERMS:   Primary productivity,  Radioactivity techniques, Nutrients, Phytoplankton,
       Eutrophication, Physlcochemlcal properties,  Sampling, Species diversity.


                                                                                        27
AMIC-3U79
"BIOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF COPPER AHD ARSENIC POLLUTION", Button, D. K., Dunker, S. S.,
University of Alaska, Institute of Marine Science, College, Alaska, Report No. R71-8,
Contract 18050 DLW, April, 1971, 59 pp.  NTXS Report No. PB 201 6W.

            The Inhibitory effects of copper on marine microorganisms were studied by
placing a marine yeast similar to Rhodotorula. rubra on a nutrient-limited medium in
order to control substrate concentrations and trace metals.  A portion of the added
substrate was isotoplcally labeled BO that the radioactivity ratio of Incorporated
to unused material could be used as an Index of inhibition or stimulation by
Introduced antlmetabolltes.  Because the organism was capable of metabolism at low
phosphate concentrations, the growth and phosphate flux kinetics could be described in
relation to levels of copper, manganese and arsenate.  It was found that phosphate
prevented copper inhibition of the organism, but with manganese deficiencies, copper
sensitivity Increased.  While arsemte was found to inhibit phosphate transport,
phosphate also reduced arsenate uptake.  At arsenate levels of 0.1 ranomolar  -1.0
mlcromolar concentrations, reduced phosphate uptake and high death rates resulted.
The  same active transport system accumulates phosphate and arsenate and appears
accelerated by Increased  pH,  These results suggest that toxlclty levels of
antlmetabolltea depend not only on populations and chelate concentrations but in a
major vay on free nutrients and trace metal levels.

 IHDEX TERMS:  Water pollution effects, Marine microorganisms, Copper, Toxlclty,
       Phosphates,  Huiganeae,  Inhibitors, Arsenic  compounds,  Metabolism, Growth rates,
       Lethal limit,  Ions, Nutrients, Trace elements, Yeasts, Alaska, Marine fungi,
       Deficient  elements, Kinetics, Absorption, Heavy metals, Inhibition, Arsenic, Anti-
       netabolltes,  Araenates, Assimilation, Chemical interference,  Substrate  utilization

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METOE
   nc-3510
  THE PRODUCTION AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF SAURURUS CERHUUS L. AT DIFFER3HT SITES",
 ^3yd, C. E., WaUey, W. W.t Didgeon, B., Frase, K., University of Georgia, Institute
| of Ecology, Athens, Georgia, Annual Report No. SRO-310-1 (PT-2), Contract No.
! AT (38-D-310, August 1971, pp 22U-252.

i              A study was conducted to investigate relationships between site fertility
i and production In toe aquatic herb Saururus cernuus; the chemical composition of
j plants was also considered.  Plant samples were harvested during June 1970 over a
• huge area of the southeastern 11. S.  Boot samples were washed within Ii8 hr of collection
! and allowed to drain for 15 mln.  Shoot and root samples were weighed, dried for k - 6
 days at 60 C, and revelghed.  The percentage dry natter was used to convert fresh
 weight data to a dry weight per quadrat basis.  Chlorophyll determinations were made
 by standard methods after storing roots on ice for 6-8 hr.  Nitrogen was determined
 by the mlcro-KJeldahl technique after milling to pass a UO-mesh screen and a
 Jarrell-Ash direct-reading 1.5-meter emission spectograph was used to determine
 concentrations of other elements.  Total standing crop was shown to Increase with
 Increasing pH and dilute acid soluble phosphorus levels.  Correlation between fertility
 and standing crop was apparently minimal.

 INDEX TERMS:  Aquatic plants. Primary productivity, Fertility, Hutrlent requirements,
       Chlorophyll, Separation techniques, Nitrogen, Cation exchange. Nutrients,
       Phosphorus, Soil analysis, Chemical analysis, Standing crops, Bloassay,
       Blomass, Methodology, Saururus cernuus, Sample preparation, Emission spectroscopy,
       Microphytes.
AMIC-3520
"STUDIES OF A SIMPLE LABORATORY MICROSYSTEM:  EFFECTS OF STRESS",  Ferens, M. C., Beyers,
R. J., Georgia University, Institute of Ecology, Athens, Georgia,  Annual Report No.
SRO-310-1 (Pt.l), Contract No. AT (38-l)-310, August 1971,  PP 8-2U.

             Inocula from an established microcosm were subjected to acute gamna
radiation levels of 0.796 kilo- and 79.8 megarada.  Two sets of ZkO flasks were
prepared with one Vmi*1 receiving Irradiated Inocula and the one-half controlled
Inocula.  These were sampled over a ItO-day period and measured for chlorophyll
a content, diurnal community metabolism, and partlculate blomass.   Blomass and
chlorophyll samples were obtained by filtration with Whatman GF/C  glass fiber filters.
Significant reduction In chlorophyll a was found when each treatment level was compared
to its control.  Biomass was significanty reduced throughout succession for both
treatment levels except for the last sample of 79.8 megarad micrososma.  Net daytime
productivity and nightime respiration varied and were reduced during early succession
at both treatment levels.  0.798 kllorad levels showed more stress than 7.98 megarad
levels when comparing radlatipn treatment effects at the community level as related
to other forms of stress within the community.
INDEX TERMS:  Stress, Chlorophyll, Primary productivity, Aquatic alffie, Comparative
      productivity, Blomaas, Productivity, Metabolism, Diurnal, ChlorellA, Biological
      communities. Respiration, Laboratory tests. Irradiation, Ecosystems, Chlorophyta,
      Inhibition, Gamma rays, Chlorophyll a, Schlzothrix calclcola.
 AMIC-3511
 "RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN PRIMARY PRODUCTIVITY AND MOSQUITOFISH (GAMBUSIA AFFDHS) PRODUC-
 TION IH LARGE MICROCOSMS", Goodyear, C. P., Boyd, C. E., Beyers, R. 3., ei al.,
 University of Georgia, Institute of Ecology, Athens, Georgia, Annual Report No.
 SRO-310-1 (PT-2), Contract Ho. AT (38-D-310, August 1971, pp 300-309.

              A microcosm approach was used to study the relationship between primary
 productivity and mosqultoflsh production.  Microcosms were established In 15 circular
 pools with vinyl plastic bottoms sealed to corrugated steel siding.  Water depth was
 maintained at a constant 35 cm.  Five levels of fertilization were used, with three
 pools at each level.  Sixty juvenile and 5 adult female mosquitofish were stocked In
 each pool.  Primary productivity waa measured at 2- to 3-wk Intervals using the light
 and dark bottle technique.  Oxygen consumption was determined by standard methods and
 carbon dioxide evolution and consumption were determined by pH measurements In the
 bottles Just before and after Incubation.  At the conclusion of the study, the fish
 were killed with rotenone, removed, counted, and weighed.  The pools were then drained
 and dried and the accumulated material was harvested, dried, weighed, and analyzed for
 organic nitrogen using the mlcro-KJeldahl technique.  Fish production Increased with
 increasing fertility level and there was a high correlation between net and gross
 primary productivity and fish production.  The total quantity of or&nic nitrogen in
 the pool residue also correlated with fish production.
 INDEX TERMS:  Primary productivity, South Carolina, Fertilization, Oxygen, Carbon
       dioxide, Hydrogen Ion concentration, Incubation, Metabolism, Respiration, Light
       intensity, Bloassay, nitrogen. Organic matter, Phytoplankton, Plankton, Secondary
       productivity, Blomass, Freshwater fish, Aquatic environment, Gambusla affinis.
       Microcosm, Mosqultoflsh, KJeldahl procedure. Light and dark bottle technique.
AMIC-3521
"WITHER RESPONSE OF LAHGEMOUTH BASS  (KICROPTERUS SALMOIDES) TO HEATED EFFLUENT FROM A
NUCLEAR REACTOR", Gibbons, J. W., Hook, J. T., Forney, D. L., Georgia University,
Institute of Ecology, Athens, Georgia, Annual Report No. SRO-310-1 (Pt.l), Contract No.
AT (38-l)-310, August 1971, PP 25-32.

             Catch-effort in a systematic casting study was combined with underwater
diving to determine apparent abundance of l&rgemouth bass (Micrppterus salmoldes)
in the vicinity of a thermal effluent into a reservoir during the winter"!  More fish
were seen and caught when the effluent was heated than when the effluent was at ambient
temperatures.  Catch-effort and underwater sightings were consistently higher under the
elevated temperature conditions when compared to a similar,  but unheated, part of the
reservoir.

INDEX TERMS:  Fish behavior, Thermal pollution, Thermal stress, Heated water, Effluents,
      Reservoirs, Freshwater fish, Fish populations, Fish attractants. Sport fish. Water
      pollution sources, Discharge (water). Nuclear reactors, Water pollution effects,
      Winter, South Carolina, Water temperature, Sampling, Micropterus salmoldes,
      Largemouth bass, Par Pond.
                                                                                        28

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3522
  "EFFECTS OF CHROHIC GAMMA  IRRADIATION ON THE FISH ORYZIAS LATIPES", Kaufman, G. A.,
 Beyers,  R.  J,,  Georgia University,  Institute of Ecology, Athena, Georgia, Annual
  Report Ho.  SRO-310-1  (Pt.l), Contract Bo. AT (38-l)-310, August 1971, pp 38J»6".

j               Two strains (Rice and Ozark) of Japanese medaka, Oryzlas latlpes, were
  used to  examine the effect of radiation stress on survival, body composition, and
j  reproduction.   Two male and three female fish were placed In each of forty cylindrical
:  glass aquaria (diameter 38 cm; depth !*3 cm).  Two aquaria containing the Ozark strain
,  and two  containing the Rice strain were placed at various distances from a 9200 c
|  Cs-137 source.   The 200 fish were Irradiated 79 days.  The dosage received by the
j  medaka ranged from 220-16500 rads.   Wet weight and standard length were recorded
  before and after Irradiation.  Fish were freeze-drled to determine the dry weight.
  Fat and  lean dry bicoass determinations were obtained by a semi-micro fat extraction
  technique with caloric values having been determined on a Parr adlabratic oxygen
I  bomb calorimeter. There was not a significant difference in the survival of the two
  strains; however, the Ozark strain females were acre sensitive to radiation stress
  than the males and the number of surviving Ozark strain medaka was inversely
  correlated with dosage. There was not  a significant difference In the relationship
  of wet weight to standard  length before and after Irradiation In either the Ozark
  or Rice  strain; however, the per cent of water in the medaka Increased as the dosage
  Increased.   No significant differences  in the per cent lean dry bionass (dry weight
  basis) were found between  strains or dosage levels.

  IHDEX TEEMS:  Stress,  Fish reproduction,  Irradiation, Fish physiology, Gamma rays,
        Cesium,  Blomass, Liplds, Fish diets, Fish eggs, Laboratory tests, Freshwater fish,
        Metabolism, Lethal limit,  Cs-137,  Cesium radloisotopes, Survival, Oxygen bomb
 AMIC-3523
 "RELATIOSSHIPS BETWEEN STANDING CROP ADD NUTRITIVE QUALITY OF AQUATIC MACROFHYTES",
 Pollsinl, J. M., Boyd, C. E.. Georgia University, Institute of Ecology, Athena, Georgia,
 Annual Report  No. SflO-310-1 (Pt.l), Contract No. AT (38-1) -310, August 1971, pp U7-59.
              The digestibility of aquatic macrophytes was estimated by the neutral-
 detergent procedure and consideration given to the relationships between shoot standing
 crop and nutritive quality of the various species.  Standing crop estimates were obtained
 for 16 species of plants collected at the mud-water Interface of Par Pond, South
 Carolina.  Plants were separated into leaves, stems and/or petioles, and Inflorescences.
 Specimens of five species were obtained for chemical determinations.  All samples were
 dried, ground,  redrled and stored In vacuum desslcators.  Neutral -detergent solubility
 and mlcro-KJeldahl nitrogen determinations were made on three samples of each plant
 part for each  species.  The total standing crops of shoots ranged from 1,W53 g/sq m
i for Typta. domlngenals to BU g/sq m for Nuphar advena while 11 of the 16 species
 were below 500 g/sq m.  Grazing by herbivores was not a serious loss from most species
 and the standing crop values generally approximated net shoot production.  Total
 plant dry matter varied greatly between species.  The organic content of the whole
 dried shoots ranged from 0.66 g/100 g in Typha dom-trig^nais to 3-Uo g/100 g In Orlntum
 aquatleum.  Nitrogen and noncell-wall fractions were lower In species that had high
 standing 'crops  than In species producing low standing crops.  These results suggest
 that nutritive  quality can vary as much between different plant parts as between species.
 However, production within different plant populations does not merely differ as a
 function of dry weight, carbon or energy.  There are fundamental differences In
 biochemical synthesis that have a pronounced effect upon the utilization of primary
 production.
lures TCB»gi«  Hiitrleiita, Aquatic
                                                   props,. Nutrient removal. Macrophytes.
                                                                                          AMIC-352U
                                                                                          "VARIATION IN THE ELEMENTAL CONTENT OF EICHHORNIA CRASSIFES", Boyd, C. E., Victors, D.
                                                                                          H., Dldgeon, B., Georgia University, Institute of Ecology, Athens, Georgia, Report No.
                                                                                          SHO-310-1 (Pt.l), Contract No. AT (38-l)-310, August 1971, pp 60-66.
                                                                                                       Four to eight plants of the water hyacinth (Elchhornia crasslpea) were col-
                                                                                          lected from 17 sites (lakes, small ponds, drainage ditches, and natural streams) within
                                                                                          a 80-km radius of Orlando, Florida on November 11 and 12, 1969.  Several of these
                                                                                          sites were known to receive significant amounts of nutrient pollution, while others
                                                                                          were suspected to be unpolluted natural waters.  Plants were washed, dried, pulverized,
                                                                                          redrled, and desi-coated.  Nitrogen determination was performed by the mlcro-Kkeldahl
                                                                                          technique and sulfur by a previously described method.  Other element concentrations
                                                                                          (P, Ca, Mg, K, Na, Fe, Zn, Cu, B, Mo, Mi) were determined with a Jarrell-Aeh direct
                                                                                          reading 1.5-n emission spectrograph.  Water samples from each site were analyzed
                                                                                          for total alkalinity "nA dissolved phosphorus; macronutrlent cations were determined
                                                                                          by atonic absorption spectrophotometry.  As evident by the wide standard errors
                                                                                          and large coefficients of variation (usually above 30 percent), elemental concentrations
                                                                                          of dried E. crasslpes samples' from different sites varied greatly.  The results
                                                                                          of water analyses show that E. crasslpes occurs over a wide spectrum of water quality.
                                                                                          No significant linear correlation was found between concentrations of macronutrlents
                                                                                          In the water nrvl la water hyacinth blomasa; however E. erasslpes produces relatively
                                                                                          large standing crops.                               °~

                                                                                          INDEX TERMS:  Trace elements. Water hyacinth, Bionass, Nutrients, Aquatic plants, Nitro-
                                                                                                gen, Phosphorus, Magnesium, Sulfur, Sodium, Calcium, Bioassay, Sampling, Standing
                                                                                                crops. Potassium, Heavy metals, Iron, Manganese, Zinc, Copper, Boron, Molybdenum,
                                                                                                Macrophytes, Eichlornia crasslpes, Kjeldahl procedure, Emission spectroscopy.
AMIC-3526
"ELEMENTAL COMPOSITION OF LAHGEMOUTH BASS (MICROPTERUS SALMOIDEST. Goodyear, C. P.,
Boyd, C. E., Dldgeon, B., Georgia University, Institute of Ecology, Athena, Georgia,
Annual Report No. SBO-310-1 (Pt.l), Contract No. AT (38-l)-310, August 1971, pp 83-89.

             The elemental composition of largemouth bass (Mlcropterua salmoldes) was
determined on specimens collected by angling from three sites in South Carolina
and two sites in Florida.  Fish, with gut contents removed, were measured,
weighed and dried to a constant weight at 60 degrees C.  The dried fish were then
pulverized, redrled and analyzed for nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, and calcium, and
sodium, potassium, magnesium iron, manganese, zinc, and copper.  Water samples obtained
at each sampling site were analyzed for levels of dissolved calcium, magnesium,
potassium, and sodium by atomic absorption spectrophotometry.  The results demonstrated
that the bass were able to control body levels of those elements regardless of the
external concentrations.  Variation In concentrations of individual elements between fish
from a particular site waa small.  Slight differences were observed among means of the
various elements In fish from the five sites.  However, the magnitude of the differences
for any particular element was small when compared to the numerical magnitude of the
mean of that element.  Consequently, the mean concentrations of the various elements
across sites should be adequate for routine calculations of amounts of nutrients which
are contained In largemouth bass populations provided the biomass of the population Is
known.

INDEX TERMS:  Nutrients, South Carolina, Florida, Sampling, Reservoirs, Nitrogen, Sulfur,
      Phosphorus, Calcium, Magnesium, Potassium, Sodium, Zinc, Copper, Iron, Freshwater
      fish, Ponds, Impoundments, Bioassay, Trace elements, Chemical analysis, Manganese,
      Methodology, Largemouth bass, Micropterus salmoides, Chemical elements, Emission
	speetroseotrVf K^eldahl procedure, Atomic absorption speetrophotometry.	
                                                                                       29

-------
                                                                               2.
 AMTC-3527             "                                            •	—	
 "ABUTOANCE AND DDCAL MOVEMSHT OF LARGEMOUIH BAGS (MXCKOPTERUS SALMOIDES) IH A RESERVOIR
 RECEmHB HEAOED EFFLUENT FROM A REACTOR", Gibbons, J.'w^'Senneit, b. &., Georgia
 University, Institute of Ecology, Athens, Georgia, Annual Report No.  SRO-310-1 (Pt.l),
 Contract Bo.  AT (38-l)-3io, August 1971, pp 90-99!

              Ecological studies of the largemouth bass (Mlcropterua i^iyt^) were
 conducted In Par Fond,  a South Carolina reservoir receiving heated water froa a
 nuclear reactor.  Systematic angling coupled with undervater observation and tag-
 release-recapture studies were used to compare the abundance of largemouth bass In
 heated and cool environments.   More than 2500 largemouth bass were tagged In Far Pond,
 yet recaptures were made on less than 3 percent of the Individuals.  Comparisons between
 the heated and cool parts of the lake revealed population density differences between
 the two areas.  Based on three Independent Indicators of population size, more bass
 inhabit the heated areas of the lake.  The casting and underwater observation studies
 further substantiate the Idea  that the high densities observed In winter are a result
 of elevated temperatures rather than another environmental factor. Individual bass
 exhibit a high nobility in the reservoir with movement of more than 6 km being
 of frequent occurrence.   The majority of Individuals recaptured in the heated areas
 appear to have remained in the same place.

 INDEX TERMS:   Fish populations,  Thermal pollution,  Movement,  Density,  Sampling,  South
       Carolina,  Reservoirs,  Freshwater fish,  Water pollution effects,  Winter,  Fish
       behavior,  Ecology,  Nuclear reactors, Blolndlcators,  Marking techniques.  Tagging,
       Water temperature,  largemouth bass, Mlcropterus salmoldes,  Far  Pond.
AKTC-3566
"DOT: INHIBITIOH OF SODIUM CHLORIDE TOLERANCE BY THE BLUE^SREEN ALBA AHACYSTIS mDULANS"
Batterton, J. C., Boush, 0. M., Mitsumura, F., Science. Vol. 176, June §,' 1975, -
             The effects of DDT on the sodium chloride tolerance of the blue-green alga,
Anacystls nldulans were investigated by growth-rate studies.  Alga cultures were
grown alf"30 degrees C on previously defined media with additions of sodium chloride
(1 percent by weight) and/or DDT (800 ppb) and growth rate constants were calculated for
each condition.  A. nldulans was able to tolerate sodium chloride and DDT alone but not
In combination.  Chen HaCl was replaced by KC1, no growth was observed with KC1
in combination with DDT.  Growth did occur In cultures with lower concentrations of
either KC1 or DDT.  That DDT lowered algal tolerance to salts by the Inhibition of
adenoalne trlphosphatase activity and the sodium-punp was substantiated by (1) additions
of calcium, a transport inhibitor, to the growth cultures (the calcium reduced the
permeability of the cells to NaCl, thus reducing NaCl stress) and (Z) enzyme assays.
Two types of ATPases were used in a comparison of Inhibition by DDT and ouabaln.
The degree of inhibition by DDT was found to exceed that due to ouabaln.  Growth
experiments carried out with glycerol Indicated that the NaCl plus DDT Inhibition
Is probably due to an ionic effect and not to osmotic stress.

INDEX TERMS:  DDT, Sodium chloride, Inhibition, Salt tolerance, Water pollution effects,
      Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Cyanophyta, Sodium, Potassium, Cultures,
      Resistance, Aquatic algae, Growth rates, Bloassay, Laboratory tests, Calcium,
      Anacystls nldulans, Adenoslne trlphosphatase, Biochemical tests, Ouabaln,
      Potassium chloride.
                                                                                      30
 AMIC-3590
 "BIO BEEF ESTUARY PHYTOFLAHKTOH AND BACTERIA STUDIES, 1968-1969",  Pa^ner, F., Heller, J.,
 Gatjens, J., Hung, 8., University of Washington, Division of Marine Resources, Seattle,
I Washington, Report Ho. WSG-MP 71-5, December 1971, 7 PP.   NTIS Report No. COM 72 1031U.

]              A report written primarily for those Investigators engaged In studies at
: Big Beef estuary emphasizes (1) estimates of phytoplankton populations,  (2) bacteria
I of sanitary significance in shellfish, (3) estimates of total food for shellfish, and
| C») indicators of ecological change.  Phytoplankton samples vere obtained by passing
 known volumes of water through a 100-olcron net.  Samples were preserved for Identifica-
 tion in an iodine-potassium iodide solution and others In a 5 percent neutralized
 formalin.  Organisms in the stored samples were Identified and counted with the aid of an
 Inverted microscope and settling chambers.  Water for bacteriological analysis was col-
 lected asaptically In sterile bottles.  Dilution and inoculation of appropriate media
 were often performed Immediately after collection of the  samples.   Collforms were
 estimated using a Lauryl Txyptose broth and confirmed on  EMB agar.   Total numbers of
 aerobic, heterotrophic bacteria were estimated by the MPN procedure and  those giving a
 positive test were subcultured on gelatin and starch media for estimation of gelatin
 liquifiers and starch digesters, respectively.   Oxldlzable carbon and KJeldahl nitrogen
 analyses were done on partlculate matter nn«n.niny larger than 1.0  micron.  Chlorophyll
 analyses were performed OB particles held on O.U5-micron  filters.   Salinity measurements
 were made with hydrographic hydrometers and surface temperatures recorded.  The results
 are presented in graphic and tabular form.  It has been suggested from such data that
 (1) bacterial numbers be used as indicators of changes In estoarlne ecology and In
 monitoring the sanitary quality of water; (S) chlorophyll a should  be a  good Index
 of food available to shellfish; and (3) KJeldahl nitrogen and ozidlzable carbon
 °*~'lr"" could provide useful in-fornation on potential shellfish food.
 AMIC-3590 (Continued)
                                                                           2/2
 INDEX TERMS:   Estuarlne environment,  Phytoplankton, Blolndlcatora, Water pollution,
       Marine  bacteria,  Shellfish,  Aquatic  populations, Food abundance, Sea water,
       Collforms,  Aerobic bacteria, Salinity, Sampling, Oxidation, Water quality, Organic
       matter. Chemical  analysis, Ecology,  Carbon, Water pollution sources, Biochemical
       tests,  Chlorophyll a, KJeldahl  procedure, Big Beef estuary, Most probable number
       test, Sample preparation, Sample preservation, Heterotrophic bacteria.

-------
                                                                              2 .  BIOLOGICAL MTTPHnTTR
AMIC-3593
"RESEARCH ON AND CULTURE OF CALCAREOUS GREEN ALGAE", Hlllis-Collnvaux, L., Ohio State
University, Research Foundation, Columbus, Ohio, Final Report, Contract Bo.
N0001U-67-C-0262, February 11, 1972, 30 pp.  HTIS Report Ho. AD 738 885.

             Four genera of coral reef Siphonalea, Hallmeda, PenicilluB, Rhlpocephalua
and Udfftga were grown in laboratory  aquaria under light Intensities of 650, 200-375
and 12^-500 ft-candles.  The commercial preparation 'Instant Ocean1 was tested for use
with plants.  Penicillin and llndane were tested for their effect on epiphytes and
other nuisances.  A 15 ppm solution of the invertebrate killer Llndane did not kill
Halimedae which were immersed in it for 15 minutes.  Penicillin at a concentration
of 3000 units per ml was initially effective in controlling the weeds, but within
2 months they were abundant again and penicillin was thereafter Ineffective.  The
growth and development of all k genera from tiny protuberances above the sand to white,
dying and disintegrating individuals was followed.  All produced new individuals
from rhizoidal-llke filaments that extended outwards through the sand from the holdfast
of an older plant.  It was demonstrated that vegetative reproduction might occur
with partial burying of Individuals by shifting sands in a reef, or from portions of
plants broken off by grazing or other natural activities.  Plants produced vegetatively
are not initially epiphytlzed and so may be a source of clean plants for laboratory
experiment.  The first swanner-producing Penlclllus plants so far known were produced
during this study.  The rather undistinguished structures associated with them, the
release of swarmers from Hallmeda, and associated observations are described.  Insight
into the role of calcareous plants in a reef was obtained by a productivity study which
combined a census of such plants in a reef and a laboratory measure of oxygen changes
in an entire aquarium.  Some Hallmeda reef populations appeared to be grazed by the
               AMIC-3595
               "EFFECTS OF THE WATER -SOLUBLE COMPOHEHT OF OIL POLLUTION ON CHEMORECEPTION BY CRABS",
               Klttredge, J. S., Hope City National Medical Center, Division of Neurosclences, Duarte,
               California, Report, Contract No. N0001U-71-C-0103, 1971, 5 pp.  NTIS Report No.
               AD 738 505.
                            The feeding and sex pheromone responses of the Lined Shore Crab,
               Pachygrapsus crasslpe« were used In experiments designed to assay the possibility that
               chemoreceptlon Is particularly susceptible to the water-soluble component of crude oil.
               Two samples of crude oil (Sisquoc sand and a lower Miocene California crude oil)
               were prepared by swirling a dilute dlethyl ether solution of each in 2,000-ml
               beakers until the solvent evaporated.  Each of these beakers was filled with sea water
               and stirred slowly overnight.  Two types of bioassays dependent on the cheooreceptlve
               capability of the crabs were used: (1) sterlotyple feeding response of crabs
               as exhibited when taurine is used, and (2) behavioral response of the male
               crab to the sex pheromone of the female as exhibited upon exposure to crustecdysone
               (molting hormone).  The water-soluble extracts of the crude oils completely inhibited
               both the feeding response and* the response to the sex pheromone.  The feeding response
               assays were conducted in quadruplicate, with each crab In 300 ml of 'polluted1 sea water
               and receiving the taurine stimulus at five-minute Intervals.  The average time until the
               feeding response was Inhibited was 16.25 minutes for both crude oil extracts.  The
               inhibition of pheromone response was tested by placing male crabs in a 1:20 dilution of
               the 'polluted' water.  After 30 minutes each was transferred to clean sea water contain-
               ing 0.5 nM crustecdysone.  Each of the six crabs tested failed to exhibit a behavioral
               response to the presence of the crustecdysone.  Ten of the crabs that had exhibited
               inhibition of the feeding response were transferred to clean sea water four times to
AMIC-3593 (Continued)
2/2
AMIC-3595 (Continued)
2/2
urchin Dladema.  A conservative figure for the productivity of laboratory Hallmeda
plants is 2.5 mg C/plant/day (net) or 4.5 mg C/plant/day (gross).

INDEX TERMS:  Cultures, Plant growth, Chlorophyta, Marine algae, Bloassay, Reproduction,
      Sea water, Marine plants. Primary productivity. Coral, Reefs, Antibiotics
      (pesticides), Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Pesticide toxlclty, Plant
      populations, Aquaria, Laboratory equipment. Plant physiology. Epiphytes,
      Culturlng vessels, Penicillin, Llndane, Slphonales.
               remove adsorbed material, placed in a 25-gallon aquarium, and tested each day for
               recovery.  The recovery period varied from three to six days, with eight recovering
               in four or five days.  Characterization of the inhibitory components has not been as
               yet accomplished.

               INDEX TERMS:  Crabs, Water pollution effects, Animal behavior, Crustaceans,
                     Shellfish, Oil spills, Oil pollution, Bloassay, Methodology, Organic compounds,
                     Laboratory tests, Inhibition, Chemoreceptlon, Crude oil, Pachygrapsus crasslpes,
                     Hydrocarbons, Feeding, Arthropods, Macrolnvertebrates.
                                                                                       31

-------
                                                                               2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
i
  AKK-3617
  "A SIMPLE MICROLASER METHOD FOR SMALL SAMPLES", Harvey, G. W., Burzell, L. A.,
  Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 17,  No.  1,  January 1972, pp 156-160.

               A simple method for the  collection of surface nlcrolayer  samples Involves
  the Immersion of a clean hydrophlllc  surface In the water and withdrawing it
  vertically at a controlled rate so that a layer approximately 60-100 microns thick
  is retained.  The surface film and water layer adhering to the plate are removed
  from both sides with a neoprene windshield viper  blade.  This method was found
  ineffective with layers of oil significantly thicker than monolayers.  When the method
  was tested against a standard microlayer sampling method, the data obtained Indicated
  fairly good agreement between the 2 microlayer methods.

  IHDEX TERMS:  Sampling, Equipment, Thin films,  Chlorophyll,  Pluorometry, Evaluation,
        Organic matter, Diatoms, Protozoa,  Detritus,  Methodology,  Spectrofluorimetry,
        Tryptophan, Tyrosine, Chlorophyll a. Flagellates.
AMIC-3620
"DISTRIBUTION OF HERRING (CLUPEA HAREtCUS) LARVAE ALONG THE SOUTHERN COAST OF NOVA
SCOTIA WITH OBSERVATIONS OlTlflklB fiROVra AND CONDITION FACTOR",  SameotO,  D. D.,
Journal Fisheries Research Board of Canada. Vol.  29,  No. 5, May  1972, pp 507-515.

             The distribution of herring (Clupea harengus) larvae along the southern
coast of Nova Scotia was studied in relation to their growth and condition factor.
Herring larvae and zooplankton samples were collected and the condition factors
calculated to be used as indicators of high or low potential of  larval mortality.
During the fall and winter, the condition factor and growth rate of herring larvae
were studied and compared to that of herring larvae from the coast of Maine, and from
parts of the Horth, Baltic, and Clyde Seas to determine If the environment on the  coast
of Nova Scotia was as favorable to the larvae as those mentioned above.  The distribu-
tion and abundance of herring larvae on the southern coast of Nova Scotia suggested
the presence of a fall spawning population.  Larvae were found in St. Margaret's Bay
from late September to June.  They showed a slower growth rate than larvae from  the
Clyde Sea, Scotland, and weighed less at a particular length than did larvae from  the
Clyde Sea and Boothbay, Milne'.  The larvae had a lower condition factor at 25 OB
length than larvae from the Horth and Baltic Seas.  No larvae were found on the  Scotlan
Shelf during late Miy and early June, 1969, but were  abundant during September and
October.  Herring spawning beds were reported from areas along the entire coast  of Nova
Scotia from Canso to Cape Sable.

INDEX TERMS!  Growth rates, Spatial distribution,  Fish physiology, Larval growth stage,
      Ecological distribution. Water pollution effects,  Herrings,  Mortality, Fish
      Populations, Clupea harengus, Condition factor, Copepods,  Water quality,
      Zooplankton, Biomass, Sea water, Sampling,  Marine fish,  Equipment,  Coasts.
 AMIC-3619
 "TISSUE CULTURE BIOASSAY METHOD FOR WATER POLLUTIOH WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO MERCURIC
 CHLORIDE", Li, M. F., Trailer, G. S., Journal Fisheries Research Board of Canada,
 Vol. 29, Ho. 5, *>y 1972, pp 501.506. 	~	—'

              Mouse cells cultivated on a chemically defined medium (miMm^ essential
 medium supplemented with fetal calf serum and peptone) to which had been added mercuric
 chloride were used in a study to determine  the effect of mercuric chloride on cellular
 respiration and multiplication as well as the factors governing the sensitivity of this
 bloassay system.  Cell respiration studies  were conducted using standard mnometric
 techniques and the cells were enumerated using an electronic counter.   The nutritional
 history,  growth phase,  initial density of the cells,  as wen as the concentration of
 the serum supplement used In the test medium had significant effects on the sensitivity
 of the bloassay system.   It was concluded that the cells used for the  test should be
 in the stationary phase  at an initial cen  density of approximately 200,000/ml,  and the
 test medium should be free of fetal calf serum.   Under the experimental conditions used
 mercuric chloride at a concentration  of 10 mlcrograms/1 or less inhibited the  cellular
 multiplication significantly;  the results indicated that this assay procedure  could be
 adequate for monitoring  water quality.   The cellular  respiration method, however,  was
 leas sensitive, but simple and rapid  with results being made available within  a  few
hours, and therefore useful for screening or preliminary testing of heavily polluted
samples.

IHDEX TERMS:  Water quality, Bloassay, Pollutant identification, Water ponutlon,
      Respiration, Growth stages, Industrial wastes, Aquatic  life. Oxygen, Monitoring,
      Inhibition, Inorganic compounds. Laboratory tests, Cytological studies, Growth
      rates, Mercuric chloride. Tissue culture. Biomonltoring.	
                                                                                           AMIC-3623
                                                                                           "EFFECTS OF LONG-TERM EXPOSURE TO CARBAKn. (SEVIN) ON SURVIVAL, GROWTH, AHD REPRODUCTION
                                                                                           OF THE FATHEAD MDIHOW (PIMEFHALES PROHSLAS)".  Carlson, A. R., Journal Fisheries Research
                                                                                           Board of Canada,  Vol. 29,  No.  5,  May 1972,  pp  583-587.
                                                                                                       A study was conducted to  determine  the effects of carbaryl  (Sevln;
                                                                                           1-naphthylmethylcarbamate),  on growth,  survival  and reproduction of the  fathead minnow
                                                                                                       promelas) throughout a life cycle.   Stainless steel  test chambers were used
                                                                                           along with growth chambers  for the young produced.  The growth chambers obtained water-
                                                                                           flows from the main test chambers.  Unflltered Lake Superior water was heated in a
                                                                                           headbox apparatus and a  water  temperature of 25 plus or minus 2 C was, with several
                                                                                           exceptions, maintained In the  test chambers.   Acidity, alkalinity, total hardness, jfl,
                                                                                           and dissolved oxygen of  the test water were measured and the carbaryl concentrations In
                                                                                           the test chambers were determined by a colormetrlc method.  Grab samples of water from
                                                                                           each test concentration  and from the control were analyzed at least once a week.
                                                                                           Recovery of carbaryl from spiked control water ranged from 91 to 100 percent.  When
                                                                                           the fish were exposed to five  concentrations (0.008-0.68 rag/liter) of the insecticide
                                                                                           carbaryl for  9 months and throughout a life cycle, the highest concentration prevented
                                                                                           reproduction  and decreased  survival.  At the high concentration, tests contained
                                                                                           motile sperm  and ovaries were  in a flaccid condition and appeared to be in a resorptlve
                                                                                           state.   At the 0.68 mg/liter concentration, carbaryl appeared to contribute to the
                                                                                           mortality of  larvae (produced  by unexposed parents) within 30 days of hatching.
                                                                                           Survival of young grown  in  the 0.008 mg/liter  concentration was reduced.  Since no
                                                                                           demonstrable  effects were noted for survival,  growth, or reproduction at the 0.017,
                                                                                           0.062,  and 0.21  Bg/llter concentrations, this  low survival value is considered not due
                                                                                           to  carbaryl.   The 96-hr  median tolerance concentration (XL 50) and the lethal threshold

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-3623  (Continued)
2/2
  concentration (LTC)  for 2-month-old fathead minnows were 9.0 ing/liter.  The maximum
  acceptable toxicant  concentration  (MATC) for fathead minnows exposed to carbaryl in
  water with a hardness  of J*5.2 ing/liter and a pH of 7.5 lies between 0.21 and 0.6Q ing/
  liter.  The application factors  (MATC/96-hr TL50 and WTC/LTC) both lie between 0.023
  and 0.075.

  INDEX TERMS:  Fish physiology, Fish reproduction, Pesticide toxlcity, Water properties,
        Life cycles. Growth  stages. Water pollution effects, Mortality, Carbanate
        pesticides, Animal growth, Resistance, Laboratory tests, Carbaryl, Plmephales
        promelas, Survival,  Fathead minnow.
 AMIC-3627
 'TEAT TOLERAHCE OF REEF ALGAE AT LA PARGUERA, PUERTO FICO", Schwartz, S. L., Almodovar,
 L. R., Nova Hedwigla, Vol. 21, No. 1, 1971, PP 231-2UO.

i              Heat and light tolerances are described for reef algae collected from
; Enrique Reef at Magueyes Island, La Parguera.  Sixteen species of algae were tested
 Including eleven reds, four greens, and one brown.  Algae were collected in groups of
! four from 3 specific areas:  Group I - shallow water around breaking waves; Group II
' and III - shallow, calm water at high tide; and Group IV- lagoons at 6-8 feet depth.
, Algal samples were placed on a seawater-molstened towel contained in a white enamel pan;
 the towel was frequently sprayed with seawater to avoid drying.  The algae were exposed
: to direct sunlight and the length of exposure, temperature, and range from first
I death signs to death were measured for each.  The results showed that members of
; Rbodophycophyta, the shallow water organisms, survived extreme temperatures better than
i those members of Chlorophycophyta, deep living organisms.  Furthermore, the specimens
 allowed to dry out in the shade survived longer that those exposed to the sun.

 INDEX TERMS:  Heat resistance', Marine algae, Light intensity, Ecological distribution,
       Surface waters, Lagoons, Chlorophyta, Rhodophyta, Physical properties, Water
       temperature, Data collections, fbrlne plants, Environmental effects, Beefs,
       Laboratory tests, Sampling, Phaeophyta, Survival.
 AMK-3626
 "EFFECT OF THERMAL STRESS OH PREDATOR AVOIDAHCE IU SOCKEYE SALMON", Sylvester, J. R.,
 Journal Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Vol. 29, Ho. 5, May 1972, pp 601-603.
              Experiments were performed to examine the effect of moderate and severe
 thermal doses of short duration on the ability of sockeye salmon fry,  Oncorhynchus
 nerka,  to avoid predatlon by yearling echo salmon, Onccrnynehus klsuteh,  In laboratory
 aquaria.   Predators and prey were divided Into three groups;  each group was acclimated
 in holding tanks to water temperatures of 7,  12,  or 17 C for  at least  2 weeks before
 tests.  All fish were held under a constant photoperlod.  Tests were conducted In
 Insulated tanks containing dechlorlnated water at an acclimation temperature of plus
 or minus  0.5 C.   Dissolved oxygen was maintained  at 80-90 percent of air  saturation
 values.   Eight prey and two predators acclimated  to the sane  temperature  were
 randomly  selected from the holding tanks for  each test.   A control series and two
 experimental series of testa were conducted at each acclimation temperature to
 study the effect of thermal doses of  short duration on the prey.   Tests in each
 series were  replicated eight times.  Under laboratory conditions,  predation rates
 of yearling  coho saloon on sockeye  salmon fry Increased with  increasing acclimation
 temperature.  Elevated temperature  doses  significantly decreased survival of sockeye
 salmon fry.  Hie results suggest  that under natural conditions,  sudden Increases in
water temperature could alter predator-prey interactions of some  fish  by  Increasing
predatlon mortalities.
INDEX TERMS:  Thermal  stress, Prey  fish,  Predation,  Sockeye salmon, Environmental
      effects. Mortality, Flshklll, Heated water,  Thermal pollution, Water temperature,
      Aquaria, Fish behavior, Water pollution effects, Laboratory  tests,  Salmon,  Fry,
      Freshwater fish, Oncorhynchus klsutch,  Oncorhynchus nerka, Coho  salmon,  Survival.

                                                                                     33
                 AMIC-3629
                 "TAXONOKff OF AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER ALGAE.   2. SOME  PLANKTIC STAUPASTRA  FROM TASMANIA",
                 Thomasson, K.,  Tyler,  P. A.,  Nova Hedwigla, Vol.  21, No.  1, 1971, PP 287-319.

                              The taxonomy and distribution of Australian freshwater algae  of the genus,
                 Staurastrua are described.  Plankton samples were taken with a  10-micron or 60-micron
                 plank ton"net from lakes la Tasmania, Australia, microscopically Identified and
                 diagrammed for reference.   Fifty nine taxa or variations thereof were found.

                 INDEX TERMS:  Phytoplankton,  Aquatic algae, Systematics,  Distribution patterns,  Lakes,
                       Aquatic plants,  Australia, Sampling, Microscopy,  Ecological distribution,
                       Plankton nets, Chlorophyta, Plankton, Staurastrum,  Desmlds.

-------
                                                                              2.
 AMIC-3632
 "RESIDUES IN FISH, WILDLIFE, AND ESTUARIES:  A SURVEY OF THE LEAD CONTENT OF FISH FROM
i 1*9 NEW YORK STATE WATERS", Pakkala, I. E., White, M. N., Burdlck, G. E., Harris, E. J.,
| Lisk, D. J., Pesticides Monitoring Journal, Vol. 5, No. >*, March 1972, pp 3^-355.

i              A survey was made of Ul9 fish In Ug Hew York State waters for total lead
 content and compared to data presented on a series of lake trout sampled In 197O from
i Cayuga Lake in order to determine If lead were cumulative in these fish.  Lead content   j
! was  determined by dry ashing 10 go of fish at U85 degrees C and examining the residue    |
 by a colorlmetrlc procedure.  The results showed that lead concentrations usually
 ranged from 0.3 to 1.5 ppm, and a few samples up to 3.0 ppm.  Variations were found In   '
i lead content of fish taken from different lakes, but no correlation was observed between
i lead concentration and size, species, or sex.  Lead did not appear to be cumulative in
j lake trout up to 12 years of age taken from Cayuga Lake.
I
 INDEX TERMS:  Lead, Wildlife, Water pollution effects, Pollutant identification,
       Heavy metals, Freshwater fish, Bloassay, Chemical analysis, Colorimetry,
i       Bioaccumulatlon, Sample preparation. Sensitivity.
                                                                                          AMIC-3655
                                                                                          "PHOTOEYNTHETIC REAERATIOH IN THE UPPER PASSAIC RIVER", Hunter, J. V., Tuffey, T. J.,
                                                                                          Rutgers University, Water Resources Research Institute, New Brunswick, New Jersey,
                                                                                          Final Report, Contract No. DI-lU-01-0001-1526, January 1972, 39 PP.  NTIS Report No.
                                                                                          PB 207 620.
                                                                                                       Trlmonthly tests (August 1968-September 1969) were conducted during an
                                                                                          Investigation of toe photosynthetic activity in the Upper Passalc River to
                                                                                          determine (l) the extent of photosynthesis reoxygenatlon (P-R), (2) how (P-R) compares
                                                                                          with atmospheric reaemtlon, and (3) if (P-H) can be predicted from environmental
                                                                                          variables.  Circumstances forced almost total reliance upon the light-dark technique to
                                                                                          determine PJl from field data.  Pairs of bottles, one each clear and opaque, were
                                                                                          incubated In the stream at various depths and distances.  Incubation was one to several
                                                                                          days depending upon rates of oxygen production.  After incubation 02 concentrations In
                                                                                          the bottles were determined using either the Alsterberg modification of the Winkler
                                                                                          method or a galvanic DO probe.  The net 02 due to photosynthesis is equal to the
                                                                                          difference In the 02 concentrations of the light and dark bottle divided by the Incuba-
                                                                                          tion period in days, i.e. mg/l/day.  P-R values ranged from 0.02 - I*.12 mg/l/day, with
                                                                                          a mean of 0.86 mg/l/day.  A diurnal fluctuation was present but not pronounced.
                                                                                          Seasonal variations show 02 production changes lagging behind temperature changes.
                                                                                          Photosynthesis contributes to approximately 20 percent of total reaeration of the
                                                                                          Passalc River and Is essentially Independent of stream discharge.  Predictions
                                                                                          based on equations failed.
                                                                                          INDEX TERMS:  Photosynthetic oxygen, Reaeration, Photosynthesis, Water quality,
                                                                                                Dissolved oxygen, Oxygenatlon, Fluctuations, Eutrophication, Phytoplankton,
                                                                                                Nutrients, Upper Fassalc River, Seasonal variation.
AMIC-36U5
 "HEAVY METALS POLLUTE NATURE,  MAY REDUCE  PRODUCTIVITlf", Tyler, G., AMBIO.
Ho.  2, April 1972, pp 52-59.
                                                                           Vol. 1,
             The deposition,  accumulation,  and possible effects of Pb, Cd, Cu, Zn,
 HI, Fe, and Mn on  terrestrial sites  in Scandinavia are  discussed.  Bryophytes have
 been cited as  the  most sensitive biological Instruments for measuring the deposition
 of heavy metals.   Additional  work has  shown dead organic matter, litter, and humus that
 was derived from mosses and lichens  to have a  large capacity for capturing heavy metals
 through passive ion  exchange.  The great capacity of bryophytes and to a lesser extent,
 lichens, to capture  heavy metals through Ion exchange,  is attributable to the great
 stability  of the chemical complexes  formed  between heavy metal Ions and negatively
 charged organic groups.  Accumulation  in mosses,  lichens, and In litter and  humus layers
 of natural and semi-natural ecosystems was  found to be  governed by Ion exchange
 equilibria dependent on the absorption complex between  ions from precipitation, foliage
 leaching,  and  the  dry  deposition present In the water passing through these  components.
 Increasing deposition  of heavy metals  due to human activity adversely affects
blodecomposltlon rates,  affecting a  decrease in productivity.

INDEX TERMS:   Terrestrial habitats.  Heavy metals,  Productivity, Ecosystems,  Chemical
      wastes,  Toxlclty,  Blolndlcators, Biodegradatlon,  Blomass, Lichens, Mosses,
      Soil contamination, Ion exchange, Pollutant Identification, Organic compounds,
      Adsorption,  Bryophytes, Bioaccumulatlon,  Metal complexes.
AMIC-3679
"EVUEflCE FOR THE RECOVERY OF THE WATERS OFF THE EAST COAST OF NOVA SCOTIA FROM THE
EFFECTS OF A MAJOR SPILL", Levy, E. M., Water, Air, and Soil Pollution, Vol. 1,
No. 2, April 1972, pp lWulU8.

             The amount of oil residues in Chedabucto Bay, Nova Scotia and the
surrounding areas was determined in order to evaluate environmental recovery from
the effects of the one-year old Bunker C fuel oil spill from the tanker ARROW which
was wrecked in 1970.  The area examined for oil was extended beyond that of a
previous Investigation.  Analysis for particuiate oil Involved filtering sea water
through O.U5-micron pretreated Mlllipore filters.  The filtrate was extracted
with chloroform and examined fluorometrlcally.  The results showed residual oil
In the Halifax section decreased over an 8 month period from 6.0 - 1.9 mlcrograms/1
at a depth of 2 m, and from 6.5 - 1.6 mlcrograms/1 at 10 m.  Variations In data
collected at different metering stations were attributed to weather, blodegradatlon,
water movements, and other environmental factors,

INDEX TERMS:  Fate Of pollutants, Water pollution effects, Oil spills, Separation
      techniques, Fluorometry, Sampling, Sea water, Water pollution sources, Solvent
      extractions, Persistence, Oil pollution, Biodegradation, Environmental effects,
      Path of pollutants. Bunker C oil. Nova Scotia, Oil residues, Recovery, Membrane
      filters, Membrane filtration, Sample preparation, Fuel oil, Chedabucto Bay,
      Partlculate matter, Petroleum products.

-------
                                                                              2.   EIOLUJICAL METHODS
AMIC-3892
 "LAKE  SUPERIOR PERIPHYTON IN RELATION TO WATER QUALITY", Olson, T. A., Odlaug, T. 0.,
University of Minnesota,  School of Public Health, Minneapolis, Minnesota, Water          I
Pollution  Control Research Series 18050 DBM 02/72, February 1972, 253 pp.

              Laboratory and  field studies were conducted to evaluate the importance of
perlphyton In western Lake Superior with special reference to the sake-up and
distribution of  the  perlphyton growths and  to the overall Importance of the productive
capacity of this assemblage  of organisms.   Over 9O percent of the total number of        ;
organisms  were diatoms; the  predominant genera were Synedra, Aehnanthes, Savieula,       i
Cymbella,  and Gomphonema.  The algal phyla  represented were Chrysophyta, the Chlorophyta,
and the  Cyanophyta.In many respects, the  perlphyton of Lake Superior was similar to    ]
that found in streams and there was evidence that the Interrelated factors that          :
affected perlphyton  growths  were temperature, light intensity, depth of water, water     '
movements,  nutrient  levels,  and the type of substrate.  Artificially denuded rocks       !
demonstrated definite re-growth but after >t6 days this growth level was only 18 percent
of that  occurring naturally.  The mean total counts of organisms in the primary sampling
are-, ranged from U97,000  to  1,1*70,000 per square centimeter of rock surface.  Studies of
the pigment concentrations showed that the blomass of perlphyton along the north shore
of Lake  Superior resemble  those of other ollgotrophlc bodies of water and range from
0.3338 to  3.59 mg of  total plgnent per 100 square centimeters of rock surface.  Pigment
ratios indicated that the Lake Superior perlphyton was dominated by the Chrysophyta.
ABsimllation values for Stony Point Bay averaged l.W) grams of carbon fixed per gram of
chlorophyll In 1967,  and the total standing crop In terms of dry weight was 55.5 tons.
In re-growth studies,  chlorophyll levels were observed to Increase by an average of
0.057  grams (57 ings) per square meter per day.   The efficiency of energy utilization in
Stony  Point Bay was found to be 0.082 percent,  a typical value for algal communities.
 AMIC-3950                                                                    	
 "RELATIONSHIPS OF CHLOROPHYLL MAXIMA TO DENSITY STRUCTURE IN THE ATLANTIC OCEAN AND
 GULF OF MEXICO", Hobson,  L. A., Lorenzen, C.  J., Deep-Sea Research,  Vol. 19, No. U,
 April 1972, pp 297-306.
              Spatial distribution of chlorophyll maxima in relation to the depths of
 pycnocllnes were studied in the Atlantic Ocean and in the Gulf of Mexico.  The
 distribution of dissolved Inorganic nitrogen and biomass of microorganisms and
 their taxonomic composition in chlorophyll maxima and surrounding water of the
 Gulf of Mexico also were examined.  Water samples were taken from stations along
 the southwest coast of Africa, the northeastern U.  S. coast, and the Gulf of Mexico
 at depths to 200 m using Nlskln 5-liter non-metallic sampling bottles equipped with
 reversing thermometers.  Salinity measurements were taken with a Hytech model 6210
 laboratory sallnometer.  The start of the pycnocline was determined by the depth at
 which the stability of the water column exceeded .0001/dz.  Standard methods were
 used to determine ammonia, nitrate, and nitrite and a fluorometric technique was
 used to measure chlorophyll a.  Microorganisms were counted by microscopic techniques
 and cell volumes were calculated using formulas of geometrical solids that approximated
 cell shapes.   Conversion factors reported earlier were used to convert these volumes to
 carbon.   The spatial distributions of chlorophyll maxima were patchy and the maximum
 depths to which they follow pycnocllnes were  variable.   This variability apparently
 relates  to light adaptation by phytoplankton  cells  which may be a function of the
 taxonomic composition of the phytoplankton crop.
 INDEX TERMS:   Chlorophyll, Spatial distribution,  Density,  Depth,  Marine animals,  Marine
       algae,  Cyanophyta.  Pyrrophyta,  Larvae,  Sampling,  Invertebrates,  Atlantic  Ocean,
       Gulf of Mexico,  Phytoplankton,  Cytologlcal studies,  Systematics,  Biomass,  Fluoro-
       metry,  Microscopy,  Zooplankton,  Nutrients,  Photosynthesis,  Standing crop,
AMIC-3892 (Continued)
                                                                           2/2
INDEX TERMS:  Perlphyton, Water quality,  Systematics,  Diatoms,  Aquatic productivity,
      Lake Superior, Sessile algae,  Biological communities,  Water properties,
      Standing crop, Primary productivity,  Chrysophyta,  Chlorophyta,  Cyanophyta,
      Bionass,  Plant pigments,  Carbon,  Chlorophyll,  Growth rates,  Phytoplankton,
      Sampling, Eutrophication, Photosynthesis,  Aquatic  algae,  On-slte Investigations,
      Ecological distribution,  Assimilation,  Stony Point Bay.
AMIC-3951
 "ON PRODUCTIVITY ESTIMATIONS OF RIVER WATER SAMPLES BY MEANS OF ALGAE TEST  PROCEDURES",
Braune, W.,  Internationale Revue der Cesamten Hydroblologle, Vol. 56, No. 5,  1971,
pp  795-810.  —————£	a—

             The possible influence  of bacteria on the results of long-term algae test
procedures (cultivating of algae In  isolated unsterile water samples) was investigated
and differences In the growth rates  between nonaxenlc and axenic Scenedesmus  cultures
were observed, showing differences dependent on experimental conditions.  The necessity
of  a long experimental time in such  test methods proved to be disadvantageous because
there was always the possibility that In the unsterile water sample secondary altera-
tions (caused by bacteria) may occur, the action of which is hard to estimate under
test conditions.  To diminish these  disadvantages a physiological test procedure
was tried out.  Compared to methods  used till now the new method allowed short-term
estimations  (in a few hours) of the  productivity of algae (unlalgal and mixed
material) in water samples by continuously recording the 02-metabolism (electrochemical
02-determination by means of membrane covered Pt-electrodes).  In water samples
taken from a point below the town of Jena in the river Saale there were regularly
higher rates of net-photosynthesis than in samples taken from above the town  (test
organism: Scenedesmus obllquus).  The results agreed with findings obtained by other In
vltro-methoda and are In contradiction to testing results in situ.  (In German)      —

IMEX TERMS:  Primary productivity, Bacteria, Scenedesmus, Growth rates. Cultures,
      Metabolism, Electrodes, Electrochemistry,  Photosynthesis, Rivers,  Plant physiology,
      Testing procedures, Aquatic algae, Chlorophyta, Laboratory tests,  Oxygen, Water
      pollution effects, Saale River, Germany,  Scenedesmus obliquus.
                                                                                    35

-------
                                                                               2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-3959                                                                 '	'	
  "COHERENT OPTICAL SPATIAL FILTERING  OF DIATOMS  IN WATER POLLUTIOH MDNITORING",
  Calms,  J.,  Jr.,  Dlckson,  K.  L.,  Lanza, G. R.,  Almeida, S. P., DelBalzo, D.,
  Archlv fur Mikrobloloele.  Vol.  83, No. 1, March 1972, pp lUl-iU6.
                                                                                         i
               Complex spatial  filters were developed for the diatoms Havlcula sp.        !
  and Cyclotella sp.  to be used with fourler transform coherent optical techniques.       i
  Such an optical spatial filter  system premises  rapid instrumental recognition of        ;
  diatoms  based on  pattern recognition.  Problems in  filter development and necessary     '
  modifications of  the Interferometer  are presented.   With this system It was possible    I
  to separate  two centric diatoms which differ only In center detail.  Such results       i
  suggest general applications  In pollutant monitoring and water quality control.         i

  INDEX TERMS:   Diatoms,  Monitoring, Optical properties. Water pollution, Aquatic plants, I
        Water  quality control,  Research and development. Pollutant Identification,        I
        Instrumentation,  Blolndicators, Fourier analysis, Interfercmetry, Chrysophyta,    '
        Water  pollution effects,  Plant morphology, Data collections, Havlcula,
        Cyclotella, Spatial  filters.
AMIC-3961                                           	~	—	~
"THE ECOLOGY OF MDRECAKBE BAY  II.  ItfTERTIDAL INVERTEBRATES AMD FACTORS AFFECTING THEIR
DISTRIBUTION", Anderson, S. S., Journal of Applied Ecology. Vol. 9, No. 1, April 1972,
pp 161-178.

             A series at surveys was carried out on the numbers and distribution
of Intertldal Invertebrates In Morecambe Bay, England.  The purpose was to see
if environmental factors could be correlated with the abundance of species, in order to
forecast any population changes of Invertebrate species likely to result from barrage
construction.  A 1-mn mesh sieve was used In the laboratory and the animals retained
were preserved In formalin, Identified and counted.  Physical and chemical characteris-
tics of the sands that were considered to affect invertebrate distribution were also
studied.  Standard methods were used in analyzing particle size to arrive at a medium
particle diameter.  Ignition losses were measured in a muffle furnace at 500 C for 2 hr
and expressed as a percentage of dry weight, which gave a rough estimate of organic
carbon.  An automated colorlmetrlc system based on the indophenol blue reaction was
used to estimate organic nitrogen.  Calcium was determined by atomic absorption
spectrophotometry and phosphorus by colorimetry based on the phospho -molybdenum blue
reaction.  The high level flats above plus 6 ft 0.0.  consisted of fine-grained sediments
which were relatively rich in organic carbon, organic nitrogen and phosphorus.  A
relationship between grade of deposits and quantities of carbon, nitrogen and phosphorus
was demonstrated.  The sandflats below plus 6 ft O.D. were characterized by coarser
deposits and correspondingly lower values of carbon,  nitrogen and phosphorus.  High
calcium values were associated with the coarest sediments and with areas of abundant
mollusc spat.  One dominant species and three groups of species could be recognized on
the basis of distribution and species density.
 "THE ECOLOGY OF MORECAMBE BAY.  IV. INVERTEBRATE DRIFT IBTO AND FROM THE RIVER LEVEH",
 Elliott, J. M., Corlett, J., Journal of Applied Ecology. Vol. 9, No.  1,  April 1972,
 pp 195-205.                  ~"	

              In order to assess the Importance of drifting Invertebrates as potential
 colonizers of certain freshwater areas,  the qualitative and quantitative composition
 of invertebrate drift into (outflow of Lake Wlndermere) and from (Low Wood Bridge)
 the River Leven which flows into Morecambe Bay were studied.   Drift samples were
 taken at two stations by a procedure that Insured samples from different points
 across the river at different times of the day.   The physical conditions were recorded
 for the two stations.   Copepoda and Cladocera were predominant in the drift samples
 at the lake outflow.   Although very large numbers were  drifting out of the lake,  no
 planktonlc species  were found In the drift samples at Low Wood Bridge.   A plankton
 net used at Low Wood Bridge caught  nauplli and viable eggs of copepods.   Therefore,
 some planktonlc species do survive  the Journey down the River Leven and  would rapidly
 colonise a freshwater  reservoir at  the mouth of  the Leven estuary.  Large numbers of
 lotic  invertebrates were taken in the drift  samples at  Low Wood Bridge,  especially at
 night.   These drifting Invertebrates  would rapidly colonize the Leven estuary if  ever
 it became freshwater.  As many species In the drift have also been found In still
water, there would  also be a rapid  colonization  of a freshwater reservoir at the  mouth
of the estuary.

DttJEX TERMS:  Invertebrates, Drifting (aquatic).  Sampling,  Lotic environment, Zooplank-
      ton, Systenatlcs, Larvae, Estuarlne environment,  Crustaceans, River Leven,
      Morecambe Bay, Lake Wlndermere,  Colonization,  RepopuLation, Arthropods,
      Macrolnvertebrates.

                                                                                     36
AMIC-3961 (Continued)
2/2
INDEX TERMS:  Invertebrates, Intertldal areas, Distribution patterns, Estuarlne
      environment, Soil analysis, Systenatics, Ecology, Sands, Physiochemlcal
      properties, Sampling, Cores, Sieve analysis, Sediments, Annelids, Mollusks,
      Marine animals. Spatial distribution, Nenatodes, Aquatic soils, Morecambe Buy,
      Arthropods, Nemerteans, Macrolnvertebrates, Barrage, Sample preservation.

-------
 AMIC-3962      "   ~  " ~
 "BESTHIC FAUNAL RECOVERY IN A SWEDISH FJORD FOLLOWING THE CLOSURE OF A SULPHITE PULP
 MILL", Rosenberg, P., CUCOS, Vol. 23, No. 1, 1972, pp 92-108.

              The recolonlzation of benthic fauna was studied In SaltkallefJord on the
 west coast of Sweden following the discontinuation of sulfite pulp manufacture at a
 pulp all! that discharges waste water Into the fjord.  Hydrographic measurements
 Included temperature, salinity, DO, BOD, and pH.  A core sampler was used to collect
 sediment samples, which were analyzed In 2-cm sections for organic matter and Ignition
 loss.  Benthic fauna were sampled quantitatively at 53 stations using a 0.1-sq m
 Smith Mclntyre bottom sampler.  Sieve residues restrained by a millimeter mesh was
 preserved In 70 percent alcohol for further laboratory analysis.  The wet weight was
 determined after blotting on filter paper and the quantity of dry organic matter was
 estimated using a conversion factor obtained from earlier studies.  The analyses
 Indicated that water quality Improved as a result of reduced waste water discharges.
 After 1968, the benthic macrofauna had colonized fjord areas that in the early I960'a
 were azoic or occupied by only a poor fauna.  During May-October 1969 the number of
 species In these areas Increased monthly.

 INDEX TERMS:   Benthic fauna. Fjords, Pulp wastes, Sulfit* liquors, Physiochemical
       properties, Water quality,  Waste water (pollution).  Water pollution sources,
       Sediments, Cores,  Sampling, Distribution patterns,  Biological communities,
       Systeoatlcs, Water pollution effects,  Annelids, Sweden, Sample preservation.
       Gastropods, (fecrolnvertebrates, Sulfites.
                                                                              2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3968~
 "PRODUCTIVITY OF THE BENTHIC MICROFLORA OF SHOAL ESTUARINE ENVIRONMENTS IM SOUTHERN
 NEW ENGLAND", Marshall,  N., Oviatt,  C.  A., SJcauea, D. M., Internationale Revue der
 Gesamten Hydroblologle,  Vol. 56, No. 6, 1971, pp 91*7-956. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

              Carbon-It productivity  by  benthic microflora from shoal estuarlne environ-
 ments in southern New England was measured by a C-lU uptake method.   Representative and
 intact sediment  samples  were collected  and the C-l1* counted by liquid scintillation
 after being passed through a pulverized filter and suspended  In Cab-O-Sll,   Productivity
 was measured  by  calculating the  difference in C-lb uptake measured between light
 and dark flasks.   Sediment variability  caused extremely high  deviations In productivity
 values,  probably as a result of  irregular microflora distribution.   Results obtained
 with  the Cab-0-Sil suspension processing technique when compared with the wet oxidation
 method proved to be achieved more easily,  directly,  and consistently; however,  similar
 results  were  obtained from both  methods.   The average yearly  C-lU productivity of all
 sampled  estuarlne shoals equalled 20.1  mg/sq m/hr with high peaks of productivity occur-
 ring  in  the warmer months.   The  limited tests for light effects  seemed to Indicate that
 the strongest mid-summer light peaks are in excess of the optimum and that an upward
migration of  diatoms at  low tide .may result in Increased productivity.

INDEX TERMS:  Estuarlne  environment, Primary productivity,  Shoals, Benthic  flora,
      Sea water.  Sediments,  Light intensity,  Diatoms,  Carbon  radlolsotopes,  New
      England, Aquatic life,  Aquatic microorganisms,  Marine algae, Salinity,  Migration,
      Tides,  Low water mark,  Chrysophyta,  Liquid scintillation,  Sample preparation,
      Zostrea, Ulva.
                                                                                      37
AMIC-3971*
"EFFECTS OF THE OIL INDUSTRY ON SHORE LIFE IN ESTUARIES", Nelson-Smith, A., Proceedings
of the Royal Society of London, Series B, Vol. l60, No. 106l, March 21, 1972,
pp t#fl-*9t>.
             The effects of oil pollution on shore life in estuaries depend partly
on the nature of the oil and partly on the means by which it reaches the shore.
Crude petroleum and products refined from It may be spilt at any point from well up
river to far out at sea.  Crude oils are moderately toxic; some products may be very
harmful, but heavy fuel oils are almost inert.  Toxic fractions are removed by
weathering, but oils split around tanker-terminals in estuaries reach the shore very
soon after release.  In Mllford Haven, spillages average some 50 tons per year,
about 0.0001 percent of the volume handled.  Oil which has not been emulsified rarely
penetrates mud or sand but is trapped on salt-marsh vegetation; annuals and shrubby
perennials are badly affected, although other perennials recover veil.  On rocky
shores, grazing molluscs may be killed, especially if aromatic-based emulslflers
are  used to remove the oil.  This permits the widespread growth of seaweeds, with
repercussions on other shore*life.  Repeated spills may gradually eliminate some
gastropoda.  Chronic pollution by oil In low concentrations can gravely damage salt-
marsh and  produces detectable effects on rocky shores.  Speed is essential in dealing
with a spillage; the most effective treatment is dispersal with enulsiflers and this
is best done before the slick becomes stranded.  Oiled shores should be left alone
wherever possible; mechanical removal Is preferable to spraying.

INDEX TERMS:  Oil Industry, Estuaries, Aquatic life, Oil pollution, Water pollution,
      Oil  wastes, Oil spills. Oily water, Water pollution effects, Toxiclty, Salt
      marshes, Mollusks, Petroleum products.
AMIC-39T7
"THE ECOLOGY OF SOME BRITISH RIVERS IN RELATION TO WARM WATER DISCHARGES FROM POWER
STATIONS", Langford, T. E., Aston, R. J., Proceedings of the Royal Society of London,
Series B, Vol. 180, No. 106l, March 21, 1972, PP
             The effects of powerplant warm water discharges on the local aquatic life
In the English Rivers Severn and Trent were used as an indicator of the effects of
thermal pollution on the environment.  Various sampling stations were placed downstream
from the powerplant outflow to measure temperature fluctuations and to observe local
aquatic life.  In the Severn River temperatures up to 28 degrees C below the outfalls
had no effect on the invertebrate fauna.  There were slight alterations la the hatching
of insect nymphs which may have been attributable to temperature, though natural
variations from year to year were much more obvious.  Emergence of adult Ephemeroptera
and Trlchoptera was not affected by temperatures of 26 to 28 degrees C.  The River
Trent is used for cooling by some lU power stations.  There were no obvious changes in
the diversity of the invertebrate fauna which could be related to temperature, though
pollution from other sources cause very marked changes.  However, at Drakelow power
plant, the most polluted reached, changes were observed in the oligochaete community,
and experiments showed that Ltmnodrllua hoffmelsterl had a wider temperature
distribution range for reproduction than Tublfex tublfex.  Fish populations were
shown to withstand quite sudden and wide temperature fluctuations.

INDEX TEFMS:  Ecology, Water pollution effects. Thermal pollution. Rivers, Powerplants,
      Discharge (water), Biological communities, Environmental effects, Water tempera-
      ture, Macrolnvertebrates, Species diversity, River Severn, River Trent.

-------
                                                                              2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3979
  'THE EFFECTS OF PESTICIDES OH LIFE IH FRESH WATERS", Holden, A. V., Proceedings of the
 Rpyal Society of London. Series B, Vol. ISO, Ho. 1061, terch 21, 1972, pp 3B3l3^U.

              About sixty pesticides are estimated to be used in Britain In circum-
 stances where seme contamination of fresh waters could occur.  Apart from major fish
 kills, most of the evidence of contamination must be obtained from chemical analyses
 of water or fish, although these are mainly restricted to a few organochlorlne and
 organophosphorus compounds.  The potential hazards to fish and Invertebrates have been
 Identified in laboratory experiments and toxicity tests, but routine population surveys
 of susceptible species  in rivers and lakes are rarely made.  The nature of possible
 environmental effects of various types of pesticides is described, and the Infoimtlon
 on toxic levels of some chemicals, obtained from laboratory tests, Is compared with
 the limited data available on levels existing In the environment.  The need for more
 extensive screening of  pesticide chemicals, especially the nore persistent types, is
 discussed.  Both adult  fish and fry of several species should be used in tests, as well
 as representative Invertebrates, which are known to be more susceptible to some pesti-
 cides than are fish.  Long-period tests are also required, as for some pesticides the
 lethal concentrations are much lower In extended tests than in the usual short-period
 tests.  Where possible, the test species, whether fish or Invertebrates, should be
 analyzed for the chemical under test.  Analytical techniques should be developed, for
 levels existing in the  environment, of a wider range of compounds than Is currently
 investigated.

 INDEX TERMS:  Pesticides, Water pollution effects. Aquatic life, Pesticide toxicity.
       Invertebrates, Mortality, Fry, Organophosphorus pesticides. Freshwater fish,
       Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Bioassay, Resistance. Pesticide kinetics,
       Aquatic populations, Pesticide residues. Metabolites, 2.U-D amlne.	
                                                                                           AMIC-U030
                                                                                           "APPARATUS FOR CONTINUOUS MEASUREMENT OF ACTIVE UPTAKE OF RADIOACTIVE SUBSTAHCES",
                                                                                           Loos, E., Analytical Biochemistry,  Vol.  1*7,  No. 1, May 1972,  pp 90-101.

                                                                                                        An apparatus consisting of a modified scintillation chamber,  sample  cell,
                                                                                           and an end-on photomultlpller has been used to study the uptake kinetics of radioactive
                                                                                           compounds (C-llv-labelled 3-O-Methyl-D-glucose) by Chlorella vulgaris and conldia  of
                                                                                           Heurospora erassa.   The apparatus is constructed  so  that the  cells are held In a  thin
                                                                                           layerclose to -the scintillation crystal with the nutrient medium diffusing from  above
                                                                                           through a membrane filter.  The medium is constantly stirred  to minimize concentration
                                                                                           gradients developed during uptake.   Uptake rates  are seen as  an Increase of measured
                                                                                           radioactivity In the cells.  For Chlorella a K sub m of 0.6 mM was found for the  uptake,
                                                                                           Parallel experiments with the membrane filter technique show  good agreement and can
                                                                                           be used to calibrate the apparatus.  A diagram of the apparatus accompanies the
                                                                                           description.

                                                                                           INDEX TEPKS:  Laboratory equipment, Radlolsotopes, Measurement, Kinetics,  Absorption,
                                                                                                 Instrumentation,  Radioactivity techniques,  Carbon radioisotopes, Productivity,
                                                                                                 Metabolism, Organic compounds, Chlorella, Tracers, Aquatic algae, Fungi,  C-lU,
                                                                                                 Chlorella. vulgaris, Neurospora erassa, Scintillation counting, Glucose, Membrane
                                                                                                 filters, Monosaccharldes, Membrane filtration.
                                               of the Royal Society of London. Series B,
 AMIC-3990
 "EUTROPHICATIOH", Lund, J. W. G.,
 Vol.  180, Ho. 1061, March 21, 1972, pp

              Man-made eutrophlcatlon rather than enrichment by plant nutrients is
 being surveyed.  The chief sources of enrichment are sewage, fertlllzere and
 agricultural wastes.  Large populations of plants and animals, alive or dead,
 cause difficulties in the water industry and may interfere with recreation, especially
 fishing.   Most of the phosphorus and nitrogen cnn be removed from sewage effuent If
 the cost  is Justified.  A large reduction of agricultural run-off is Impractical but
 some  reduction is possible.   The removal of poly-phosphates frcm detergents is a pallia.
 tive  but  a suitable replacement which does not pose a threat to the environment is not
yet on the market.  Though the main factors causing eutrophlcatlon are well known,
there la  little detailed understanding of their Interaction with other environmental
factors.   Consequently it Is not yet possible to forecast the exact changes to be
expected  in aquatic ecosystems,  a fact which Is Illustrated by certain changes In two
       enriched lakes over the last 27 years.
IMDEX TERMS:  Eutrophlcation, Water pollution effects. Aquatic environment, Water
      pollution  sources. Aquatic life. Freshwater,  Agricultural  chemicals, Ecology,
      Nutrients, Sewage effluents.  Farm wastes,  Agricultural  runoff. Ecosystems,
      Industrial wastes, Enrichment.
"ISOLATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT-SENSITIVE MUTANTS OF THE BLUE.
GREEN ALGA AJ1ACYSTIS HIDULAHS", Asato, Y., Journal of Bacteriology, Vol.  110, No. 3,
June 1972, pp 1058-loSr

             Three UV-sensitive mutants of the blue-green alga. Ana cyst la nidi'ia"* were
Isolated and characterized as to their ability to repair UV damage (photoreactivatlon).
UV light-sensitive mutants, prepared by subjecting cells to UV radiation and replating
the survivors, were isolated for study by treating exponential cultures with
K-methyl-N'-nltro-H-nltrosoguanldlne followed by centrifugatlon.  The photoreactive
ability of various A. nldulans mutants was determined under a variety of conditions
which included exposing cells to chloramphenlcol, caffeine, black and white fluorescent
lights, and red lights.  Strain uvs-1 was most sensitive to UV in the absence of
photoreactlvatlon.  Pretreatment with caffeine suppressed the dark-survival curve
of strain uvs-1, indicating the presence of excision enzymes involved in dark repair.
Under 'black' and 'white' illumination, strain uvs-1 displayed photoreactivation
properties nearly comparable to wild-type culture.  Mutants uvs-35 and uvs-88 appeared
to have partial photorecovery capacities.  Upon pretreatment with chloramphenlcol,
photoreactlvatlon properties of strains uvs-1 and uvs-88 were not evident although
the partial photoreactlvation characteristics of strain uvs-35 remained the same.
Data indicate that strains uvs-1, uvs-35, and uvs-88 are probably genetically distinct
UV-sensitive mutants.

IBDEX TERMS:  Isolation, Ultraviolet radiation, Separation techniques, Cyanophyta,
      Cultures, Antibiotics (pesticides), Photoactivation, Aquatic algae, Environmental
      effects, Characterization, Anacystls nldulans, Mutants, Sensitivity, Survival,
      Chloramphenlcol, Recovery.

-------
                                                                             2.
AMIC-5659'
"EFFICACY, TOXICm, AND RESIDUES OF NIFURPIRINOL  IB SALMONIDS", Amend, D. F.,
U. S. Department of the Interior, Bureau of Sport  Fisheries and Wildlife, Washington,
D.C., Technical Paper No. 62, April 1972, pp  3-13.

             Nlfurpirlnol (NFP) vras tested for control of furunculosis, myxobacterloses,
and vlbrlosis, and Tor effects on rainbow trout, coho, and Chinook salmon under various
conditions.  The elimination of HFP from various tissues of coho salmon at U5 C and 70
C  was measured.  Furunculosis In coho salmon  was partially controlled with 2 dally 1-
hour baths at 8 or 10 ppm NFP; It was not controlled by feeding the drug because the
fish refused to eat the medicated food.  Excellent control of myxobacterloses
(columnaris, cold-water disease, myxobacterlal gill disease, followed 1 or 2 dally
1-hour  treatments at 1 ppm NFP.  Preliminary  tests indicated that loss of Chinook
salmon  due to vlbrosls could be reduced with  NFP fed at 50 to 75 mg/kg per day for lU
days.   The reason Chinook saljnon ate the medicated food and coho salmon did not Is not
known.  The toxlclty of NFP to cohos varied directly with dosage level, treatment
frequency, and water temperature.  Single 1-hour exposures were not toxic at levels up
to 10 ppm, but repeated exposures to 6 ppm or higher at 2U-hour intervals resulted In
Increased mortality.  Toxlclty was greater at higher water temperatures.  Results were
similar with chlnook salmon and rainbow trout.  NFP was eliminated from «Qi tissues of
cohos within 9 days following 3 daily 1-hour  exposures at 2 ppm. at 1x>tli Uj and 70 C.
The highest levels occurred in the liver and  kidney, and it expeclally accumulated in
these tissues at U5 C.  Muscle, serum, and skin drug levels were highest Immediately
following treatment, but were undetectable after Ufl hours.  It was concluded that HFP
administered as a 1-hour bath to cohos at 1 ppm on 1 to 3 consecutive days will effec-
tively control Byxobacterlal diseases.  It is of low toxiclty and poses no residue
problems 9 days after the last treatment.
               AMIC-U067
               "ISTERACnOBS OF LIGHT ADD INORGANIC NITROGEN IN CONTROLLING NITROGEN UPTAKE IN THE
               SEA", Maclsaac, J. J., Dugdale, R. C., Deep-Sea Research, Vol. 19f No. 3, March 1972,
               pp 209-232.

                            The uptake of ammonium and nitrate in natural populations of marine
               phytoplankton Is light dependent and often can be described adequately by the
               MichaellB-Menten equation.  The half-saturation constant for light intensity in nitrate
               and  ammonium uptake  Is found  to be from 1 to lU percent of surface light Intensity,  an
               intensity  range occurring near the bottom of the euphotic zone.  Since the uptake  of
               these compounds as a function of substrate concentration is also described by  the  same
               equation,  many vertical profiles of nitrate and ammonium uptake obtained with  the  N-15
               technique  can be Interpreted  from the  Interaction of light and nutrient concentration
               at different depths. In  ollgotrophic  waters, nutrient uptake  Is severely limited  by
               nutrient concentrations;  but  in eutrophlc areas, light Intensity very often is the
               limiting factor.  In the  former, maximal uptake nay  occur deep in the euphotic zone,
               while in the latter, the  «•»•»
-------
                                                                               2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMICJH.U7
  "CHLORINATION AT POWER PLANTS:   IMPACT OH FHYTOPLANKTOH  PPODUCTIVITY", Brook, A. J.,
  Baker, A. L., Science, Vol.  176,  June 30,  1972, PP
               Photosynthesis and respiration rates were measured to determine the
  effects on river phytoplankton productivity of passage through  a  power plant.  Three
  hundred-mi samples were taken in the St. Crolx River near the Allen S. King power
  plant In Minneapolis.   The photosynthesis  and  respiration rates were determined by
  the light-dark bottle  Incubation technique and changes in the amounts of dissolved
  oxygen were measured by Winkler titratlon.  The studies  Indicated that chlorlnatlon
  depresses photosynthesis and respiration to a  much  greater extent than does heating
  of the water.

  INDEX TERK5:  Phytoplankton,  Chlorlnatlon,  Water pollution effects, Prtmsry
        productivity,  Powerplanta,  Rivers, Photosynthesis,  Respiration, Thermal
        pollution,  Water temperature,  Sewage treatment. Chlorine, Incubation,
        Dissolved oxygen,  Volumetric analysis, Minnesota, Environmental effects,
        Light and dark bottle technique, St.  Crolx River.
AKJC-USU6
"THE ECOLOGY OF DIATOM3 HI HARDWATER HABITATS", Dodd, J. D., Iowa State University,
Department of Botany and Plant Pathology, Ames, Iowa, Water Pollution Control Research
Series 18050 DIE 12/71, December 1971, 62 pp.

             A record has been made of 328 ccmon diatom taxa occurring In the surface
waters of Iowa.  As of December 1971, more than 900 diatom taxa had been recorded
from Iowa, "11 of which were distributed among 50 genera.  The collection sites
Included Lakes; cores of lake sediments; rivers, creeks, and ditches; ponds, marshes,
and bog8| soils; and special habitats.  The distribution among these is given for
each of the more common diatoms.  A detailed pollen analysis of a core of postglacial
sediments from Lake West Okobojl, Iowa was undertaken as an aid in determining
chronology of the region.  Diatoms from the same core vere analyzed in detail for
comparison purposes.  Sediment age at the apparent postglacial Interface is 12,700
BP plus or BlTniH 200 years.

INDEX TEBMSl  Diatoms, Systematics, Sampling, Sediments, Aquatic habitats. Cores,
      Lakes, Aquatic algae, Chrysophyta, Aquatic plants, Rivers, Soils, Ponds,
      ferahea. Bogs, Streams, Ditches, Pollutant identification, Water pollution
      sources. Ecological distribution, Surface waters, Phytoplankton, Lake sediments,
      Iowa, Pollen, Blolndlcators, Distribution patterns. Spatial distribution,
      Species diversity
 AMICJtlbd
 "HISTOLOGICAL CHANGES IN LOBSTERS (HOMARUS AMSRICANUS) EXPOSED TO YELLOW PHOSPHORUS",
 Alken, D. E., Byard, E. H., Science, Vol. 176. Ho. WHS, June 30, 1972, pp 1^-11*35.

              An analysis of tissue samples from lobsters killed by phosphorus reveals
 pronounced hlstologlcal changes in the hepatopancreas.  Variable destruction of
 parts of the antennal gland was also evident.   Tissues were taken from 18 phosphorus
 contaminated lobsters and from two control lobsters that were asphyxiated In
 oxygen-free seawater.   The tissues were fixed  in Bouin's fluid and stored in TO
 percent ethyl alcohol.   The tissue was stained with Delafleld's hematoxylln and
 one percent aqueous  eosin.   Tissue from a second control group of 18 lobsters was
 stained and mounted  without storage.   Antennal gland degeneration was evident to
 some degree in all but one  of the  exposed lobsters and in none of the controls.
The phosphorus caused degeneration in all four cell types In the hepatopancreas.
A characteristic way of dying was  also observed In the lobsters exposed to lethal
doses of yellow phosphorus.

IHDEX TERMS:  Phosphorus, Toxicity, Lobsters,  Industrial wastes,  Water pollution
      effects, Flahklll, Canada, Cytologlcal studies,  Sea water.  Microscopy,  Yellow
      phosphorus, Hooarus amerlcanus. Histology, Hepatopancreas,  Antennal  gland.
      Tissue, Arthropods, Macroinvertebrates, Biological samples, Sample preparation,
      Sample preservation.
AKEC-5238
"A LIST OF NEW GENERA AHD TYPE SPECIES OF FLAGELLATES AND ALGAE PUBLISHED IN 1969.
part Tl-, Skvortzov, B. V., Hydroblologla, Vol. 39, Ho. 3, >ferch 1972, pp 303.306.

             A list is given of lU new genera of flagellates along with the type
species.  The type species are Illustrated by original figures and the size of
cells and habitat of each genus are Included.

INDEX TEEMS:  Blolndlcators, Euglenophyta, Aquatic algae,  Protozoa, Llulana
      polymorpba, Wellslella subsphaerlca, NUzanonas saprophytlcum, Acusmonas
      pluvialls, Calawaymonas subtropica, Lackeymonaa brasillana, Telxelranonas
      vacuolarla, Lowymonas metabollca,  Milanezlamonas glabra, Flagellamonas
      Btagnalls, Fidalgomonms striata, Hattosoonas montana,  Beulahmonas sphaerica,
      Hoehnemonas nasuta. Flagellates.

-------
                                                                              2.   BIOLOGICAL
 AMIC-5239
 "ECOLOGICAL STUDIES OF EUGLEMLUEAE IH CERTAIN POLLUTED AHD UNPOLLUTED ENVIRONMENTS",
 Munawar, M., Hydroblologla. Vol. 39, Ho. 3, torch 1972, pp 307-320.

              Various physlcochemical properties of three freshwater ponds In Tnriln
 uere studied In relation to the distribution and periodicity of Euglenlneae.   Two
 ponds, Sewage and Garden, were considerably polluted and the third,  Typha,  was com-
 paratively pure.  The highest percentage of Euglenlneae were found In Sewage Pond,
 which contained 13 different species.  Garden Pond harbored Just 2 species, but in
 large numbers while the Traehelomonaa hlaplda and Euglena sp. found In Typha Pond were
 totally absent In the other two.Sewage Pond bad high average concentrations of free
 carbon dioxide, which seened to favor euglenold growth.  Nitrate fluctuations In all
 three ponds coincided with fluctuations In euglenold growth suggesting that Inorganic
 sources of nitrogen night be Important in the ecology of these algae.  Ifce flagellates
 were abundant during periods of low total sulphides and concentrations greater than
 2.0 ppn adversely affected their development.  A temperature range of 27-39 C favored
 their growth and they usually developed after rains or during Intermittent showers.
 In Sewage Pond, there was a direct relationship between euglenold population and
 higher concentrations of oxldizable organic matter.  This suggests the use of certain
 euglenold species as blolndlcators.

 INDEX TERMS:  EugLenophyta, Blolndlcators,  Phytoplankton, Pollutant Identification,
       Protozoa, Ponds,  Limnology,  Ecology,  Chemical analysis. Aquatic algae,  Nutrients,
       Water quality, Water analysis. Frequency,  Fluctuations, Biological coonunltles,
       Physlcochemlcal properties,  Distribution patterns, India.
AMIC-52U2
 "AN ECOLOGICAL STUDY OF THTEE FRESH WATEB PONDS OF HYDERABAD-IHDIA.  II. THE
ENVIRONMENT", Rao, V. S., Hydroblologla. Vol. 39, No. 3. March 1972, pp 351-372.

             Three freshwater ponds in India were investigated to determine the
 environmental complexes.  The chemical analysis techniques used were given in an
 earlier paper.  Results of the study showed that pH, calcium, and bicarbonate contents
were  influenced by dissolved carbon dioxide.  Concentrations of calcium and bicarbonate
ware  Invariably complementary and occasionally sodium and iron behaved towards
bicarbonate like calcium.  The density of the phytoplankton population and the calcium/
nagneslum ratio determined the accumulation of soluble organic matter.  Nitrate con-
 centration Increased either after daily rains or towards the end of the monsoon season
and was possibly dependent on the nature of the catchment area or on the Intensity of
bacterial activity.  Salinity and total solids contents varied together whereas sodium
and chlorides varied directly.  When the pH was about 7.8, the waters sustained more
total solids.  The percentage of sodium and of chloride plus nitrate varied directly
with  salinity and was an apparent indicator of animal pollutants.

INDEX TERMS:  Freshwater, Ponds, Ecology, Limnology, Water quality, Water analysis,
       Chemical analysis, Butrlents, Water pollution effects, Phytoplankton, Bacteria,
       Pollutant identification, India.
AMIC-52»»O
 "FHYTOPLANKTON SUCCESSION IN A EUTROPHIC LAKE WITH  SPECIAL REFERENCE TO BUUE-CREEN
ALBAL BLOOMS", Lin, C. K., Hydroblologla, Vol.  39,  Ho.  3,  March 1972, pp 321-331*.

             The  seasonal succession of phytoplankton conminltles were studied In  a
snail, eutrophic, Canadian prairie  lake with regard to  the effect of blue-green
algal blooms on the development of  non-cyanophycean algae.  Weekly samples were
collected between May and September over a 2-year period.   A Kemmerer water
sampler was used  to take  samples at one-meter vertical  Intervals; these samples
were  stored In polyethylene bottles and phytoplankton samples vere concentrated by
contrlfugation and preserved by adding 5 percent formalin.  Surface water was
collected and filtered during periods of heavy blooms.  A Sedgewick-Bafter cell and
microscope with an ocular grid were used for cell and colony counts.  A portable kit
was used for chemical analysis of water.   During the  summer, heavy cyanophyta blooms
were  supported by high nutrient concentrations.  The relatively high water temperature
favored these blooms and the high concentration of organic matter.  The cyanophyta
blooms apparently Inhibited non-blue-green algae because between blooms there were
Intermittent periods of great species diversity.

INDEX TERMS:  Eutrophicatlon, Phytoplankton,  Cyanophyta, Lakes, Succession, Frequency,
      Biological communities, Sampling, Microscopy,  Chemical analysis, Seasonal,
      Water quality,  Fluctuations, Aquatic algae, Water analysis,  Periodicity, Sample
      preservation,  Sample preparation, Species diversity.
AMC-52U3
 "THE IHTERACTICH OF LIGHT ISTENSITY AND DCT CONCENTRATION UPON THE MARINE DIATOM,
NITZSCHIA DELICATISSIHA CLEVE". MacFarlane, R. B., Glooschenko, W. A., Harrlss, R. C.,
Bydrobiologla, Vol. 39, Ho. 3, March 1972, pp 373-382.

             A study was conducted to determine the effects of the Interactions between
DDT concentration and light Intensity on marine phytoplankton with respect to carbon-lU
uptake, chlorophyll a content, and photosynthesis.  Cultures of Nitzschia delicatlsslma
were grown to concentrations of 75,000 cells per ml and DDT was then Introduced In
concentrations of 9.1*, 23.5, W*, 88, 220, 500, and 1,000 ppb.  Flfty-ml allquots
were placed In a growth chamber at the desired light Intensity and Incubated for 2b
hours and carbon-lU or chlorophyll a analysis was done.  A consistent reduction In
both C-lb- fixation and chlorophyll a was observed with increasing DDT concentrations.
Maximum reductions occurred at the nighest light Intensities.  However, since the
lowest DDT concentrations used were at least 100 times those reported In an estuarine
study, It was concluded that Inhibition of primary production is probably not occurring
in nature except for very limited areas, and then only in surface waters.

INDEX TERMS;  DDT, light Intensity, Phytoplankton, Primary productivity, Chlorinated
      hydrocarbon pesticides, Photosynthesis, Water pollution effects. Chlorophyll,
      Carbon, Cultures, Radioactivity techniques, Absorption, Chrysophyta,  Marine
      algae, Carbon radloisotopes, Nitzschla dellcatlsslm, Chlorophyll a,  C-lU,
      p p1 DDT.
                                                                                     Ul

-------
                                                                                    fcTrnrir.1P.A1 METHOIS
                                                   Schnitzler,  H.,  Hydroblologia.  Vol.  39,
AMIC-52UU
"reRTILIZER EXPERIMENT IN THE RIVERIS BARRAGE"
Ho. 3, March 1972, pp 383-tO1*.

             From March 1967 to October 1968 enrichment experiments with phosphate and
nitrate were carried out In the Rlverls reservoir new Trier (Fed. Rep. Germany).
Plastic bags were filled with 70 liters of the reservoir water and placed into the lake
after nitrate and phosphate was added.  When only nitrate was added no propagation
of  the phytoplankton compared to the original water could be established.  On the
other hand, the phvtoplankton propagated  In those bags to which phosphate was added; In
most cases an Increase according to the amount of phosphate could be noticed.  In only
a few cases could an Increase of plankton be seen when nitrate and phosphate vere
added.  Tfcese results show that in the Riveris reservoir phosphate is a m1n1mim factor
for the phytoplankton.  (In German)

INEEX TERMS:  Phytoplankton, Hutrients, Water pollution effects, Plankton, Chlorella,
      Scenedesttus, Blouses, Chlamydomonas, Phosphates, Nitrates, Reservoirs, Nutrient
      requirements, Deficient elements, Systemtlcs, Chlorophyta.
AMIC-52U5
"A TEST OF THE COSMOPOLITAN DISTRIBUTION OF FRESH-WATER PROTOZOANS", Cairns, J., Jr.,
Ruthven, J. A., Hydrobiologla, Vol. 39f No. 3, March 1972, PP UO5-U27.

             The cosmopolitan distribution and invasion of fresh-water protozoans were
examined on Abaco Island, Bahamas by comparing:  (1) samples from surface waters; (2)
containers of sterile water exposed to colonization; and (3) cultured soil samples.
The distributional pattern of protozoans in the various surface waters was not uniform;
the number of species found varied widely (from 1-32 sp.).  Out of 71* species front
surface waters and 119 species from the soil cultures, 20 species were common to both
studies.  Other species common only to soil samples may act as a reservoir group which
furnishes colonizing species should a suitable aquatic habitat be present.  Very few
species (range of 0-6 per container) were collected from Jars of exposed sterile water.
The variation in numbers and kinds of species found in surface waters may be due to
variations In water quality or variation of Invaders, while differences in number of
species found in the containers may Indicate some variation In air-borne Invasion
rate since water quality was .essentially the same.

INDEX TERMS:  Protozoa, Freshwater, Systenaties, Ecological distribution, Distribution
      patterns, Soils, Surface waters, Chemical analysis, Water quality, Aquatic
               Heavy metals, Bahamas, Great Abaco Island, Colonization.
See also:  Category 1,  AMIC-2265, 3509, 3637
           Category 3,  AMIC-3588, 3592, 36*6
           Category k,  AMIC-3612.

-------
                                                                             3.
                                                                                 MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-26O9
 "EVALUATION OF METHODS FOR DETECTION OF COLIFORM BACTERIA IB RAW MILK",  Maura Fe,
j J. D. A., Kelson, F. E., journal of Milk and Food Technology. Vol. 35, Ho.  2,
] February 1972, PP 67-70.
i
i           Various methods have been used for detecting coliforms In milk and food.
I Milk samples vere taken from farm bulk tanks In both sunser and winter.   Total collform
| populations vere estimated by counting cells grown on Violet Red Bile agar  (VRB) at      |
' 32 degrees C and on Lauryl Sulfate Tryptose Broth (1ST) Incubated-at 37  degrees C.  1ST  j
 favored recovery of Aerobacter aerogenes, the 1W 1C-Irregular .types, and the majority
 of bacteria which produced ropinessTEscherichia coli, incubated at UU.5 C on EC  medium,!
 showed no constant relationship to total coli fora numbers and vaa the moat numerous     j
 organism detected.  Plates of VRB and 5-tube serial dilutions of 1ST broth  gave similar  !
 total coliform estimates in milk.                                                        i

 INDEX TERMS:  Methodology, Conforms, Evaluation, Milk, Cultures, E. coll,  Sampling,      ;
       Water pollution sources, Pollutant identification, Enteric bacteria,  Aerobacter    |
       aerogenes, Escherichia freundll, Most probable number test, Biochemical  tests,
       Culture media, Violet Red Bile agar,  Lauryl Sulfate Tryptose broth.
 AMIC-270U
 "SEE DISTRIBUTION OF BACTERIAL CELLS", Stull, V. R.,  Journal of Bacteriology,  Vol. 109,
 Ho. 3, March 1972, pp 1301-1303.

           In a current research program to develop a basis for rapid identification of
 bacteria via differential light-scattering measurements, an empirical method for
 determining cell size and size distribution has been derived.  the measurements are made
 with a laser light-scattering photometer which scans and records the differential light-
 scattering pattern of a single bacterium held fixed within the laser beam.  The
 instrument uses an Argon-ion laser, tuned to a wavelength of 0.51U5 micron.   The cells
 are injected pneumatically from a nebulizer into the scattering chamber where they are
 viewed through a lew-power mlscoscope.  The individual bacteria are brought  into the
 laser beam by manual adjustment of the electric fields between the plate and point
 electrodes and then held in position by an automatic servomechanism.  A detector system
 employing a photomiltipller is rotated by motor-drive  about the suspended particle and
 the light-scattering pattern ds recorded graphically.   Sample preparation involves (1)
 culturing the microbes on fresh culture media for a known period of time and at a
 known temperature; (2) incubating cultured cells; (3)  washing with cold distilled
 water; and (U) storing cell suspensions at 0 degree C  In distilled water until  samples
 are transferred to the nebulizer.

 INDEX TERMS:  Bacteria,  Distribution, Measurement,  Methodology,  Size, Instrumentation,
       Sampling,  Laboratory equipment, Cultures,  Microscopy,  Photometry, Differential
       light scattering.  Lasers, Stapnylococeus epldermldls.
 AMTC-269U
 "HXPERTROPHIC GROWTH",  Powell,  E.  O.,  Journal of Applied Chemistry and Biotechnology,
 Vol. 22,  Ho. 1,  January 1972, pp 71-787"

           A tentative mathematical model is presented of the microbiological
 hypertrophlc growth phenomenon. Hypertrophlc growth of a mlcroblal  organism occurs
 when tvo different media are used, and one is enriched with glutanlc acid,   gypertrophic
 growth Is Illustrated by a aeries  of mathematical  equations of sea*  staple  specific
 assumptions using a chemostat culture  of Bacillus  sub tills growing under magnesium
 limitation and In a steady state as the representative microorganism for experimental
 study. The Illustration presented is  no more than an explanation  of how the subject
 may reasonably be approached as further experimental evidence becomes available.

 INDEX TERMS:  Cultures,  Deficient  elements, Mathematical models, Bloassay, Growth  rates,
       Microorganisms, E.  coll,  Growth  stages,  Magneslxm,  Water pollution, Pollutant
       Identification, Aerobic bacteria,  Yeasts, Model studies, Mathematical  studies,
       gypertrophic growth,  Substrate utilization.  Enrichment, Substrates, Bacillus
       subtllis,  Aerobacter aerogenes,  Chemostats,  Culture media, Candida utllls.
I AMIC-2706
; "SYNCHROHIZATION OF CELL DIVISION IN ESCBERICHIA COLI BY ELEVATED TEMPERATURES:   A
' FEHTERPBETATIOK", Lonnltzer,  R.,  Ron,  E.  Z,.,  JouinaT of Bacteriology,  Vol.  109,
 No. 3, March 1972, PP 13l6-i3l8.

           Synchronization of cell division in E. coll exposed to elevated temperatures
 can be prevented If methionlne la present during heat shock.   Cells were grown at
 37 degrees C on a n-in-tnai medium containing glucose,  arginine,  and thymine (methionlne
 starvation).  Cell numbers were determined by viable  counts and by total cell counts
 in a Petroff-Hausser counting chamber after fixation  with 6 percent formaldehyde.
j Exposure to elevated temperatures Involved a transfer of 25-30 ml of  culture to a 1*3.8
 plus or minus 0.2 degree C water bath.   Synchronization of cell division resulted from
 exposure to these elevated temperatures.  That the amino acid methionlne prevented
 synchronous growth at these temperatures suggested the elimination of endogenous
 methlonine at higher temperatures which might be the  reason for synchronization of
 cell division.

 INDEX TERMS:  E. coli, Cultures,  Inhibition,  Thermal  stress.  Temperature,  Cytologies!
       studies, Amlno acids. Synchronization, Methionine,  Cell division.

-------
                                                                             3.   MICROBIOtOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3210
 "DEVELOPMENT OF LACTIC ACID BACTERIA DUMJG EARLY STAGES Of FEEMEKTATION IK FISH
 SILAGE",  Wirahadikusumah, S., Rajala, 0., Llndgren, S., Nilsson, R., Archlv fur
i Mlkroblologle, Vol. 82, No. 2, February 28,  1972, pp 95-UOO.         	

            The lactic acid bacteria which develop during the early stages of fermentation
 In fish silage have been identified.  Fish silage was prepared by mixing minced
 unevlscerated fish with malt and cereal meals.  Dilutions of  silage (1: 100,000,000)
 were Inoculated onto agar plates and Incubated at 26 degrees  C for 5 days.  Single
 colonies were removed from  these plates and  Inoculated Into MRS broth and Incubated
 for 3 days at 28  degrees C. Isolates were classified morphologically into 3 groups
 including rods (Lactobacll3.ua),  round cocci, and oral cocci (Streptococcus and
 Leuconostoc). They were subclassifled  according to their ability to produce ammonia
 from argiHTne •when grown at 1*5 C or 15  C.  The first type of  organisms that grew
 fastest was the oval cocci  followed by  round cocci (mostly S. faecalls).  The
 number of oval cocci increased rapidly  one day after ensiling and then decreased
 after 2-3 days.   The round  cocci Increased first after 2-3 days and then decreased
 slowly after U-5  days.  Lactobacilli began to Increase In mnber (more than ten
 billion per g silage) first after 6 days.  The results showed that the pH change
 during silage fermentation  was mainly lowered by streptococci, and In MRS medium
 the pH was more rapidly lowered  by Streptococcus faecalls, than by Laetobacillua
 plantarum and other rods.                        ~"~~~~~~          ~^~^~~~^~~

 INDEX TERMS:  Fish, Fermentation,  Pollutant  Identification, Silage, Aerobic bacteria,
        Methodology, Isolation, Cultures, Hydrogen Ion concentration. Growth rates,  Lactic
        acid bacteria, Streptococcus, Lactobaclllus, Leuconostoc mesenteroldes.
AMIC-3263
"EFFECT OF CYCLAMATES OH THE GROWTH OF PULLULARIA PULLULANS", Merdlnger, E., Canadian
Journal of Microbiology, Vol. ifl, No. U, April 1972, pp 531-533.

          A  description Is given of the effect of N-cyclohexylsulfamlc acid
(cyclamlc acid) and Its sodium salt on the growth of the fungus, Pullularia pullulans,
which can be Isolated from air, seawater, and soil.  Formation of the carcinogen,
cyclohexylamlne, was also assayed.  Cells were cultured In flasks containing a basal
medium with  or without glucose as the carbon source.  Cells grown In the absence
of glucose were Inoculated Into media containing various concentrations of cyclamlc
acid and sodium cyclamate.  The Initial pH of all media was 5-U-5.6.  Flasks were
shaken at 28 degrees C and samples were removed at 2U hr Intervals for determination
of viable cell counts.  Cyclohexylamlne production was measured by an unpublished
procedure of R.C. Senders.  Spent growth media of 8 days were extracted with
methrlene chloride and 2 liters of the extract was Injected Into a chromatograph
fitted with  a hydrogen lonlzatlon detector for product analysis.  The data showed
that Increased concentrations of cyclamlc acid and sodium cyclamate progressively
depressed the growth of P. piill \i1nns in the presence of various concentrations of
glucose.  Cyclohexylamlne was produced in flasks containing O.l» percent and 0.5
percent glucose and 0.6-1.0 percent cyclamic acid.

INDEX TERMS:  Water pollution effects,  Growth,  Soil fungi,  Marine fungi, Aquatic fungi,
      Hater pollution.  Pathogenic fungi,  Analytical techniques. Cultures,  Gas chromato-
      graphy, Metabolism Methodology,  Pollutant identification, Pullularia pullulans,
      Substrate utilization,  Cyclamates,  Cyclohexaralne,  Carcinogens,  N-cyclohexylsulfamlc
      acid,  Sodium cyclaolate,  Cyclamic acid. Culture media,  Glucose.
 AMIC-3216
 "GROWTH OF ENDOMYCOPSIS UPOLYTICA OH HYDROCARBONS", Nlgam, J. N., Lonsane, B. K.,
 Vadalkar, K., et. al., Journal of General and Applied Microbiology, Vol. 17, No. 6,
 December 1971, pp U33-U3T	~~	

           The ability of the yeast Endomycopals llpolytlca to grow on hydrocarbons
 was assessed using ten strains of this ascosporogenoua yeast which were Isolated from
 the oil fields of Assam In India.  Blomass yield from gas-oil, dlesel oil,  and white
 kerosene by all the strains were studied In a shake flask.  Fermentation studies were
 carried out In a 3-llter fermenter at 10 percent gas-oil concentration,  and growth
 was measured as the amount of aranonlun hydroxide necessary to maintain operational
 pH.  The growth characteristics of the 10 strains of yeast on various petroleum
 fractions and n-alkanes are reported as well as biochemical characteristics such aa
 pellicle formation,  splitting' of arbutln,  and lltaus milk tests.

 LTIDEX TERMS:   Yeasts, Oil  fields,  Isolation,  Cultures,  Blomass, Soil  fungi,  Endomycopsls
     - lipolytiem. Substrate utilization. Aliphatic hydrocarbons, Alkanes, Petroleum
       products, Enrichment,  Biochemical  tests,  India, Petroleum fractions.
MCC-3286
"VARIATION IN THETOXICmr OF ARSENIC COMPOUNDS TO MICROORGANISMS AND THE SUPPRESSICN OF
THE INHIBITORY. EFFECTS BY PHOSPHATE", Da Costa, E. W. B., Applied Microbiology. Vol. 23,
No. 1, January 1972, pp U6-53.

          Two tests were used to measure the toxicity of arsenic compounds to micro-
organisms and the suppression of the Inhibitory effects by phosphate.  The toxlcity
phial test measured the growth of fungi on agar containing various concentrations of
arsenates and phosphates.  The second, & seeded plate Inhibition zone test, measured
the effects of phosphate on the arsenate growth inhibition zones.  The toxlclty
of potassliai arsenate, as measured by retardation or inhibition of growth on solid
nutrient media, showed wide variation among different fungi but was consistently
reduced by the addition of large amounts of potassium phosphate, with both arsenic-
sensitive and arsenic-tolerant fungi.  Porla montlcola was completely Inhibited by
0.0025 M arsenate but was progressively less Inhibited as the phosphate content of the
Bedim Increased and grew slowly at O.Ql* M arsenate when O.l6 M KH2POI* was added.
:iadosporium herbarum shewed 36 percent reduction in growth at 0.09 M arsenate In  a low-
anosphate medium, but when 0.01 M KH2PC4 was added,  arsenate concentrations up to  0.61* M
(at which the medium contains U.8 percent As) caused no reduction in growth rate.
Addition of phosphate also reduced the toxlcity of potassium arsenlte but not that of
dimethyl sodium arsonate (sodium cacodylate).  The counteracting effect of phosphate on
arsenate toxlcity was found to occur with every one of a wide variety of microorganisms
tested.  Ihe practical implications of the counter-inhibition phenomenon in laboratory
investigations and standard tests of arsenical fungicides,  in biochemical research,
ind in the ccenerclal use of arsenical blocides are set out.
INDEX TERMS:  Toxlclty, Arsenic compounds, Phosphates,  Inhibitions, Microorganisms.

-------
                                                                            3.
                                                                                 MICROBIOIDGICAL METHODS
 AMTC-3331*
 "LOSS OF VIABILITY BY STAPHYLCCOCCUS AUREUS IN ACIDIFIED MEDIA  I.  IHACTIVATIOH BY
 SEVERAL ACIDS, MIXTURES OF ACIDS, AND SALTS OF ACIDS", Minor, T. E., Mtrth,  E. H.,
 Journal of H11K and Food Technology, Vol. 35, Ho. U, April 1972, pp 191-196.

           Loss of viability by Staphylococcus aureua (100,000,000 cello per nllllllter)
 was  Investigated after 2l+ hr of Incubation at 37 C In Tryptlcase Soy broth acidified
 with acetic, citric, hydrochloric, lactic, and phosphoric acids.  When the organism
 was  exposed to the medium adjusted with hydrochloric acid to pH values of 5.2-3.6,
 9O-99.99 percent of the cells were inactivated.  Acetic, lactic, and phosphoric acids
 were more active against S. aureus than vas hydrochloric, whereas citric wa» equivalent
 to hydrochloric.  Mixtures' of lactic and hydrochloric acids inactivated more cells  than
 did  either acid alone but mixtures of other acids with hydrochloric, while superior to
 hydrochloric acid Itself, offered no apparent advantage over the use of single acids.
 The  undlssociated acid molecule was responsible for enhanced inactlvatlon of cells  by
 partially dissociated acids since anlons of these acids had no effect on cell suvlval.
 Cells were more susceptible to inactivation by hydrogen ions at high incubation
 temperatures (1»5 C) and when the number of bacteria was lev.  Cells of S. aureus were
[ moat sensitive to the effects of hydrogen ions between the 12th and ZktS hr during  a
 120-hr Incubation.

 INDEX TERMS:  Viability, Acidity,  Anions, Temperature, Water pollution,  Pollutant
       Identification, Aerobic bacteria, Hydrogen Ion concentration, Organic acids,
       Staphylocoecus aureus, Culture media,  Acetic acid. Citric acid. Hydrochloric  acid,
       Lactic acid, Phosphoric acid,  Survival,  Mineral acids. Fate of pollutants.
 AMIC-33W*
 "THE QUAKTIMET 720P FOB ROUTINE BIOLOGICAL ASSAY AMD POTENCY CALCULATION FROM COLONY
 COUNT, INHIBITION ADD EXHIBITION ZONE MEASUREMENTS", Bond, C. P., Berry, D  J
I Crawley, J. A., The Microscope, Vol. 20, Ho. 1, April 1972, pp 165-17U.

1           '1*e Quantimet 720 Petriscope Is designed to automate microbiological
, examination for routine biological assay and potency calculation from colony count
, and for inhibition and exhibition zone measurements for research and quality control
! applications.  Problem* arise In such examinations due to the subjective assessments
! which have to be applied to malformed inhibition zones which often have diffuse edges
 and also due to errors arising from the tedium of colony counting.  The Quantimet
 720P accurately counts and sizes bacterial colonies using dark field illumination
 without any errors due to repetition.  On inhibition zone measurements,  the Quantimet
 720P Is able to utilize different forms of Illumination to overcome errors  due to
 Insufficient contrast.  Dark field illumination can be used in many cases but others
I require a unique 'diffusion detecting'  graticule between the bright field illumination
 source and the petri dish.  The image of the graticule is then detected through areas
 or inhibition but not through areas of  microbiological growth.  These alternative forms
 of Illumination allow completely reproducible,  objective measurements to be made on
 zone  areas of dlsoeters with on-line automatic  calculation and print-out of potency
 In      '
 INDEX TERMS:  Bioassay, Assay, Bacteria, Viability, Pollutant identification, Inhibition,
      Laboratory equipment, Automation, Computers, Nutrients, Antibiotics (pesticides),
      Microorganisms, Microscopy, Quality control, Quantlaet 720P Petriscope, Counting,
      Dark field Illumination, Accuracy, Reproducibility, Detection.
 AMJC-33>K>
 "METABOLISM OF POLYCHLORIHATED BORBORNENES BY CLOSTRIDIUM BUTYRICUM",  Schuphan,  I.,
 Ballschmlter, K., nature,  Vol. 237,  No. 5350,  May 12,  1972,  pp 100-101.

           In order to determine the ability of Clostrldlum butyrleum to metabolize
 polyehlorlnated norbornenes,  cells were grown anaeroblcally  on water-covered potatoes and
 subjected to various concentrations  (0.1-1,000 ppm)  of norbornenes.  At the  end  of an
 experiment the whole culture  medium  vas homogenized  and extracted with toluene.  The
 resulting solution vas used for electron capture gas chromatography.   Culture and
 potatoes gave no Interfering  peaks In the chrcmatogram.  The results obtained shew
 that C.  butyrleum metabolizes hexa,  penta,  and tetrachloro-norbornenes.  No  dechlorl-
 nated~products of the hexachloro-norbornene could be found using well-aerated yeast
 (Saccharomyces) cultures or soil microorganisms,  mostly actinonycetes, on agar plates.
 To what  extent the dechlorlnation  reactions described  here can be found with other
 microorganisms Is under Investigation.

 INDEX TERMS:   Metabolism, Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,  Clostrldlm, Yeasts,
      Halogenated pesticides,  Separation techniques, Anaerobic bacteria. Cultures, Soil
      microorganisms, Soil bacteria, Organic pesticides,  Soil  contamination,  Chemical
      reactions, Clostrldlum butyrleum,  Polyehlorlnated norbornenes, Saccharomyces,
      Fate of  pollutants, Substrate  utilization, Electron capture gas  chromatography,
      Dechlorlnatlon.
                                                                                      1*5
 AMIC-336g
 "THE PRESENT STATUS AND FUTURE PROSPECTS OF THE TURBIDOSTAT",  Watson,  T. G.,  Journal of
 Applied Chemistry and Biotechnology, Vol. 22, No. 2, February 1972,  pp 229-2«fJI
           Due to the need to culture organisms continuously at or near the maximum
 specific growth rate, a task for which the chenostat Is unsuitable,  use of the turbid-
 ostat Is growing,  the turbldostat controls organism concentration directly and not
 dilution rate; therefore It operates moot successfully close to the maximum specific
 growth rate where the oxganlsm concentration changes rapidly with dilution rate.  The
 functioning of turbldostats,  potential uses and some representative studies In which
 they have been used are discussed.  Methodology for the monitoring of population density,
 Including use of photo-electric sensors,  pH sensors,  and gas-concentration sensors,  and
 for the control and monitoring of nutrient additions Is reviewed.  The turbidostat still
 has rather limited appeal because other techniques in many circumstances offer more
 convenient methods of approach.  However,  recent Interest In transient,  periodic,  and
 oscillatory phenomena In microbial populations Is giving impetus to  the turbldostat.
 For example,  it has been used In a study  of the effect of ethanol on the maximum specific
 growth rate of Klebslella aerogenes,  for  a study of Induced oscillatory phenomena In
K. aerogenes In the presence of various drugs, and for a study on  the regulation of
pyruvate biosynthesis  In E. coll.

INDEX TERMS: Cultures,  Growth rates, Microorganisms, Monitoring,  Population, Measure-
      ment,  Instrumentation, Blolndlcators, Bacteria. Photometry,  Productivity, Density,
      Turbldostats, Chemostats, Continuous cultures.

-------
                                                                           . 3.   MTCROBTOinRTCtL METHODS
AMC-336U
"CICSTRIDIUH BARKERI SP. N.", stadtman, E. R., Stadtman, T. C., Pastan, I., Smith, L.
PS., Journal of Bacteriology, Vol. 110, Ko. 2, May 1972, pp 758-760.

          A new species of Clostrldlum, C. barkerl, has been Isolated from Potomac
River mud by an enrichment culture technique!  Ifhas been differentiated from a few    !
nonproteolytlc clostrldla which resemble it in cultural characteristics using the       I
following features: motillty; indole formation; mannose, trehalose, mannltol, and       {
sorbltol fermentation; and fermentation acids.  The characteristics of this new
species are listed.

INDEX TERMS:  Isolation, Clostrldium, Anaerobic bacteria, Systematlcs, Cultures,
      Pollutant identification, Potomac River, Methodology, Biochemistry,  Biological
      properties, Aquatic bacteria, Soil bacteria, Clostrldlum barkerl, Characterization
      Substrate utilization, Biochemical tests, Enrichment.
                                                                                          AMTC-3367
                                                                                          "EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE OH THE RESPIRATION AND CYTOCHROMES OF AN EXTREME THERMOPHTLE",
                                                                                          McFeters, G. A., Ulrich, J. T., Journal of Bacteriology.  Vol. 110,  No.  2, May 1972,
                                                                                          pp 777-779.
                                                                                                    An obligate aerobic, extreme thermophillc bacterium resembling Themus
                                                                                          aquatlcus was isolated from a hot spring in Yellowstone National Park.   Since it grew
                                                                                          optimally at 72 degrees C but repeatedly failed to grow anaeroblcally,  the  effect of
                                                                                          temperature on respiration and the cytochromes vaa studied.   Respiration was  measured at
                                                                                          different temperatures by using a Gilson differential respirometer.   The culture was
                                                                                          grown to mid-exponential phase In complete medium at the  temperatures that  were  used for
                                                                                          the oxygen uptake experiments (50, 60,  and 70 C).  Cells  were grown to late-exponential
                                                                                          phase at 50, 60, and 70 C In the complete medium, and their  cytochrome content was
                                                                                          determined.  The difference spectra at ambient temperature were determined  by using a
                                                                                          Hitachi Perkin-Elmer model 356 spectrophotometer, and the cytochrome concentrations were
                                                                                          estimated.  The rate of oxygen uptake in the thermophlle  at  70 C was three  times greater
                                                                                          than at 50 C.  Cytochromes a,.b, and c vere present In cells grown at 50, 60,  and 70 C.
                                                                                          The content of these electron Transport system elements remained relatively constant as
                                                                                          the growth temperature was raised.  The concentration of  dissolved oxygen also had no
                                                                                          effect on the concentrations of respiratory enzymes.  That the bacterium grew better at
                                                                                          higher temperatures was postulated to be the result of Increased availability of
                                                                                          cofactors end Increased dehydrogenase activity.

                                                                                          IKIEX TERMS:  Heat resistance, Thermophillc bacteria, Respiration,  Aquatic  bacteria,
                                                                                                Aerobic bacteria, Spectrophotonetry, Enzymes, Physiological ecology.  Water
                                                                                                temperature, Hot springs, Cultures, Dissolved oxygen,  Thermus aquaticus,
                                                                                          	Cytochrome a, Cytochrome b, Cytochrome c.	
 AMIC-3366
 "OSMOTIC STABILITY AND SODIUM AND POTASSIUM CONTENT OF L-FORMS OF STREPTOCOCCUS
 FAECALIS", Montgonerle, J. £., Kalnanson, G. M.,  Hubert,  E. 0., Gute,  L.  B.,
 Journal.of Bacteriology, Vol. 110, No. 1, May 1972, pp 62U-627.

           A stable L-form of Streptococcus faecalls has been conditioned  to grow In
 media without an osmotic stabilizer.The ability of this L-form to survive at different
 osmolallties and Intracellular levels of Ka and K ions has been compared  with the L-form
 from which it was derived growing In media containing 0.5 M sucrose.   L-form colonies and
 their stable derivatives were grown on BHI agar and BET agar plus 0.5  M sucrose,  respec-
 tively.   Cells were obtained by centrifugation.  Extracellular volume  was determined with
 serum albumin (1-131).   Na and K content were measured by flame photometry.  The  stable
 L-form of S.  faecalls (T sub 53) vas transferred  In media containing decreasing concen-
 trations oT sucrose until It grew In medium without added osmotic stabilizer.  This L-
 foxm (designated T sub  531) was compared with T sub  53 from which it vas  derived.  The
 survival of these two L-forms suspended at different oamolalitles showed  that maximal
 survival for T sub 531 was 350 to l»00 mlllioamolal and for T sub 53 was 900 to 1,000
•illioeaolal.  Both peaks were at .the osmolality  of their growth media.  Measurement of
 Intracellular potassium and sodium showed that  the concentration of these Ions was
reduced  In T sub  531.

INtGX TERMS:  Osmosis, Stability, Cytologlcal studies,  Streptococcus, Aerobic bacteria,
      Sodium, Potassium, Cultures, Flame photometry, Digestion,  Environmental effects,
      Pathogenic bacteria, Radioactivity techniques. Streptococcus faecalis,  Sucrose,
      Hydrocarbons, Culture media, Survival.
                                                                                         AMIC-3397
                                                                                         "THE STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF FRESH-WATER MICROBIAL COMMUNITIES",  Cairns, J., Jr.,
                                                                                         Editor, Research Division Monograph 3,  1971,  301 pp.
                                                                                                   The 1969 symposium on "The Structure and Function of Fresh-water Mlcroblal
                                                                                         Communities' sponsored by the American  Microscopical Society was directed toward an
                                                                                         understanding of the relationships among living things in the  aquatic environment.
                                                                                         The topics Included were: 'Adaptations  for Photoregenerative Cycling,  Carbon Flow in
                                                                                         the Aquatic System'; 'Aquatic Laboratory Microsystems  and Communities';  'The Role of
                                                                                         Laboratory Experimentation in Ecological Research*;  'A Continuous Gnotobiotic
                                                                                         (Species Defined) Ecosystem"; 'Community Structure of  Protozoans and Algae with
                                                                                         Particular Emphasis on Recently Colonized Bodies of Water';  'Diatom Ccmmunlties';
                                                                                         'Mlcroblal Relationships in Biological  Wastewater Treatment Systems';  'Hetertrophlc
                                                                                         Bacteria in Aquatic Ecosystems; Some Results  of Studies with Organic Radlolsotopes1;
                                                                                          Seasonal Distribution of Cobalamlna, Blotln  and Nlacln in Rainwater';  'Lacustrine
                                                                                         Fungal Communities1; 'Factors Affecting the Dumber of  Species  In Fresh-water Protozoan
                                                                                         Communities'; 'The Interrelationship Between  Freshwater Bacteria, Algae,  and
                                                                                         Actlnomycetes In Southwestern Reservoirs'; 'Chemo-Organotrophy in Epiphytic  Bacteria
                                                                                         with Reference to Macrophytlc Release of Dlsolved Organic Matter';  and 'Bacteriological
                                                                                        'Profiles and Some Chemical Characteristics of Two Permanently Frozen Antarctic  Lakes'.

                                                                                         INDEX TERMS:  Aquatic productivity,  Ecology,  Aquatic environment,  Biological communities.
                                                                                               Aquatic microorganisms,  Cycling nutrients,  Ecological distribution.  Ecosystems,
                                                                                               Aquatic habitats.  Productivity,  Aquatic bacteria. Aquatic  algae.  Carbon cycle,
                                                                                               On-slte tests,  Aquatic animals,  Aquatic populations,  Bloassay, Eutrophication,
                                                                                               Aquatic fungi,  Systematlcs,  Laboratory tests,  Chemical analysis.  Absorption, Water
                                                                                         	properties. Seasonal distribution, Nutrient requirements.   	

-------
                                                                            3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-3H05
 "AUTOMATED DETBCTICH OF BACTERIA IN URINE". Flelg,  A. J., Plcciolo,  G. L.,  Chappelle,
IE. V., Kelbaugh, B. N., In:  Significant Accomplishments In Technology Goddard Space
i Flight Center, 1970, Report Ho. HASA SP-295, (Proceedings of a Symposium held at NASA
;Coddard Space Flight Center, January 13, 1971), 1972, pp JJB8-192.

:           An automated method for the detection of bacteria In urine vas derived from
• work on extraterrestrial life detection done by the former Space Biology Branch of the
 Goddard Space Flight Center,  the method utilized the bloluminescent reaction of ATP
 with luclferin and luclferase.  Detection Involved treating urine sequentially vlth a
j nonlonlc detergent and potato apyrase to selectively lyse nonbacterial cells and to
jhydrolyze all ATP released, respectively.  "Otis treatment was followed by the addition
;of perchloric acid to Inhibit apyrase and lyse bacterial cells.  Thus,  If bacteria vere
[present injection of luclferase and luciferln at this point would produce a flash.   An
i entire assay takes 15 minutes,  and the device used processes samples at a rate of one
{per minute.

I INDEX TERMS:  Bacteria,  Urine,  Laboratory tests,  Automation,  Methodology, Sampling,
       Biological properties,  Biolumlnescence,  Detergents,  Enzymes, Bloassay,  Infection,
l       Cultures,  Chemical reactions,  Pollutant Identification,  Detection,  Adenoslne
•       triphosphate,  Luciferln,  Luciferase,  Biological samples.
 AMIC-3U55
 "GROWTH OF SALMOKELLA TYFHIMURIUH IN SKIM MILK CONCENTRATES",  Dega,  C.  A.,  Goepfert,
 J. M., Aatundson, C. H.~Applled Microbiology,  Vol. 23,  No.  1,  January 1972, pp 82-97.
i
           The Influence of various levels of skim milk  solids  and temperature on the
• duration of lag phase, grovth rate, and extent of grovth of S^T^onella typhinurium
i was investigated.  The effect on growth of salmonellae  (and a  strain of Escherlchla coll]
' of reduced pressure at a constant solids level and under conditions  simulating vacuum
| condensation of skin milk was also studied. S. typhimurium  grew when inoculated into
 skim milk solutions ranging from 10 to 60 percent solids and over a  temperature range  of
 23 to W* C.  At 1O to 12 C, grovth was evident only in  the  10  percent skim  milk.  As
 the total solids level was Increased or incubation temperature was deviated from the
 optimum, or both, there vas an Increase In the lag phase and generation time of
 salmonellae.  A lover cell population also resulted.  The generation time at 37 C  of S_.
 typhimurium Incubated at atmospheric pressure vas approximately one-half that in  skim
 milk concentrates held under reduced pressure.   In addition,  a  slightly longer lag phase
 and lover cell yield characterized the grovth under reduced pressure.   Concentration  of
 skim milk had little or no effect on viability  of salnonellae or E.  eoll when the vapor
 temperature In the vacuum pan vas below the maximum growth  temperature  for  salmonellae.
 Increasing the vapor temperature to k& C caused a two-log reduction  in  viable organisms
 during the concentrating period (65 mln).   (Reprinted from  Applied Microbiology,  Vol. 23,
 January 1972,  pp 82-87.  Copyright by the American Society  for  Microbiology.   Reprinted
 by permission of the copyright owner.)
 INDEX TERM?:   Milk,  Growth,  Conforms,  Pressure,  Enteric  bacteria, Growth rates,  E. coll,
       Temperature,  Environmental effects, Salmonella typhiaurlum, Atmospheric pressure
 "SALMONELLA",  Defense Documentation Center, Alexandria, Virginia, Report Bo. DDC-TAS-71-
 62, February 1972, 2Tk pp.  NTIS Report Ko. AD 737 900.

           This bibliography  Is a collection of unclassified references on Sain	
 The disease,  the modes of transmission and the vectors are presented.  Indexes
                                                                ene     nexes
 for Corporate Author-Monitoring Agency, Subject, Title, and Personal Author arc Included,

 INDEX TERJ6:  Salaonella, Bibliographies, Biology, Epidemiology, Methodology,
       Documentation, Abstracts, Data collections, Microbiology, Systematles, Cultures,
       Detection*
 AMTC-3586
  DEVELOPMENT OF TECHNIQUES FOR ESTIMATING THE BACTERIAL POPULATION OF SEWAGE SLUDGE",
 Spongier,  W., Langston,  W., Midwest Research Institute,  Kansas  City,  Missouri, Water
 Pollution Control Research Series 17070 DRP 12/70,  Contract No. lU-12-569,  December
 1970,  6% pp.

           A research program vas Initiated to develop practical methods for the
 evaluation of the blomass In anaerobic sewage sludge and to determine if predictions
 could be made concerning digester performance.  Sampling and handling methods vere
 Improved and standardized to give maximum anaerobic counts. A  simplified technique
 for growing obligate anaerobes that '•«" be safely performed by  technicians  vlth minimum
 training In bacteriology was developed.  Anaerobic  media vere improved to yield as high
 or higher counts of methanogenlc bacteria than heretofore reported.   A simple freeze-dry
 technique was developed for preparation of consistent batches of sludge supernatant used
 In media as a supplement for grovth of obligate  sludge anaerobes.  The possible relation-
 ship between concentration of a grovth factor required by Hethanobacterium  rumlnantlum
 [used  to evaluate potency of growth factor extracted) and digester efficiency could have
 Important practical Implications.  Limited data  obtained indicated that grovth factor
 concentrations vere much higher In 'normal'  digesters than In unbalanced or 'upset'
 digesters. Practical applications of  the methods developed can have  considerable  Impact
 upon future research and development In anaerobic sludge digestion and could lead  to
 improvements  In  our ability to predict impending digester failure and control of digester
 performance.
 INDEX  TERMS:   Sewage sludge,  Blonass,  Methodology,  Estimating,  Sewage bacteria, Pollutant
       identification, Sampling,  Anaerobic bacteria. Methane bacteria,  Deficient elements,
       Methanobaeterlum rumlnantium.  Enumeration,  Counting,.  Nutrient.

-------
                                                                            3.
                                                                                MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AHK-358S
 "THE MILL RIVER AND ITS FLOODPLAIN IK NORTHAMPTON AND WILLIAMSBURG, MASSACHUSETTS.
 A STUDY OF THE VASCULAR PLANT FLORA, VEGETATION, AND THE PRESENCE OF THE BACTERIAL
 FAMILY FSEUDOMONADACEAE IS RELATION TO PATTERNS OF LAND USE", Roblnton, E. D.,
 Burk, C. J., University of Massachusetts, Water Resources Research Center, Amherst,
 Massachusetts, Completion Report 72-U, 1972, 72 pp.  BTIS Report No. PB 207 127.

           The Mill River, a stream which flows through five communities (Northampton,
 Florence, Leeds, Baydenville, and Wllllamsburg, Massachusetts) has been studied In
 order to determine the relationship of land use In adjacent areas to the flora of
; vascular plants and selected microorganisms growing within the river or Its floodplaln.
 All species of vascular plants growing within the river and Its floodplaln were
 Inventoried to determine their presence and abundance and to make quantitative ecologi-
 cal studies.  The mlcroblal flora was determined at selected river sites with special
I emphasis on the family Pseudononadaceae.  A study of the Invasion of drained Impound-
| menta by vascular plants Indicated the successions! roles of several species in the
 stream ecosystem.  Leers la oryzoldes (L.) Sw., the only species found In all zones of
 all marshes studied, was dominant in the early stages of secondary succession.  A summer
 flora of more than 275 species of vascular plants within the river and its floodplaln
 was recorded.  Fluorescent strains of the genus Pseudomonas were found at all sampling
 stations and may be considered a part of the Indigenous mlcroblal flora of the stream.
 Pseudomonas aernglnosm (plgmented strains) were widely distributed.  Collform organisms,
 lacking aT~the source, occurred with high densities In all downstream stations.  A
 method of enrichment for obtaining members of the genus PseiidomonaB was devised.

 INDEX TERMS:  Pseudomonads, Aquatic populations, Ecological distribution, Vater pollution
       effects, Aquatic environment, Hacrophytes, Aquatic bacteria. Species diversity.
AJOC-3597
"ENTERIC  BACTERIAL DEGRADATION OF STREAM DETRITUS", Hendrlcks, C. W., Georgia University,
Departaent of Microbiology, Athens, Georgia, Water Pollution Control Research Series
lfi050 EQS 12/71, December 1971,  105 pp.

           An Investigation was Initiated to relate basal nutrients In the vater and
|on the bottom of a warm,  freshwater stream to their ability to support the growth
I and multiplication of pathogenic and nonpathogenlc enteric bacteria.  The results of this
!study indicated that enteric bacteria have the capacity to metabolize substrates that
were  present In the  stream environment Including autoclaved river vater.  These organisms,
however,  lacked the  ability to Increase  In numbers In continuous culture with river water
and suspended detritus recovered above a secondary sewage treatment facility, but they
did demonstrate positive  growth  rates with substrates  recovered below the plant.  Data
from  this study also demonstrated that the sands and clays forming the stream bottom have
{the capacity to sorb substrates  from the overlayerlng water, and that sediment eluates
will  stimulate  the respiration rate of the bacterial strains studied.  These results
[suggest that the stream bottom can provide a suitable environment for the growth of
{bacterial species  and perhaps control basal nutrient concentration in the water Itself.

INDEX TERMS:  Streams, Enteric bacteria, Detritus, Water analysis, Mlcroblal degradation,
      Suspended solids, Blolndlcators, Aquatic soils, Sediments, Biochemical oxygen
      demand, Growth rates, Cultures, Blodegradatlon, Pathogenic bacteria, Biochemical
      testa,  Culture media, Chemostato, Substrate utilization, Heterotrophic bacteria.
 AMIC-3592
 •ROLE OF BACTERIA IN THE NITROGEN CYCLE III LAKES", McCoy, E. P., Water Pollution
 Control Research Series 16010 EHR 03/72, March 1972, 23 PP-

           In a 3-year study, 1690 samples were tested In the field for N03-N,  N02-N
 and NHb-N and In the laboratory for nitrifying and denitrifying bacteria and fungi.
 The sampling sites were fresh waters, underlying muds and beaches.  Biological
 nitrification, both heterotrophlc and autotrqphic, was demonstrated.  Values for N03-N
 above 10 ppm were common; 30-60 ppm were often found en beaches with decomposing
 organic matter.  Denitrifying bacteria were prevalent at the same sites; more than
 70 percent of 628 samples contained more than 10,000/ml.  Nitrification and
 denltrtflcatlcn are opposing processes but can coexist either In close succession or in
 adjoining mlerohabltats.  Thus,  the field values for NO3-N and N02-H vary considerably
 and must be viewed as net values at any given time.  Experiments with 13 species of
 locally caught fishes showed great differences In resistance to I02-N.  Perch and
 brook sticklebacks were killed in 3-5 hr at 5 ppm.  Carp and black bullheads tolerated
 Uo ppm for 2 wks and 100 ppm for about 2k hr.  The susceptibilities of other species
 varied.  Nitrite toxicity may Influence the dealnance of fish species in a eutrophlc
 lake.
 INDEX TERMS:  Aquatic bacteria.  Nitrogen cycle, Cycling nutrients, Aquatic fungi,  Bio-
       assay, Denltrlflcatlon,  Nitrification,  Eutrophlcatlon,  Nitrates, Nitrites,  Toxicity.
       Lakes, On-slte tests.  Freshwater fish.  Reduction (chemical), Nutrients,  Autotrophlc
      bacteria, Heterotrophic bacteria.
 mMK-3639
  "ANIMAL TCKICm OF PHnOPATBOGENIC FUNGI", Main, C. E., Hamilton, P. B., Applied
 Microbiology, Vol.  23, No.  1, January 1972, pp 193-195-
           Twelve genera of phytopathogenic fungi comprising 27 species previously
 reported to produce phytotoxins were tested concurrently for animal and plant toxicity.
 The Mi-t^ai toxin bloassay Involved homogenizing the mycelium and filtrate of each
 fungus and Injecting the brew Into mice.  The mice were observed for 72 hours and
 mortality was recorded.  The plant toxin bloassay Involved measuring the growth
 Inhibition of Chlor*11" pyrenoldosa by these fungi.  Ihe effect of media and cultural
 conditions on toxin production was Investigated.  All test fungi were grown in Main's
 medium enriched with Phytone which presented a common source of plant protein.  The
 cultures were Incubated at 25 C In still culture for 3 weeks, and bioassays were per-
 formed.  A. tenuls  (M-l) and rosarium trlclnctum gave positive mouse toxicity but lost
 their phytbtoxlc  potential.  Rhlzoctonla solsnl gave a positive mouse assay, whereas
 the Chlorella assay was negative.  Results with the other fungi were unchanged.  There
 appeared to be no direct relationship between the phytotoxlc and nnlmnl toxic potential
 of phytopathogenic  fungi as a group.

 IN DEC TERMS:  Toxicity, Pathogenic fungi, Bloassay, Animal pathology, Phytotcoclclty,
       Cultures, Plant pathology. Methodology, Data collections, Pollutant identification
       Pollutants, Chlorella, Inhibition, Growth, Aquatic fungi.

-------
                                                                            3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
MOC-36»K>
 "REDUCTION OF THE 20-CARBONYL GROUP Of C-21 STEROIDS BY SPORES OF FUSARIUM SOLANI AHD
 OTHER MICROORGANISMS. I.  SIDE-CHAIN DEGRADATION, EPCKICE CLEAVAGE, AND SUBSTKRTE"
 SPBCIFICm", Plourde,  R., El-Tayeb, O. M.,  Hafez-Zedan, H., Applied Microbiology,
 Vol. 23, Ho. 3,  March 1972, pp 6oi-6l2.

           A comparative study of the activities of  nongerminating spores and growing
 cells of rusarian solsjil and other microorganisms on different steroids was made to
 determine the role of 20-reductase in mlcrobial side-chain  degradation and the side-
 chain removal of 16 alpha, 17 alpha-epoxysteroids.  The spores of Fusarlua solani
 reduced the C20-carbonyl group, 1-dehydrogenated ring  'A' and cleaved the side chain of
 l6 alpha, 17 alpha-oxidopregn-U-ene-3,20-dlone (l6  alpha, 17 alpha-oxidoprogesterone)
 (I) to give the following products: 20 alpha-hydroxy-16 alpha, 17 alpha-ojtldopregn-^
 en-3-one(Il);  20 alpha-hydroxy-i6 alpha,  17 alpha-oxldopregna-l,U-dlen-3-one(ni);
 16 alpha-hydroxy-17a-oxR-androsta-l, U-dlene-3,  17-dlone (16 alpha-hydraxy-l-dehydro-
 testololactone)(lV); and 16 alpha, 17 beta-dlhydroxy-androsta-l,k-dien-3-one (16 alpha-
 hydrc*y-l-dehvdrotestosterone)(V).  The 20-reductase system of F. solani, Cyllndrocarpon
 radlelcola, Septomyxa affinis, Bacillus lentus,  and three strains of B. sphaerlcus is
AMIC-36U1  (Continued)
                                                                      2/2
 IN ISC TERMS:  Soil microorganisms, Absorption, Carbon dioxide, Radioactivity techniques,
      Soil algae, Methodology, Measurement, Oxidation, Carbon radio!sotopes, On-slte
      tests, Sulfur bacteria, Productivity, Radlochemlcal analysis, Thermophllic
      bacteria, Organic matter, Cultures, Soil bacteria, Efficiency, Chemical inter-
      ference, Scintillation counting, Cyanidlum caldarium, Thiobacillus, Sulfolobus,
      Glucose, Uracil.
 active only on sterlods having the Ib alpha,  17 alpha-oxido, and U-derta-3-keto
 functions.  Evidence of competition between side-chain degrading enzymes and the 20-
 reductase for the sterlod molecule and evidence of side-chain  degradation followed by
 epoxlde cleavage (and not the reverse) are presented.   A mechanism  for the epozlde
 opening by nongerminating spores of F_. solani Is postulated.

 INEEX TERMS:  Carbonyls, Steroids, Characterization, Fate of pollutants, Substrate
       .utilization.
 AMIC-361U
 "TECHNIQUE FOR MEASURING C-lUo2 UPTAKE BY  SOIL MICROOROANISMS  IN SITU", Smith, D. «.,
 Fllemans,  C.  B.,  Brock, T.  D., Applied Microbiology, Vol. 23,~TTo7~37 March 1972,
 pp 595-600.

          Uptake of C-ll*02 In  soils due to algae or sulfur-oxidizing bacteria was
 examined by Incubation of soil samples with gaseous C-lbO2 and subsequent chemical
 oxidation of the biologically  fixed radioactive Isotope to C-1UO2 for detection with a
 liquid scintillation counting  system.  The C-1UO2 vas added to the soil In the gas
 phase so that  no alteration  of the moisture or Ionic strength  of the soil occurred.
 Wet oxidation  of radioactive organic matter vas carried out In sealed ampoules, and
 the C-lUo2  produced vas transferred to a phenethylaalne-llquld scintillation counting
 system with a  simply constructed apparatus.  The technique Is  Inexpensive and efficient
 and does not require elaborate traps since several possible Interfering factors were
 found to have  no harmful effects.  The efficiency of the technique in oxidising various
 compounds vas  examined using varying concentrations of uniformly labeled glucose and
 uracil,  and labeled Cyanidlum  caldarium cells.  In all cases,  the procedure was per-
 formed on samples  ccatalnlng~b.5 g of  soil per ampoule to reproduce the treatment of
 natural  samples  as closely as  possible.  Sixty-one to eighty-seven percent of the added
 radioactivity was  recovered  during the oxidation of glucose and uracil, whereas 98
percent  of the added radioactivity was recovered during the oxidation of C. ealdarlum.
 [he recovery efficiency was  Independent of the amount of radioactivity presenTI
 Jxperlaents  la coal nine regions and in geotbemal habitats have demonstrated the
ecological applicability of  this technique for measurement of CO2 fixation by
sulfur-oxidizing bacteria and  soil algae.
AMIC-36U6
"MICROBIAL UPTAKE OF LEAD", Tornabene, T. G., Edwards,  H. W.,  Science,  Vol. 176,
No. I*C&1, June 23, 1972, pp 133U-1335.                        	

          A study was made of the Immobilization of inorganic lead by mlcrobial
cells and the fraction of Immobilized lead that passes through the cell envelope Into
the cytoplasm.  This immobilization may be Important to transfer through the food chain.
Azotobacter sp. and Mlcrococeus luteus were grown in broth In the presence of lead
                                               Culture turbidity was measured
                                                           These measurements Indicated
bromide, lead iodide, and lead bromochloride.
spectrophotometrlcally and a viable cell count was taken.
that the three lead salts In concentrations approaching the solubility limits had no
appreciable effect on overall growth rates and cell viability.  Cellular subtractions
were analyzed for lead by dissolution in concentrated nitric acid followed by atomic
absorption spectrometrlc analysis.  It was concluded from this study that these
mlcrobial systems are capable of Immobilizing large quantities of Inorganic lead and that
the lead Is largely associated with cell membranes (99.3 and 99.1 percent,  respectively,
for Mlcrococeus luteus and Azotobaeter sp.).  The remaining lead Is associated with
eytoplasmic fractions.

DtEBC TERMS:  Cytolcglcal studies, Lead, Bacteria,  Absorption, Bromides, Chlorides,
      Iodides,  Salts, Cultures, Spectrophotometry,  Turbidity, Centrifugatlon,  Proteins,
      Liplds, Spectrometers, Incubation, Membranes, Food chains,  Absorption,  Path of
      pollutants, Lead compounds,  Biological magnification, Lead bromide. Lead Iodide,
      Lead bromochloride, Azotobacter,  Mlcrococeus luteus,  RNA, Hexoaamlne, Atomic
      absorption Spectrophotometry.

-------
                                                                            3.
                                                                                MICROBIOLOGICAL MBTBDIB
 AMic-3711
 "nENnriCATioH or NJCVDZMETHTLHYISCXYLAMIM: AS A MICBCBIAL DEGRADATION PRODUCT OF THE
 HERBICIDE, LDiURON", Engelhardt, G., Vallnofer, P. R., Plapp, R.,  Applied Microbiology,
 Vol. 23, So. 3, March 1972, pp 66V666.                           	

           Bacillus sphaerlcus, grown In the presence of llnuron, produced as
i degradation products^T^-dlchloroanlllne, carbon dioxide, and an unidentified product
| described as N,0-dlBethylhydraxylamine (MHA).  Llnuron, 50 mlcrograns In 1.$ nl of
• phosphate buffer (pH 7.5), was incubated vlth 0.5 ml of cell fre* extract for 20 hr
I at 37 degrees C, and 95 percent of the llnuron was degraded.  MHA vas Identified by
 thin-layer chromatcgraphy and flame lonlzatlon gas chronatography.

j INDEX •i£ra6:  Herbicides, Hlcroblal degradation. Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,
|       Pollutant Identification, Pesticide removal, Ralogenated pesticides, Bacillus
|       sphaerlcus, N O-Dlmethylhydraxylamine, Llnuron,  Thin layer chromatography,
       Flane lonlcation gas chromatography. Substrate utilization.  Fate of pollutants.
 AMIC-3938
 "AH EVALUATION OF THE GASPAK SYSTEM IK THE CULTURE Of AHAERQBIC BACTERIA",  Collee,
 J. 0., Watt, B., Fowler, E. B., Brown, R., Journal of Applied Bacteriology, Vol.  35,
 Bo. 1, March 1972, pp 71-82.               	

           The efficiency of the Gaspak-system in comparison with a standard anaerobic
j Jar procedure vas Investigated.  The Gaspak envelope vas prepared and Its contents
I placed Into a jar for Incubation.  Commercial vacuum gauges,  simple mercury manometers,
j and large manometers vere used for measurement of pressures,  and the  evolution  of gas
I was measured In separate water displacement studies.  Total counts of bacteria  were
 performed by phase contrast microscopy and viable counts with a spread plate method.
 Comparable results vere obtained with the comnerclally available disposable system for
 the production of H2 and C02 in an anaerobic Jar (the Gaspak  system)  and vlth the
 standard anaerobic Jar procedure.  Both systems were used vlth the Baird and Tatloek
 anaerobic Jar and a room temperature catalyst.  The test organisms Included strict
 anaerobes ouch as Clostrldlum oedematlens type D and C_l.  tetanl.   Comparative tests
 were also made vita Bacteroldes species from laboratory stock cultures and  with freshly
 Isolated strains of Bacterolde?.  On occasion,  higher recoveries vere obtained  vith the
 standard system when relatively demanding models vere set up  but It has limitations,
 having been developed Initially for research purposes.  The Gaspak system probably
 gives more reliable and more reproducible results In a laboratory In  which  experience
 vlth strict anaerobes is Halted or sporadic.

 IKDQC TERMS:  Cultures,  Anaerobic bacteria,  Methodology,  Evaluation,  Laboratory tests,
       Efficiencies,  Gases,  Measurement, Water pollution,  Pollutant identification,
       Gaspak anaerobic procedure,  Recovery,  Spread plate method,  Anaerobic  jar  procedure,
 AMIC-3873     	
 "MICROBIOLOGY-EETECTIOH AHD OCCURRENCE OF VIRUSES",  Berg,  G.,  Journal Water Pollution
 Control Federation, Vol. W», Bo. 6,  June 1972,  pp 1193-1J98.
           A literature review is presented which deals vlth the methods of viral
 removal from large volumes of water, wastes,  and shellfish.  Of all the methods
 employed for viral removal, filtration techniques have been most extensively  studied.
 Membrane filtration techniques Involve the use of cellulose-nitrate membrane  filters,
 adsorption onto collodion membranes, aluminum hydroxide-cellulose nitrate  filters
 and alglnat* membranes.  Sane of the viruses  Isolated Tjy these techniques  are polio-
 viruses, echoviruses,  coxsacklevlruses,  and collpbage T3>

 INDEX TERMS:  Methodology, Viruses,  Pollutant identification,  Conforms, Water
       pollution sources,  Blolndlcators,  E, coll,  Shellfish,  Filtration,  Isolation,
       Sewage,  Microorganisms,  Laboratory equipment, Public  health, Bacterlophage, Waste
       water (pollution),  Effluents,  Efficiencies, Water  pollution, Recovery,  Detection,
       Mercenarla nereenarla,  Poliovlrus,  Echovirus, Reovlrus,  Coxsacklevlrus,
       Membrane filtration,  Membrane  filters, Blue-green  algal viruses, Enterovlrus.
 AMIC-3939
 "AN APPARATUS FOR DOSDO LABORATORY FERMENTERS WITH SUSPENSIONS", Owens, J. D.,
 Evans,  M. R., Journal of Applied Bacteriology, Vol. 35, Ho. 1, March  1972, pp 91-97.

           The construction and operation of an apparatus for dosing laboratory fermenters
 semlcontlnuously with suspensions Is described.  The apparatus periodically measures
 a volume  of slurry and then  injects It Into the fermenter.  A control unit determines
 how often the cycle of operations Is performed,  in order to determine the amount of
 variation in the  concentration and volume of the aliquots of suspension delivered by
 the dosing unit,  successive  amounts were collected In flasks and the  concentration of
 total solids vas  determined  after drying at 105 degrees.  To find out whether the
 volume  delivered changed due to build up of material on the internal  surfaces of the
 measure over a 2U  h period,  delivered volumes vere collected on each  of 2 successive
 days.   The concentration of  the  suspension vas measured at the start  and the end of
 the trial to check that it had not changed.  The results of the trial showed that the
 coefficient of variation for the concentrations of the delivered samples was U.3 percent
 and that  the mean  concentration of the delivered suspension did not differ significantly
 from that of the suspension  in the reservoir.  The coefficient of variation for the
 volumes of the aliquots was  3.3 percent and the mean volume delivered vas similar on
 both days of the trial.

 LNDEX TERMS:  Instrumentation, Laboratory equipment, Cultures, Design, Fermentation,
      Slurries, Automatic  control, Dissolved oxygen, Microbiology, Suspended solids,
      Culturtng vessels, Performance evaluation, Culture media.

-------
3.
                                                                                                METOPES
 AMTC-39AO
j "A METHOD FOR THE RAPID EKUMERATIOH OF MYCOPLASHA SPECIES GROfDKJ III BROTH CULTURE",
i Windsor, R. S., Boarer, C. D. H., Journal of Tilled Bacteriology, Vol. 35, Ho. 1,
• March  1972, PP 37-te.             -

           The relationship of the mean lactate dehydrogenase (IDH) content of each
, organism to the number of viable organisms present proved to be a suitable method
; for  the enumeration of Mycoplasma spp. in a growing culture.  Newlngs tryptos* broth
i and  tryptose-serum agar were used for diluting organises and for colony counts,
, respectively.  The previously described method for determining LDH In cultures
; required spectrophotcnetrlc measurements of the decrease in absorption at 366 nm of
I NADH when It was oxidized by LDH in the presence of sodium pyruvate.  Measurements
j of LDH vere made on aliquots of the culture before and after disruption was only of
| value when cells were growing In the logarithmic phase.
                "TRACK SIBEHTS FOR GROWTH AHD BULBIFORMIH PRODUCTIOH BY BACILLUS SUBTILIS"
                M.,  Journal of Applied Bacteriology, Vol. 35, No. 1, March 1972, PP 1-5.
Mahnood,
 INDEX TERMS:  Methodology, Cultures, Measurement, Microorganisms, Spectrophotometry,
       Pollutant Identification, Freeze- thaw tests, Mycoplasraa spp, Enumeration,
       Culture media, Lactate dehydrogenase, Mycoplasma mycoides var mycoides.
                         The effects  of trace  elements on the growth and antiblobtic (bulblformin)
                production of Bacillus aubtllls were determined using cells, grown on basal medium
                containing dextrose  as a carbon source  They were exposed to various amounts of
                boron,  copper,  iron, molybdenum,  and zinc or combinations of these.  The elements
                Mn and Fe, both alone  and together, had a marked effect on growth and bulblformin
                production by Bacillus subtills.  Copper, with Fe and/or Mn had a deleterious effect
                on antibiotic production,  whereas Cu plus Zn as well as Mo plus B slightly Increased
                the antibiotic produced over that obtained with Fe plus Mn.  The optimum requirement
                of Fe was 20 p/m  for both growth  and antibiotic activity.  The requirement of Mn
                for maximum  growth was higher (2  p/m) than that for antibiotic activity (1 p/m).

                INDEX TERMS:   Trace  elements,. Antibiotics (pesticides), Water pollution effects,
                     Hutrlent requirements, Growth, Manganese, Copper, Iron, Molybdenum, £lnc,
                     Bioassay, Cultures,  Fungi,  Iron, Cobalt, Boron, Heavy metals, Inorganic
                     compounds,  Aerobic bacteria, Bacillus subtllis, Bulblformin, Alternaria tenuls.
 AMIC-39IU
 "FLUORESCENT SPECTHUmritMBTKY lit THE IDENTIFICATION OF BACTERIA",  Glnell, R.,
 Feuchtbaum, R. J., Journal of Applied Bacteriology,  Vol. 35,  Ho.  1,  March 1972,
 pp 29-36.          ———_—_	

           A fluorescent spectrophotometrlc technique for identifying bacteria involves
 using emission wavelength,  excitation wavelength,  and Intensity to  produce a topographic
 map characteristic of the fluorescence of the chemical bonds.   Bacteria that had been
 cultured, washed,  centrlfuged and suspended In  phosphate buffer were analyzed using a
 spectrophotofluorometer.   The raw curves obtained were used to  construct spectrofluoro-
 metrlc maps by recording  successive scans of intensity versus emission wavelength for
 Intervals of 10 at In excitation wavelengths of 200-800 nm.   Data obtained with
 Eschertehla coll and Sarclna lutea showed the fluorescent portions  of the bacteria to be
 lnherently~
-------
                                                                            3.  MICROBIOIflGICAL METHODS
i
AMIC-3957
"THE IDENTIFICATIOS OF STREPTOCOCCI BY GAS-LIQUID CHROMATOJRAPHY", Drucker,  D. B.,
Microblos. Vol. 5. Ho. 18, March/April 1972, pp 109-112.

          Ten strains of Streptococcus were Identified by gas-liquid chromatographlc
(GIC) analysis which revealed patterns characteristic of fatty acid methyl esters
produced by individual strains.  Cells were grown on oxold brain-heart infusion,  with
glucose as the carbon source.  After growth, methyl esters of cells were produced
by sealing 10 mg dry cells and 1 ml methylatlng reagent into ampoules under vacuum
and heating to 100 degrees C for 3 hrs.  Methyl esters were then extracted with 10
ml petroleum spirit (UO-60 degrees C), and 3-mlcrollter samples were analyzed by
gas-llquld chronatography.

IKDEX TERfC:  Streptococcus, pollutant Identification,  Gas chrcoatography, Separation
      techniques, Cultures, Esters, Isolation,  Llplds,  Organic compounds, Methodology,
      Aerobic bacteria.  Gas liquid chromatography,  Characterization,  Antelso-
      pentadecacanoate,  Oleate, Stearate, Palmltoleate,  Palmltate, Methylatlon (chemical]
             	
 "A STUDY OF THERM3PHILIC AEROBIC SPOREFORMHIG BACTERIA  ISOLATED FROM SOIL AMD WATER",
 Harris, 0., Fields,  M.  L.,  Canadiaan Journal  of Microbiology, Vol. 18, Bo. 6, June 1972,
 PP 917-923.

           Thirty-three  strains of thermophlllc, aerobic,  spore-forming bacteria
 Isolated from soil and  vater vere studied by  classical  bacteriological methods and
 by the percent guanlne  plus cytoslne (percent GC)  In their DMA.  For temperature
 studies all organisms vere  grown at 55  degrees; to determine nuclmum growth temperatures
 tests vere run at 55 C  and  at  5 degree  Intervals until  no growth occurred.  Percent
 GC was determined by a  previously described method.  The  cultures fell Into two groups
 based upon percent GC.   There  vere 12 strains with percent GC of 52-53.1 which were
 characteristic of Bacillus  stearothermophllus.  These strains vere also classifiable
 a» B. stearothermophllua by~classlcal determinative bacteriological methods except
 three vere acldurlc. TOe other 21 strains  had percent GC ranging from 38.8 to 1*3.9
 with a mean percent  GC  of U2.0U.   Ten strains of the 21 could be B. coagulana by
 classical determinative bacteriological methods but not by percent GC"!The other 11
 strains vere not determinable  by current  classical determinative keys.  These strains
 may be thermophlllc  variants of mesophillc  species.

 INDEX TEEMS:  Aerobic bacteria, Thermophillc  bacteria, Spores, Hydrogen Ion concen-
       tration,  Cultures,  Water pollution  sources.  Pollutant Identification, Temperature,
       Soil bacteria,  Aquatic bacteria,  Laboratory  tests, Growth, Characterization,
       Guanlne,  Cytoslne,  UNA,  Bacillus  stearothermophllus, Bacillus coagulans. Bio-
       chemical tests, Standard methods, Substrate  utilization. Culture media.
 W4IC-U012
 "PHYSIOLOGICAL ABD MORPHOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF FHEBETHYL ALCOHOL UFOH A GRAM-SBGATIVE
 MARINE PSEUDOMCHAD", Thompson, J., DeVoe, I. W., Canadian Journal of Microbiology,
 Vol. 18, Ho. 6, June 1972, pp 81*1-852.           	—

           The effects of phenethyl alcohol (PEA) upon a gram-negative marine
 pseudononad were studied In order to determine the primary target of PEA at the
 cellular level.  Phase contrast and electron microscopic and freeze-etchlng techniques
 vere used to examine the morphological and physiological changes caused by PEA.  Sodium
 and potassium as veil as C-lU alpha-aainolsobutyrlc acid (AIB) vere used as Indicators
 of PEA-lnduced changes In membrane permeabilities.  PEA (0.15 percent v/y) Inhibited
 the organisms growth; however,  after removal of PEA the cells remained viable  even
 when pre-exposed to PEA concentrations as high as 0.25  percent (v/v).  PEA concentrations
 of 0.25  percent or lesa inhibited AIB uptake unless potassium was added to the uptake
 system.  Both AIB and potassium vere lost from preloaded cells after addition  of  PEA.
 It seems likely that the inhibition of cell  growth by PEA la due to two major  causes:
 (1) direct  Interference of the  compound with the normal physiological functions of
 the cytoplasmlc  membrane and, (2) 'PEA Induced structural changes occurring within the
 cell envelope.
INDEX TERMS:  Pseudomonas, Marine bacteria, Vater pollution effects, Organic compounds.
      Marine microorganisms. Growth rates, Absorption, Electron microscopy. Physical
      properties, Radiochemlcal analysis, Carbon radloisotopes, Blolndlcators,  Sodium,
      Potassium, Inhibition, Membrane processes, Amino acids. Aerobic bacteria,
      Phenethyl alcohol. Characterization, Alpha-amlnolsobutyrlc acid, C-lU, Freeze
      etching technique, Pseudomonads, Bacterial physiology.
                                                                                      _
AMIC-U015
"DISTPlBUnOH OF CDDSTMDtlM BOTULCTIM TYPE E IN THE GULF OF ST.
                                       R. A.,
                                                                                          TO THE PHYSICAL EHVIKHJMENT" , Laycock, R. A., Lorlng,
                                                                                          Microbiology, Vol.  18, Bo.  6, June  1972, pp 763-773.
                                                                 IAWRENCE IK RELATION
                                                      D. H., Canadian Journal of
          Three hundred ninety sediment samples vere collected June-September 1970
from the Gulf of St. Lawrence and the lower reaches of the St. Lawrence River In order
to determine the distribution of Clostrldium botullnum type E .  The samples vere
collected with gravity corers and a pipe dredge, placed in sterile polyethylene bags
and refrigerated until analysis.  About 10 g of sediment was Inoculated Into a
supplemented (glucose, peptone, tryptlcase, yeast extract) cooked meat medium In
60 eu em bottles and Incubated at 25 degrees C for 5 days In a 95 percent nitrogen,
5 percent carbon-dioxide atmosphere.  Sub samples of Incubated medium were centrlfuged
and the presence of toxic material detected by mouse intraperttoneal Injection of 0.5
ml of supernate diluted l»:l with gelatin-phosphate buffer.  Samples, lethal to mice
•within U8 h, vere further tested for specific toxins of C_. botullnum.  C. botullnum
was shown to be present in high high Incidence In some areas while it appeared to be
absent from others.  Bo other types of C. botullnum were encountered.  The results
Indicate a close correlation between patterns of terrigenous sedimentation and of
distribution of C. botullnum type E.

INDEX TERMS:  Sediments,  Sea water, Distribution patterns, Ecological distribution,
      Clostridlum, Cultures, Sampling,  Rivers,  Marine bacteria,  Geographical regions,
      Estuaries,  Water flow, Geomorphology, Toxlclty,  Public health, Aquatic soils,
      Vater pollution, Pathogenic bacteria, St. Lawrence River,  Clostridlum botullnum,
      Biochemical tests,  Gulf of St. Lawrence.

-------
                                                                            3.  mCHQBICICQICAL METHODS
AHIC-UQ36
 "HETEROTROPHIC NITRIFICATION BY ARTHROBACTER sp.", Verstraete, W., Alexander, M.,
Journal of Bacteriology,  Vol. llO',  No.  3, June  1972, pp 955-961.
I
!           Arthrobacter sp., isolated from sewage, oxidized ammonium to hydroxylamine,
; a bound hydroxylamfneccnipound, a hydroxamlc acid, a substance presumed to be a prUnary
 nitro conpound, nitrite, and nitrate.  The concentration of free hydroxylamlne-nltrogen
; reached 15 micrograms/ml.  the identification of hydroxylamine was verified by Bass
, spectroaetrlc analysis of ite benzophenone oxlne derivative.  The bound hydroxylamine
 vas tentatively Identified as 1-nitrosoethanol on the basis of Its mass spectnn
I chemical reactions, and infrared and ultraviolet spectra.  Hydroxylamine formation  by
j growing cells vas relatively Independent of pH,  but the accumulation of nitrite vas
 strongly favored In alkaline solutions.  The formation of hydroxylamine but not nitrite
 vas regulated by the carbon to nitrogen ratio of the medium.  The hydroxamlc acid vas
I the dominant product of nitrification In iron-deficient media,  but hydroxylamine,
 nitrite,  and 1-nltrosoethanol formation vas favored in iron-rich solutions.   Heterotro-
 phlc nitrification by Arthrobaeter sp.  vas not Inhibited by several compounds at con-
 centrations vhich totally inhibited autotrophic  nitrification.

 IMIEt TERMS:  Nitrification,  Ammonia, Nitrites,  Nitrates, Mass  spectrometry, Methodology,
       Nutrients,  Chemical  reactions, Organic  compounds, Ammonium compounds, Nitrogen
       cycle, hydrogen Ion  concentration,  Iron, Carbon, Nitrogen,  Deficient elements,
       Environmental effects,  Cultures,  Sewage bacteria, Pollutant identification,
       Inhibition,  Heterotrophic bacteria, Arthrobacter, Culture media. Enrichment,
       Hydroxylamlne,  Benzophenone oxlme,  1-nltrosoethanol, Substrate utilization,
      Mass  spectra.  Infrared  spectra.
AMIC-5233
"THE EFFECT OF COMPOUNDS CONTAINING AMIHO GROUPS ON MICROBIAL GROWTH IN THE MEDIUM
WITH OIL FUEL", Vishniakova, T. P., Vlasova, I. D., Grechushkina, N. N., et. al.,
Mlkroblologlya, Vol. In, No. 1, January/February 1972, PP 73-76.

           The inhibition of microblal growth by water soluble amino compounds voo
studied in a water-fuel system.  A 100 percent inhibition of growth was found when
O.OU percent 1,2-dlaminopropane or hexamethylene diamlne, 0.12 percent ethylene
dlsnlne,  hydroxylamine chloride or acid methylemine tartrate, O.l6 percent
trlmethylamine or N-butylamlne was added to the water-mineral phase.  A 98 percent
growth inhibition vas found upon addition of 0.08 percent N-butylamlne, ethylene
diamine,  hydroxylamine chloride or methylamine oxalate and a 96 percent growth
Inhibition vas observed with N-heptylamine.  Dlmethylamine, m-phenylene diamine and
methylamine tartrate caused partial growth inhibition.  Urea, p-amino-sallcyllc aclde
and dimethylnmlne chloride at concentrations of O.OU-0.l6 percent did not Inhibit the
growth.   The majority of active compounds altered the initial pH of the water phase
(6.9-7.2) to the  acidic (U-5) or alkaline (9-10) values.  The compounds with a low
inhibiting effect or manifesting no activity almost did not change pH of the water phase
(in Russian)

INDEX TERMS:  Cultures, Fuels, Growth, Oil, Organic compounds, Pseudomonas, Methodology,
       Microbiology, Pollutant identification. Water pollution effects. Hydrogen ion
       concentration, Nitrogen compounds, Microorganisms, Environmental effects, Amines,
       Cladoaporium resinae, Pseudomonas pyocyanea. Urea, Characterization.
 "EFFECT OF AUDIO ACIDS ON THE GROWTH OF ACETOBACTER SUBOXYDANS", Belly, R. T., Claus
 0. W.,  Archlv fur mkroblologle. Vol. 63.  Ko.  j, April  W\>, pp 237-2U5.

           The role of amlno acids  in the nutrition of Aeetobacter suboxydana ATCC
 021  has been considered and an assessment  made of the relative  capacity of the
 organism for amlno acid biosynthesis.   Cells were grown on a chemically defined
banal medium,  to vhich were added  amlno acids.  Changes in growth rates were
noted and recorded graphically.  A chemically defined medium containing no amlno
acids supported cellular growth.   Growth vas stimulated by the addition of either
glutamate, glutamine, alpha-ketoglutarate, proline, hlstidlne, and to a lesser extent
by the addition of  either glyclne, hydroxyprollne, or mesaconate.

m»C TERMS:  Amlno acids, Cultures, Nutrient requirements,  Growth,  Growth rates,
      Ammonium compounds,  Organic compounds. Nutrients,  Water pollution effects,
      Inhibition, Acid bacteria,  Aeetobacter suboxydans, Biosynthesis,  Substrate
      utilization.
AMIC-5237
"THE ASSIMILATION OF MONOCARBON COMPOUNDS BY PSEUDOMQNAS SP. 2"
Trotzenko, Yu. A., Kondratleva, E. N.,  Mlkrobiologlya,  Vol.  tl.
February 1972, pp 5-10.
                                                               ,  Kirikova, N. N.,
                                                                No. 1, January-
          The cell suspensions of Pseudononas sp. 2, capable for the growth on media
with ethanol and formiate, actively fixed C-1H from these substrates as well as
C-1UO2.  Hypophosphite and fluoroacetate Inhibited the incorporation of C-lU from
methanol, formaldehyde and formiate.  Formaldehyde inhibited the incorporation of C-lU
In the cells from methanol and formiate.  Sulphanllamide inhibited the bacterial growth
in the presence of methanol.  When the cells were exposed to C-lU-methanol for a short
time, the label vas detected in malic and fumarlc acids, serine, glyclne, aspartlc and
glutamic acids.  Therefore, Pseudomonas sp. 2 assimilated carbon from monocarbon
compounds after their oxidation to CO2 and on a higher reduced level.  The second pro-
cess seems to proceed with the participation of tetrahydrofolate and reactions of the
tricarboxyllc acid cycle.  The functioning of this cycle in Pseudomonas sp. 2 is
confirmed by the presence of malate debydrogenase, isocltrate dehydrogenase, succlnate
dehydrogenase and alpha-ketoglutarate dehydrogenase.  (in Russian)

LNliX TERMS:  Organic compounds, Pseudomonas, Cultures, Growth,  Enzymes, Aerobic
      bacteria, Oxidation, Chemical reactions, Inhibition, Antibiotics, (pesticides),
      Organic acids,  Amlno acids, Carbon,  Radioactivity techniques,  Carbon radio-
      isotopes, Substrate utilization, Assimilation, Hydrocarbons, Culture media,
      Characterization, Fate of pollutants.
                                                                                      53

-------
                                                                            3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHOTK
 "EVAIUATIOH OF BEHSULIDE FOR MOTAGEHIC PROPERTIES IH JOCROBIAL TEST SYSTEM",  Andersen,
 K. 3., Cutala, A. J., Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry,  Vol. 20, Ho. 3,
 May/June 1972, PP 656-65°^

           The frequency of mutations In the T-* bacterlophage/ E.  coll B ayst*» vas
 measured in order to determine mutagenlc properties of the herbicide,  benoullde, as
 veil as sodium chloride, acetone, and 5- brooouracll.  The procedure Involved sub-
 jecting the bacterlophage-E. coll system to the chemicals and statistically analyzing
 the frequency of rll-type mutants.  The data obtained were subjected to distribution
 analysis using the chl-square test for Polsson distribution variables.  Although
 acetone and bensullde caused slight Increases In mutation rates over a control, there
 vas not sufficient data to show the mutagenlclty of bensulide.

 INDEX TERMS:  E. coll, Herbicides, Bacterlophage,  Evaluation,  Chemical properties,
       Water pollution sources,  Testing,  Statistics,  Methodology, Statistical  methods,
       Water pollution effects,  Mutagenlcity,  Bensullde,  5-bronouracll,  Acetone,
       Sodium chloride.
See also:  Category 1, AMIC-3373
           Category 2, AMIC-3590.

-------
                                                                      k.  METHODS AND PERFCKMAHCE EVALUATIOH
 AMIC-3612
 "A REAPPRAISAL OF HEEDHAM AND USIMGER'S DATA ON THE VARIABILITY OF A STREAM FAUHA WHEH
 SAMPLED WITH A SURBER SAMPLER", Clutter, F.  M.,  Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 17,
 Ho. 1,  January 1972,  pp 139-lbl.

             In 1956,  Needham and Usinger reported on the collection of 100 faunal
 samples using  a Surber square foot  sampler to  determine the variability of  results.
 In that study, they concluded that  73  samples  would be necessary to give significant
 figures on total numbers at a 95 percent level of  confidence.  Data are presented
 here to show that this conclusion,  which has node  a mjor Impact on limnology, Is
 erroneous.   It la concluded that W»8 samples are required to give a sample  mean
 within  5  percent of the population  at  a 95 percent confidence level.  Data  from
 sampling  sites where  the sampling apparatus  Is totally submerged are particularly
 variable.

 INDEX TERMS:  Statistical methods.  Sampling, Aquatic animals. Mathematical  studies.
      Streams, Variability, Estimating, Counting, Analysis of variance, Surber sampler,
      Variance ratios, Data analysis,  Reliability.
 "CUT THE USE Of COHFDEHCE RBBIOKS TO TEST HYPOTHESES",  Jones, D. A., Karson, M. J.,
 Journal of Quality Technology.  Vol.  k,  Bo.  3,  July  1972,  pp 156-158.

              The relationship between the test of equality for  two population means
 and the intersection of confidence Intervals for  two means has  been previously developed
 and Is Important In relating confidence interval  estimations to tests of hypotheses.
 An alternative procedure is presented here, based on the  best confidence region for
 the quantity (ma sub 1,  ma sub  2).  This alternative extends naturally for those cases
 when the standard deviation is  unknown  and/or  the equality of more than two means  Is
 being tested.  A graph of the confidence regions  and suggestions for Its use are given.

 IHDEX TERMS:  Testing procedures.  Statistical  methods,  Mathematical studies, Analytical
       techniques,  Testing,  Evaluation,  Hypothesis,  Confidence Interval, Standard
       deviation.
AMIC-362U
"UKELIHOCD ANALYSIS OF THREE-WAY COHTI1IGEBCY TABLES", Llndsey, J. K., Bash, F. W.,
Journal Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Vol. 29, Ho. 5. May 1972, pp 590-591.

             The three-way contingency table Is considered aa an analysis of variance
problem.  Since the appropriate distribution Is Bultlncnlal rather than normal, the
log •Miro'Himoa ratios are used to make Inferences Instead of the variance ratios.  Two
specific examples of such an analysis are cited.  In one, three methods of sampling
organisms on the bottom of a stream were compared.  In the second, an analysis was
run to determine if length-age frequency tables for a given species of fish for a
number of samples taken in 1 week could be combined.  An IBM computer program for the
analysis discussed Is available.

IHDEX TERMS:  Statistical methods, Mathematical1studies, Distribution patterns.
      Sampling, Analytical techniques, Benthos, Fish, Computer programs. Three way
      contingency tables, Contingency tables. Analysis of variance. Variance ratios,
      Miltlnomlal distribution. Counting.
 "SIHSLE SAMPLDC PLABS GIVEH AH AQL, LTPD, PRODUCER AHD CONSUMER RISKS", Snyder, D. C.,
 Storer, R. F., Journal of Quality Technology, Vol. U, Ho. 3, July 1972, pp 168-171.

             A computer program Is discussed which considers the Polsson distribution in
 determining the acceptable quality level (AQL) by a single sampling plan.  The problem
 considers a specified AQL associated with a producer's risk.  Determination of a
 single nnmpllng plan meeting these requirements Is desired.  The four parameters
 determine a cenblnatlOB of non-Integer values for the sample size (n) and acceptance
 number (c).  The computer program discussed determines four sampling plans with a
 constant c value.  The first of these minimizes deviation from the specified consumer's
 risk, thfS~second minimizes deviation from the producer's risk, and the other two
minimize the weighted sum and the ratio of the two risks, respectively.

 IHDEX TERMS: 'Statistical methods. Quality control. Mathematical studies, Distribution,
      Probability,  Sampling, Computer programs, Reliability, Acceptable quality level.
      Acceptability, Acceptance testing, Polsson distribution.
                                                                                    55

-------
                                                                       U.  METHODS AMD PERFORMAHCE
  AMICJlO37
  "BAYESIAH OPTIMEZATIOH IH SAMPLIHG FIHUE POPULATIONS", Rao,  J.  H,  K.,  Ghangurde,  P. D.,
  Journal of the American Statistical Association, Vol. 57, No. 338,  June 1972,  pp t»39-
  553:
               The problem of optimum allocation In •Mr'Hf»e finite populations using
  prior Information is considered.  Ibe following cases are Investigated:   (1) stratified
  staple randosi sampling with known strata sizes; (2) Keynan's double nMgOlfe with
  unknown strata sizes; (3) the Hansen-Hurvltz method for the non-response problem;
  (U) two-stage random sampling.  The optimum allocation In each case is obtained by
  minimizing the expected posterior variance of the mean subject to constraints.  The
  results are extended to multiple prior distributions and/or multiple characters.  The
  solutions are distribution-free and also free from the assumption of infinite popula-
  tions and/or known variances.  Attention Is given to 'data-based' prior  distributions.

  INDEX TERMS:  Sampling, Population, Finite element analysis,  fothematlcal studies,
        Algorithm, Optimization, Data collections. Methodology, Statistical methods,
        Variability, Size, Bayeslan optimization, Random
A-
 "ESTIMWIIIQ ERRORS IH EXPERMMTAL DATA", Blair, J. M., Instruments and Control Systems,
 Vol. 1*5, »o. 5, Hsy 1972, PP 95-97.

             A numerical technique based on finite differences for estimating errors
 in experimental data is presented.  Finite differences for five experimental points
 are formed In a finite difference table using given nomenclature.  Tables are also
 given for finite differences for an experimental function, for differences consisting
 of error terms only, for confidence limits, and for normalized estimates of variance.
 An example is presented to Illustrate the technique.

 INDEX TERMS:  Statistical methods, numerical analysis, Estimating, Mithenatieal
      studies. Finite element analysis, Variability, Experimental error, Errors,
      Analysis of variance. Data analysis, Confidence Halt.
  AMICJKD38
  "PARTIALLY BALA1KED DESIGSS FOR HALF SAMPLE BEPUCATHW KTHOD OF VARIANCE ESTDftTXOH",
  Lee,  K-fl.,  Journal of the American Statistical Association, Vol. £7, Ho. 338,
  June  1972,  pp 32»-33*.

               Half sample replication has been used as a method for estimating variances
  in stratified sampling whereby two primary selections are drawn from each stratum.
  This  article  considers some procedures of  Improving the precision of the variance
  estimator computed from a partially balanced set of half samples.  Both the theoretical
  and empirical findings suggest that the SAOA procedure  Is an effective method to employ,
  la particular with a '2-order partially balanced de«10i'.

  UOEX TER>6:   Methodology,  Design, Variability, Estimating, Mathematical studies,
       Statistical models.  Sampling,  Data collections. Population, Regression analysis.
       Efficiencies,  Replication, Precision,  Performance evaluation.
See also:  Category 1, AMC-33U3,  3353
           Category 2, AMIC-3297,

-------
                                                                             5 •
AMZC-196U
"WAX-80UND LEAD DIOXIDE POTEHTIOM2TRIC ELECTRODE AND APPLICATIONS TO CHELOMETBIC
TITRATION", Wang, C. N., Kinlen, P. J., Schoeller, D. A., Huber, C. 0., Analytical
Chemistry. Vol. I4», No. 7, June 1978, pp 1152-1158.

             The effects of pH, buffer, metal ion, and chelon on the shapes of
potentlometric tltration curves obtained with a wax-bound lead dioxide electrode
were evaluated.  Mechanisms of response are proposed and accuracy and precision for
several well established titratlons are presented.  The electrode consists of powdered
lead dioxide Imbedded in high-melting paraffin wax.  Electrical contact in the body
of the electrode is by particle-to-partlcle contact.  The electrode face contains
discrete surface equilibrium reaction sites at which a stable potential is maintained.
Tltration data are presented for a number of metals tni-j^ing Al, Cr, Cd, Cu, Te, Pb,
and Zn.  These data indicate that most metals ordinarily titrated with EDTA >—^ be
determined and the tltratlon curves are not affected by the particular metal being
titrated.  The tltratlon curves obtained for these metals must be interpreted in terms  j
of a pH effect observed when decreased buffer concentrations result in an increase in
potential from initiation to the end point.  At pH 5, a sharp peaked shape »a^«»i«i marks!
the end point, while at pH 10 with suitable procedure a peak shape »ITH«»I» occurs at the!
end point.  Precision and accuracy of titratlon approach 0.1 percent and are charac.    |
teristic of the volumetric apparatus used.   Titratlons may be performed in forward and  '
reverse directions.  By proper selection of solution buffer concentration, titratlons    I
of less than 100 micrograms of metals yield a very distinct end-point signal.  Measured ',
solubilities show that electrode dissolution interferes only slightly for the lowest
concentrations titrated.  Moat common anlons do not Interfere.                           j

INDEX THWS:  Lead dioxide electrode, Chelometrlc tltratlon, Chemical interference,      ;
      Volumetrly »TTiXT"l»t  Measurement.  Heavy metals.  Anlons. Precision.	
                                                                                           AWC-3516                                                                         ~~
                                                                                           "A STUDY OF LKHT ATTENUATION III MONTEHX BAY, CALIFORHIA", Crews, T. W.,  Naval
                                                                                           Postgraduate School, Monterey, California, Mister's Thesis, September 1971,  1^9 pp.
                                                                                           HTK Report Ho. AD 736 119.

                                                                                                        A single ocean station was occupied (using an oceanographic vessel) for
                                                                                           27 hours during the Upvelllng Period In Monterey Bay, California in order  to find the
                                                                                           qualitative relations between alpha and temperature, salinity, density,  oxygen and
                                                                                           phosphate concentrations, and partlculate matter at a single site over an  extended
                                                                                           period of time, and to make comparisons with previous local studies.  A  Mirlne Advisors'
                                                                                           Model C-2 Beam Transmtssometer (alpha meter) which compares favorably with a Scripps
                                                                                           folded path transmissometer was used to study light attenuation.  Other  Instruments
                                                                                           utilized include a Blssett-Berman Telemetering Salinity-Temperature-Depth-Sound Velocity
                                                                                           System Model 9OUO which can be set in various modes of operation depending on the
                                                                                           environmental conditions measured; a Slpplcan Expendable Bathythermograph  System with
                                                                                           an accuracy of plus or minus 0.2 degree C and plus or minus 2 percent or 15  feet, which-
                                                                                           ever is greater; and a Model T 15 -Channel Coulter Counter for parti culate  matter
                                                                                           analysis.  A total of U8 casts were made during the 27-hr period with all  measurements
                                                                                           being taken at the same depths.  It was found that the vertical distributions of the
                                                                                           oceanographic parameters studied are dependent on both the seasonal conditions and geo-
                                                                                           graphical location.  The largest concentration of suspended particles was  found in the
                                                                                           upper 10-1? m of the water column where most of the light attenuation occurred.  The
                                                                                           largest attenuation gradient was found in the pycnocllne.  A linear relation was
                                                                                           suggested between the attenuation coefficient and the cumulative projected cross-
                                                                                           sectional area of the particles.
                                                                                           INDEX TEFMS:  Sea water. Instrumentation, On-site tests,  Physical properties,  Chemical
                                                                                          _ properties, Attenuation, Light, Upwelllng,  Monterey Bay,  Partlculate matter. _
 AMIC-3132
 "SULFATE lOH-SELECTIVE1 MEMBRANE ELECTBQDE", Rechnltz, G. A., Frlcke, G. H., Mohan,
 M. S., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. Wt, No. 6, May 1972, pp 1098-1099.

              An electrode with good response and selectively for the sulfate ion which
 was relatively easy to prepare In the laboratory has properties which suggest that It
 should be useful for analytical purposes.  A number of compositions gave membranes with
 Bulfate response and greater or lesser sulfate selectlvltles, but optimum results were
 obtained with membranes consisting of 32 mole percent Ag2S, 31 mole percent PbS, 32 mole
 percent PhSOb, and 5 mole percent Cu2S.  The most successful membranes were formed by
 pressing with an applied pressure of 102,000 pounds per square Inch for 18 boors at
 temperatures of up to 300 C.  The electrode yields a nearly Nernstlan slope of 29 milli-
 volts per decade over a fairly vide range of sulfate activity and displays appreciable
 selectivity for sulfate over a wide variety of common univalent anlons.  The electrode
 employed reached stable potential values in less than one minute for sulfate concentra-
 tions of .001 M and above.  For practical purposes, where empirical calibration curves
 are constructed or experiments are carried oat at constant Ionic strength, the electrode
 should be useful at least over the 0.1-0.0001 M sulfate range.   Although the inter-
 ference  of  the three hallde ions (chloride,  bromide,  iodide) tested appears to be
 related  to  the solubilities of the corresponding silver salts,  It is not meaningful to
 compute  numerical selectivity ratios for the ions tested on the basis of the present
 data.  Calibration curves were also constructed using sulfate salts with noncoBplexlng
 cations  of various types and charges.   The fact that these calibration curves were
 Identical In slope and potential,  Indicates that the electrode Is not responsive to
noncomplsxlng (e.g.,  alkali metal or alkaline earth)  cations.   Preliminary experiments
carried out as a  function of solution pB shoved little pH effect In the pH 3-10 range.
                                                                                         AMC-3529
                                                                                         "SEMUHTEGRAL ELECTROAKALYSIS:  THEORY AMD VERIFICATICir, Grenness, M., Oldbam, K. B.,
                                                                                         Analytical Chemistry, Vol. W», No. 1, June 1972, pp 1121-1129.

                                                                                                       The theory of a new analytical method, semllntegral electroanalysls, is
                                                                                         described in detail and an experimental verification of the theory is presented.  The
                                                                                         theory describes the properties of m, the semllntegral of the faradaic current which
                                                                                         flows  when complete diffusion control follows a preexisting equilibrium.  According to
                                                                                         the predictions of the  theory, m will be proportional to the concentration of the
                                                                                         electrcactive species,  to the square root of its diffusion coefficient, to the number of
                                                                                         electrons Involved, and to the area of the electrode.  The theory has been verified.
                                                                                         Studies using the reduction of «•*•<«• and 02 at a mercury electrode demonstrate
                                                                                         that the  the  semllntegral electroanalysls method is valid for the measurement of
                                                                                         concentrations and diffusion coefficients, and possess a number of novel and potentially
                                                                                         attractive features.  The advantages of the technique are attributed to the independence
                                                                                         of the voltamnetry from time or frequency.  This leads to the Independence of m(tau)in
                                                                                         the font  of the applied signal and permits a large series resistor in the circuit
                                                                                         without impairing the analysis.  An analog technique permitting direct measurement of
                                                                                         m (t)  is  being developed, which will give semllntegral electroanalysls a marked
                                                                                         advantage over other voltammetric methods.

                                                                                         INDEX  TERMS:  Electrodes, Chemical analysis. Electrochemistry, Analytical techniques,
                                                                                                Anlons, Cations, Cadmium, Instrumentation, Computer programs, Mathematical studies,
                                                                                                Analog  computers, Kinetics, Electroreductlon, Electroanalysls, Semllntegral
                                                                                                electroanalysls. Mercury electrodes, Voltammetry.
               Sulfates, Selectivity. Membrane electrodes. Ion selective electrodes.
                                                                                      57

-------
                                                                             5.  IHSTRUHEHT nijVTlCPMEMT
 AMIC-3537
 "MEASUJEMSNTS OF VERY LOW OXTOEH TENSIONS Ilf UHSTIFFED LIQUIDS"
 Analytical Chemistry. Vol. W», No. 7, June 1972, pp 1258-1263.
Koch, C. J., Kruuv, J.,
              A number of problems have been encountered in using a ccnmercial membrane -
 covered, polarographlc oxygen micro electrode.  The sources of the large zero currents
 have been analyzed and found to be attributable to various physical factors.   The
 single greatest cause has been found to be water vapor which was eliminated by using a
 deslccant In the measuring chamber.  Membrane application and dissolved oxygen In the
 body of the electrode were also Important especially with respect to long-term
 sensitivity and zero current stability.  Through the solution of these problems the
 useful range of the oxygen cathode has been extended to less than 50 parts per million
 In gases or about 0.06 mlcromole In liquids.

 INDEX TERM3:  Measurement, Liquids, Instrumentation, Dissolved oxygen.  Pressure,  Water
       vapor, Laboratory equipment, Membrane processes,  Electrodes,  Nitrogen,  Carbon
       dioxide, Polarographlc analysis, Oxygen electrodes,  Oxygen tension.
AMIC-U001
 "INSTRUMENTATION FOR OCEANOGRAPHIC RESEARCH", Cromer, E. G. , Electronics Instrumenta-
tion Digest, Vol. 8, No. k, April 1972, pp 9-19.

             Oceanographlc research has begun to use electronic Instruments for
measuring a large number of parameters.  The use of such Instruments makes it possible
to gather large  amounts of data on a global basis.  Formerly, in the Interest of
accuracy, most data were recorded within Instrument packages or sensors and were
available only after the package had been brought back to the surface.  Modern elec-
tronic techniques make It possible to provide signal-conditioning circuitry right at the
transducer location, and the signals enn be converted into forms that can be transmitted
to a central data-acquisition facility with no loss in accuracy.  One of the outstanding
problems facing  oceanographers today is that of obtaining equipment that Is suited to -
If not designed  for  - the marine environment.  Instruments that need perform only in
the relative serenity of shipboard environment must be capable of taking line voltage
variations of as much as plus or minus 20 V, and frequency variations as great as plus
or minus 3 Hz in stride without hiccuplng.  They may also have to tolerate voltage
spikes of Uo V or more, without suffering any 111 effects.  Temperature and humidity
extremes, as veil as salt atmosphere, pose further survival problems.  Even when
instruments can be confined to air-conditioned quarters, they must still manage to
survive continuous vlbration-and low-frequency vibration. In particular.  Some of the
Oceanographlc programs In progress Include (1) marine charting, (2) estuarlne pollution-
measurement/control, (3) data buoy program, (U) FLARE project, and (5) naval
Oceanographlc research.  In order to obtain the massive amounts of data necessary to
understand the earth's oceans, a pragmatic approach in building reliable Instruments
has been suggested.
 AMIC-UOOO
 "OH THE DEPOSITION AHD DISSOLUTION OF ZINC  IN ALKALINE SOLOTIONS", Bockrls, J. O'M,
 Hagy, Z., Damjanovlc,  A.,  Journal of the Electrochemical Society, Vol. 119, No. 3,
 March 1972, pp 285-295.

              The  zlnc/KCH-zlncate electrode reaction was Investigated at room tempera-
 ture under high purity conditions with galvanostatic and potentlostatlc transient
 techniques In the 0.1-3.0  M KOH and 0.0001-0.5 M zlncate concentration range.  The
 exchange current  density was found to be between 8 and 370 mA/sq cm, with IiO mV/decade
 anodic  and 120 mV/decade cathodlc nominal Tafel  slopes;  an overpotentlal range of plus
 or minus 100  mV was covered.  The cathodlc  reaction orders were 1 for zlncate, and
minus one for hydroxyl ions.  A four-step mechanism, consistent with the kinetic data,
 Is suggested.   It consists  of four consecutive dissociation reactions of the zlncate
complex,  with two of them  incorporating a single electron charge transfer.  The
mechanism of  the anodic and cathodlc reactions Is the  same.  The transients Indicate
only double layer charging and  charge transfer processes.  No surface diffusion effects
or Intermediate build-up was observed (no pseudocapacltance).  A rationalization is
given for the mechanism.  The effect of zinc surface preparation Is discussed.

INDEX TERMS:   Zinc, Alkaline water, Electrolysis, Ions, Chemical Interference, Ion
      exchange, Aqueous solutions, Electrochemistry, Cathodes, Anodes, Electrolytes,
      Physiochemlcal properties, Methodology,  Instrumentation, Electrical properties,
      Tblems equation. Equilibrium, Electrodepositlon, Ion selective electrodes, Zinc
      electrodes,  Potentlostat, Galvanostat.
                         AMC-UO01 (Continued)
                                                                           2/2
                         INDEX TERMS:   Instrumentation,  On-slte data collections,  Oceans,  Electronic equipment,
                               Computers,  Oceanography,  Data transmission.  Data collections,  Automation,
                               Durability,  On-slte investigations,  Hydrologlc data,  Physlcochemlcal properties,
                               Physical properties.  Water pollution control,  Sensors.

-------
                                                                            5.
                                                                                mSTRUMEHT DEVELOPMENT
AMICJt06l
 "USE OF FIBER OPTICS IN THE STUDY  OF CHEMILUMINESCEHT REACTIONS", Brown, R. L.,
The Reylew of Scientific  Instruments, Vol. U3, Ho. 5, May 1972, pp 756-758.

             The use of stationary light pipes and a stationary detector to measure
light decay along a tube  In a  steady state flow system Is described.  This method
exhibits a number of advantages  over that of moving the detector.  A means of
calibrating the transmission of  the light pipes In situ by using the properties
of the yellow nitrogen afterglow Is discussed.  The high degree of spatial resolution
achievable by this technique should make It especially suitable for studies of «™»TI
flames and discharges.

INDEX TERMS:  Instrumentation, Measurement, Chemical reactions, Calibrations, Light,
       Mathematics, Nitrogen, Methodology, Optical properties, On-slte data collections,
       Attenuation, Fiber  optics, ChenllumineBcence, Electron paramagnetic resonance
       spectroscopy. Detectors, Sensors.
  AMTC-U063
  ''QUARTZ CRYSTALS AS MULTIPURPOSE OCEAHOGRAPHIC SENSORS—II.  SPEED",  Resch, F.  J. ,
  Irish,  J.  D.,  Deep Sea Research, Vol.  19,  No.  2,  February 1972,  PP 171-178.

|              An Indirectly heated speed sensor, utilizing temperature-sensitive  quartz
j  crystals,  is evaluated for measuring deep-sea  currents.   In  this Instrument, a quartz
i  crystal la mounted in a pressure case  at the end  of a tube.   Speed sensors behind
|  this tube contain two additional quartz crystals  mounted  on  the  ends of bent tubes in
I  a configuration so that their ends face each other.   One  of  these is heated, the
;  other Is not and measures the ambient  temperature.   The heated crystal then measures
  the Increase above ambient temperature of the  heated element,  which  is a  function  of
  the current magnitude.   The sensor is  used to  measure horizontal currents perpendicular
  to the  two sensing elements.   The Instrument Is shown in  tests to be capable of
  measuring currents well below 1 cm per second  and is particularly well adapted for
  deep-sea tidal measurements.   (See AMEC-U06U)

  INDEX TERMS:   Quartz,  Crystals,  Currents (water),  Measurement, Oceanography, Convection,
       Instrumentation,  Temperature,  Sea water, Telemetry,  On-slte data collections,
       Velocity,  Sensors.
AMICJ*062
"A HIGH PRESSURE OPTICAL CELL FOR STUDY OF BIOCHEMICAL SOLUTIONS", Papanek, T.,
Fabry, T. L., Review of Scientific Instruments, Vol. 1*3, No. 5, May 1972, pp 738-739.

             The construction and use of an optical cell Is described for spectrographlc
studies of biochemical solutions under pressures up to UoBO atm and data from studies
of myoglobln are presented.  The optical cell described incorporates the following
design features:  It Is a monofclock configuration comprising both a pressure
intensifier and an optical portion; the sample contacts only glass and paraffin; the
cell Interfaces easily with spectrophotone trie equipment commonly used in biochemistry;
It Is relatively easy to operate and survives repeated use; it is constructed of Almar
18-250 maraging steel, a material not previously used for this application.

INDEX TERMS:  Spectroscopy, Biochemistry, Instrumentation, Measurement, Spectrophoto-
      metry, Optical cells. Biochemical solutions, Hyoglobin, Biological samples.
 AMIC-1»061»
 QUARTZ CRYSTAIS AS MULTIPURPOSE  CCEAKOGRAFHIC  SENSORS—i.  PRESSURE",  Irish,  J. D.,
 Snodgrass, F. E., Deep-Sea Research, Vol.  19, No.  2, February  1972, pp  165.169.

              The use  of quartz crystals as pressure sensors In oceanographlc studies
 is considered.  A Hewlett Packard Sonde was used which utilizes a  crystal disc
 resonating torslomlly  near  5 MHz at the center of an  evacuated quartz  cylinder.   This
 cylinder transfers fluid pressure to radial forces on  the disc thus increasing its
 resonance  frequency.  A reference crystal  is used  to heterodyne the sensing crystal
 signal and obtain a frequency below 100 KHz.  The  instrument was evaluated for 92  hr  on
 the  sea floor off San Clements Island, California.  After initial  equalization, the
 Sonde drift rate was  less than 1  cm of seavater pressure per day and appeared  to
 diminish with time.   The noise level decreased  from 0.1 sq cm  per  cph at  0.1 cph to less
 than 0.0001 sq cm per cph at 10 cph.  This noise spectrum was  sufficiently low so  that
 the  instrument could  measure ocean  waves of 1 mm of period 1 h.  (See AMIC-U063)

 INDEX TERMS:  Pressure  measuring  Instruments, Quartz,  Crystals,  Waves (water),
       Oceanography, Aquatic  drift,  Pressure, Temperature, Sea  water, Measurement,
       Instrumentation,  Vibrations,  Sensors.
                                                                                     59

-------
                                                                                 INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMEHT
  "THE CALIBRATION OF THERMISTORS OVER THE TEMFERATUJE RAHGE 0-30 EEGBEES C", Bennett,
  A. S., Deep-Sea Research, Vol. 19, No. 2, February 1972, pp 157-163.

               A thermistor suitable for long-term temperature recording In the ocean was
  calibrated to IPTS-68 standards and recalibrated day to day using a triple-point-of-
  water apparatus.  A constant temperature bath was used for the temperature calibrations,
  with resistance measurements having been obtained with a pair of a. e.  Kelvin bridges
  at 159 Hz.  The measured thermistor resistances were corrected for the  heating effect
  of the measuring current by extrapolation of measurements at different  currents.   The
  thermistor resistance-temperature relationship can be determined with an accuracy of
  0.001 C over the range of 0-30 C by a formula with four parameters).  One of the  four
  parameters may be taken as constant for a particular type of thermistor leaving only
  three parameters to be obtained by Individual calibration.   For reduced accuracy  or
  over a narrower temperature span, only two parameters need to be obtained by Individual
  calibration.  If rapidly drifting thermistors are eliminated,  the mean  value of the
  root mean square drift rate of the remainder Is likely to be below the  square root of
  0.00175 degree C/yr for the type of thermistor used In these tests.   The steel probe
  provides adequate protection against ambient pressure.   This type of  thermistor is thus
  suitable for long-term temperature recording in the ocean.   The effect  of pressure on
  the steel probe type of thermistor is .0013 plus or minus .0015 nano  (standard
  deviation) degrees C/bar at pressures up to 700 bar (10,000 psl).

  INDEX TERMS:  Instrumentation, Calibrations,  Mathematics, Equations,  Measurement,  Least
        squares method,  Thermometers,  Water temperature,  Hydrostatic pressure,  On-site
        Investigations,  Thermistors,  Sensors.
                                                                                     ~6b~
See also:  Category 1, AMC-3661
           Category 2, AMIC-3959.

-------